Home
Avaya BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Manual
Contents
1. DS256 connector Warning The timing in the Business Communications Manager system is designed for a 5 m 16 ft Category 5 patch cable The system cannot work properly if you connect the BCM1000e using a cable that is any other length Installation and Maintenance Guide 134 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM1000e expansion unit P0607659 02 135 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches Before you install a media bay module assign switch settings for the media bay module These settings determine which line numbers trunks or DNs extensions the equipment connected to the module will have access to The DIP switches are located on the back or underside of the media bay module Note Fiber Expansion Module FEM switches gt The switches on the fiber expansion module FEM do not work in the same way as those on the other media bay modules On the FEM the switches turn the fiber ports on and off For information about setting the switches on an FEM refer to FEM switch settings on page 150 Start from the list of modules you chose in Chapter 4 Selecting the media bay modules for your system on page 111 After you determine which DS30 channels you want to use and how much DS30 channel capacity each module requires you determine the location of the modules on the DS30 array From that information you choose switch set
2. 20 0eg0 I Front of unit ee 5 ON P0607659 02 Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 291 Installing the new battery This section describes how to replace the clock calendar battery into the base unit A Warning There is a danger of explosion if you do not replace the battery correctly You must replace the battery with a CR2032 3v Maxell coin cell battery The positive side of the battery must face up The battery must sit securely in the battery socket a A Q N Ensure you have the positive side of the battery facing up when you position it in the socket Push down until the battery snaps into the socket Replace the power supply if you removed it Replace the cover Restore the unit to operation Refer to Restarting the system on page 240 Installation and Maintenance Guide 292 Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware P0607659 02 Chapter 21 Replacing telephones 293 Chapter 21 Replacing telephones When the Business Communications Manager system is on you can replace a telephone with a new one and the new set will pick up the current programming if it is the same model as the set that was removed A new telephone is one that was not previously in service within
3. 2 0008 142 Table 18 BRIM S T switch settings 0 cece eee tes 142 Table 19 CTM and CTM8 switch settings DS30 channels 2 5 143 Table 20 4X16 switch settings aaua aaua aaaea 145 Table 21 ASM B8 switch settings oc ccu ogee aun deed aed ewe R nes 147 Table 22 DSM 16 and DSM 32 switch settings 000 eee 148 Table 23 DECT module settings cccsccesceevessscteredsansdevaendue bens 149 Table 24 FEM Swit sellingS c ieci ee dae ninske tn EERS ER EEE 150 Table 25 BCM1000 LED States o sssuirererrrsiineeivr tikete is tnui 161 Tablo 26 DB25adapter cablo 2 5 vi diwekid sedis bas vedere eee ees 165 Table 27 RS 422 EIA 530 adapter cable 00 cece eee ees 166 Table 28 V35 Adapter Cable 2 i040 cceeninei cinee cede cewe eee ecw ams 166 Installation and Maintenance Guide 58 Tables Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 DB15 X21 adapter Gale ic 2cu cece Gide tacdsarectiadtearweners 167 Seral POMPMOUE b2015cnne decked anne Heme teawd eee ede 169 SO OO etka cae eewd ne peed aed ea ates when E A 180 Hoh WDO CANT saps pan mnaiped eee aad hs ee pata ice pees 1
4. Caution Do not use an electric screwdriver near the hard disk You can lose the information stored on the disk Shock can damage the hard disk Do not drop or hit the hard disk drive Removing the hard disk The hard disk brackets are attached to the hard disk and the floor of the BCM1000 When you want to replace a hard disk you remove both the brackets and the disk or disks as one unit so they are easier to work with Warning Ensure that you put all equipment on a static free surface when you are working with it Boards that you need to remove to access parts of the interior must be put into a static free bag until you are ready to replace them in the unit The following steps describe that process for removing the bracket and hard disk unit 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system by following the instructions in Shutting down the system software on page 238 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the BCM1000 for maintenance as described in Shutting down the system hardware on page 239 3 Inside the BCM1000 disconnect the hard disk power cables and ribbon cables P0607659 02 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk 245 4 Remove the four screws holding the hard disk bracket to the BCM1000 Refer to Figure 103 and Figure 104 Note If you are upgrading to a mirrored disk system remove the power cables from the media bay module housing as well Figure
5. DS30 DS30 DS30 DS30 DS30 DS30 Pin Wirecolor channel 2 channel 3 channel 4 channel 5 channel 6 channel 7 26 White Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 1 Blue White Port 201 Port 301 Port 401 Port 501 Port 601 Port 701 27 White Orange DN DN DN DN DN DN 2 Orange White Port 202 Port 302 Port 402 Port 502 Port 602 Port 702 28 White Green DN DN DN DN DN DN 3 Green White Port 203 Port 303 Port 403 Port 503 Port 603 Port 703 29 White Brown DN DN DN DN DN DN 4 Brown White Port 204 Port 304 Port 404 Port 504 Port 604 Port 704 30 White Slate DN DN DN DN DN DN 5 Slate White Port 205 Port 305 Port 405 Port 505 Port 605 Port 705 31 Red Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 6 Blue Red Port 206 Port 306 Port 406 Port 506 Port 606 Port 706 32 Red Orange DN DN DN DN DN DN 7 Orange Red Port 207 Port 307 Port 407 Port 507 Port 607 Port 707 33 Red Green DN DN DN DN DN DN 8 Green Red_ Port 208 Port 308 Port 408 Port 508 Port 608 Port 708 34 Red Brown DN DN DN DN DN DN 9 Brown Red_ Port 209 Port 309 Port 409 Port 509 Port 609 Port 709 35 Red Slate DN DN DN DN DN DN 10 Slate Red Port 210 Port 310 Port 410 Port 510 Port 610 Port 710 36 Black Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 11 Blue Black Port 211 Port 311 Port 411 Port 511 Port 611 Port 711 37 Black Orange DN DN DN DN DN DN 12 Orange Black Port 212 Port 312 Port 412 Port 512 Port 612 Port 712 38 Black Green DN DN DN DN DN DN 13 Green Black Port 213 Port 313 Port 413 Port 513 Po
6. Danger Disconnect the telephone cables and network cables and then the ac power before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Installation and Maintenance Guide 290 Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware Removing the clock calendar battery This section explains how to correctly remove the clock calendar battery 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shutting down the system software on page 238 Otherwise skip to step 2 Set up the BCM1000 for maintenance as described in Shutting down the system hardware on page 239 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface If the system has a redundant power supply you may need to remove this before removing the battery Refer to Chapter 19 Replacing a power supply on page 269 Use your finger to carefully lift the battery out of the socket For the location of the battery socket refer to Figure 149 Caution Do not use any type of tool to remove the battery Figure 149 Removing the clock calendar battery The battery is located under the edge of the
7. Note If you Choose a CTM8 or a 4X16 module there are some restrictions about the offsets you can choose Refer to the DIP switch settings in CTM switch settings on page 143 and 4X16 switch settings on page 145 for details B Installation and Maintenance Guide 118 Chapter 4 Selecting the media bay modules for your system 1 Make a list of modules and the space requirements for each module you chose Refer to Table 12 Table 12 Matching modules to DS30 channel capacity Channel split 2 6 default 3 5 extra IP lines Type of module Number required DS30 channels offsets required 2 Set the channel numbers and offsets on the DIP switches of the module Refer to Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches on page 135 Note that you assign trunk modules starting from the bottom DS30 channel and you assign station modules starting from the top DS30 channel 3 Install the modules into the BCM1000 or BCM1000e Refer to Chapter 8 Installing media bay modules on page 151 P0607659 02 119 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM1000 This chapter describes how to install the BCM1000 Preparation checklist Before you install the base unit complete the following actions Determine the location for the BCM1000 telephones and other equipment based on spacing and electrical requirements For more information about spacing and electrical requirements
8. Status Mirrored hard disk 9000000000 OOGi23455 8 Primary hard disk Business Communications Manager Note The BCM1000 does not use the Slave channel on the RAID board therefore the Slave Status LED will always remain solid red Table 44 RAID board LED states LED state Primary and Mirror LEDs Status LEDs e Solid Green Drive installed on the current channel Drives are in mirror mode data is identical e _ Flashing Green N A Drives may not be identical ms Solid Red Drive not installed Drives are not in mirror mode Flashing Red The channel is marked as bad Copy Compare in progress ee S Solid Orange Channel activity read write Copy Compare in progress under windows Flashing Orange Scanning the channel for drives N A Ms D P0607659 02 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk 259 Controlling and monitoring mirroring operations You can monitor and control disk mirroring through a control screen in the Unified Manager Under Diagnostics Diskmirroring you can access a screen that allows you to control the mirroring operation from your desktop as well as display the status of the hard disks Refer to Table 45 for a list of the fields and a description of their function Table 45 HDD Mirror Setting
9. Also you can answer an external caller using the call handling features such as Call Park or Call Pickup Directed Internet Protocol IP The protocol that supports data being sent from one computer to another through an interconnection internet of networks IP is a connectionless protocol which means that there is no established connection between the end points that are communicating IP address The internally assigned address that identifies a destination and transmitting computer over a internet See also static IP address and dynamic IP address IP address server The IP address server manages the assignment of IP addresses to the devices that access the system The server assigns an IP address to the device whenever it logs on to the network ISDN DN A directory number DN used by ISDN terminal equipment connected to the system The Business Communications Manager system uses a maximum of 30 ISDN DNs The DECT cordless handsets use this type of DN kbyte The abbreviation for kilobyte A kilobyte is equal to 1024 bytes keycode These numerical codes generated for specific applications and for individual sites allow access to additional features on the Business Communications Manager system Refer to the Software Keycode Installation guide for details line The complete path of a voice or data connection between one telephone or other device and another line number A number that identifies an externa
10. Primary and Mirrored hard disks RAID disk controller board Media bay module cabinet P0607659 02 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 73 Power supply The BCM1000 can have a single standard power supply module or a redundant power supply module Single power supply Business Communications Manager equipment can also be upgraded to redundant Business Communications Manager system by installing a redundant power supply in place of the standard power supply Note Power supplies for the BCM1000 are auto switching power supplies gt The power supply on an original 2 0 system has a voltage switch that must be set to the correct voltage Cooling fan The BCM1000 can have a single cooling fan or a redundant set of fans Units with redundant power supplies always have two cooling fans e BCM1000 systems upgraded from 2 0 hardware to redundant power supply systems use a piggy back fan configuration e The BCM1000 2 5 hardware has side by side fan ports Hard disk The BCM1000 can have either a single hard disk or a mirrored disk configuration RAID 1 Units delivered with the mirrored disk configuration can also have redundant power supply and fan assemblies installed although redundant power supplies and fans are not a requirement for running disk mirroring The Business Communications Manager supports the RAID 1 disk mirroring protocol This protocol cre
11. To install a base station A OO N a 76 Figure 76 Bracket termination board RJ11 jack Bo Fasten the bracket into position using two 8 38 mm 1 1 2 in screws Route the cable from the BCM1000 through the top or bottom opening Wind any excess cable around the posts then fasten the cable under the strain relief Connect the wires to the BIX connector on the bracket termination board as shown in Figure P0607659 02 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 205 The polarity of the TCM connections is not important If you connect the two power pairs to the bracket terminal board of the base station you must connect the power pairs with the same polarity Caution Ensure that the RPI is off before connecting power pairs to the base station Install the base station on the bracket Snap it into position Connect the power RJ 11 jumper lead to the RJ 11 jacks on the termination board and the base station 7 For plug top power supplies only connect the power supply connector to the base station power connector Make sure the base station uses a class 2 plug top power source only Caution If you insert the power supply connector in the wrong direction you can damage the plug top power supply and the base stations Position the power supply connector in the correct direction and push it into place 8 Inthe space provided on th
12. screws Other screws can damage the BCM1000e 7 Align the slots on the wall mounting bracket over the screws 8 Push the unit against the wall and slide it down so the slots rest on the screws 9 Tighten the two screws to the wall mounting bracket Installing the BCM1000e on a flat surface You can install the BCM1000e on any flat surface that can support the weight of the unit and which is within 5 m 16 ft of the BCM1000 1 Attach the supplied rubber feet to the corners of the bottom of the BCM1000e Position the unit on the table or shelf Ensure that you leave enough space around the unit for ventilation and access to the cables and media bay modules Connecting the BCM1000e to the BCM1000 After the BCM1000e has been installed in the desired location use the supplied DS256 cable to connect it to the BCM1000 1 Plug one end of the cable into the DS256 connector on the BCM1000e Refer to Figure 47 Figure 47 DS256 connector on the BCM1000e NORTEL NETWORKS DS256 connector P0607659 02 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM1000e expansion unit 133 2 Plug the other end of the cable into the DS256 connector on the faceplate of the MSC in the BCM1000 Refer to Figure 48 Figure 48 BCM1000 DS258 connector
13. 110 Chapter3 Auxiliary requirements If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer set the following parameters Check for newer versions Every visit to the page Java JIT compiler enabled On Preloading Java class files on your workstation To preload Java class files on your workstation 1 Open Unified Manager from your desktop The first window displays a number of functional buttons Click the Install Client button From the list choose the link to the Java Class for the browser you are using Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator Two more Java Class links appear Click on the Java Class link that applies to your browser A download wizard appears Follow the prompts on the wizard to download the Java Class files Optimizing Unified Manager speed The following are a number of suggestions about how to ensure you have the optimal connection to your Unified Manager while you program or maintain your Business Communications System Use the LAN WAN or serial port to connect to your computer and use the Unified Manager to perform configuration If you run multiple operations on your computer we recommend that you use Windows NT or 2000 to ensure optimal performance with the Unified Manager If your computer is using Windows 95 98 the interaction can be slower if you attempt to run more than one application P0607659 02 Chapter 4 Selecting the media bay modules for your system The media bay mo
14. Phillips screwdriver 2 flat blade screwdriver pliers antistatic grounding strap connecting tool surge protector recommended cables 25 pair cable with amphenol connectors P0607659 02 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM1000 123 Installing the BCM1000 in a rack The BCM1000 fits into a standard 19 inch equipment rack You can install the base unit in the same rack as your other networking and telecommunications equipment Caution When installing the BCM1000 in a rack do not stack units directly on top of one another in the rack Fasten each unit to the rack with the appropriate mounting brackets Mounting brackets cannot support multiple units Refer to Environment checklist on page 119 for acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM1000 Attaching the rack mounting brackets Follow these steps to attach the rack mounting brackets to the base unit 1 Place the BCM1000 on a table 2 Align the screw holes between the base unit and the right rack mounting bracket 3 Fasten the bracket to the base unit using the four supplied screws Caution Only use the screws supplied with the rack mounting bracket Do not replace screws Other screws can damage the BCM1000 4 Align the screw holes between the base unit and the left rack mounting bracket 5 Fasten the bracket to the base unit using the four supplied screws Refer to Figure 40 Figure 40 Attaching the rack mou
15. e 9600 bits per second e 8 data bits e no parity e 1 stop bit e hardware flow control Note For instructions about how to set the transmission parameters refer to the terminal or terminal emulation program documentation The Business Communications Manager system supports carriage return Finding the configuration menus To carry out this procedure the BCM1000 must be correctly powered up as described in Chapter 9 Starting the system on page 159 1 Attach the null modem cable to the serial port on the BCM1000 Note The location of the transmit TX and receive RX pins on your terminal can vary Refer to your terminal or computer documentation to confirm pin locations Attach the other end of the cable to the serial port on the terminal or computer Ensure that the BCM1000 and your terminal or computer are turned on If you are using a computer start your VT100 terminal program Press lt ENTER gt oOo oa fF W ND When prompted for a User ID type ee admin lt ENTER gt J When prompted for a Domain press lt ENTER gt When prompted for a Password type eedge lt ENTER gt The Main Menu screen appears Refer to Figure 60 Note If the Initialization Menu screen appears instead of the Main Menu screen shown below your BCM1000 system is not initialized correctly Systems normally are initialized at the factory so this will seldom occur If you see this on system startup consult w
16. per DS30 PDD note If DS30 6 and 7 are in partial double density mode you can only install modules set to single density This also means that only two ASMB8s could be installed on each DS30 bus 1 DS30 bus Double density mode 1 DS30 bus 1DD ZED DSM 32 DSM 16 DS30 per DS30 per 1DS30 bus 4 DD ASM8s per DS30 The following diagram provides a system view of what double density looks like from a system perspective Note that this example is based on the default setting which provides partial double density to DS30 06 and 07 Installation and Maintenance Guide P0607659 02 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 addendum 35 Figure 13 Assigning double density modules to the DS30 bus hierarchy Example of Example of a Double density example North American European based based setup setup system configured as PDD DS30 buses Partial density Systems configured with Partial double density PDD allow 2 Companion telephones on DS30 06 and 07 if the system is DD DSM 32 0 DD DSM 32 set to a 2 6 split In this configuration DS30 06 and 07 only e allow single density modules DS30 02 to 05 are set to allow double density modules Dems eS 03 DD DSM 32 i Double density Le Systems configured with Full double density FDD do not CIM allow Companion telephones All DS30s are set to allow any 04 double density modules ro ae DD DSM 32 e a 3 5 channel split F
17. 256 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk Routing power for mirrored systems There are specific power cable configurations for the mirrored disks depending on what system you are using A Warning Ensure that the cables on the front of the unit have been removed and that the ac power is off when you connect or disconnect power cables to this equipment Power routing for 2 5 hardware Follow these steps to connect power to the hard disks the media bay module housing and to the RAID board Refer to Figure 116 Each step number in the following procedure corresponds to an item in the diagram 1 yy Oo oO FB WO ND Select two power cables that have three Molex female connectors and route them under the power supply and media services card MSC along the bottom of the chassis Connect the end connector of the first cable to the middle of the media bay module back plane Connect the next connector of the first cable to the Primary hard disk bottom disk Connect the last connector of the first cable to the RAID card Connect the end connector of the second cable to the top of the media bay module back plane Connect the next connector of the second cable to the secondary hard disk top disk Connect the last connector of the second cable to the bottom of the media bay module back plane Figure 116 Connecting the power cables for mirrored disks 2 5 version of BCM1000 P0607659 02 Chapter 17 Replacing the
18. 5 Remove the snap rivets that hold the fan to the BCM1000 Refer to Figure 123 and Figure 124 6 Lift the old fan out of the BCM1000 Figure 123 Removing the fan BCM1000 version 2 5 single fan model M up Ga FE tS SOR SOSSSSSODS SSSI REEE SS Fan attachments P0607659 02 Chapter 18 Adding or replacing a cooling fan 265 Replacing the cooling fan To replace the fan in the BCM1000 follow these steps 1 Place the new fan in the BCM1000 in the position from which you removed the failed fan Note Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back wall of the BCM1000 B gt Note Piggy backed redundant fan If you are installing or replacing a piggy back redundant fan in a version 2 0 BCM1000 that has been updated with a redundant power supply place the redundant fan against the existing fan Ensure that the blades are positioned in the same direction as the existing fan fan labels both face in the same direction Use the four screws and nuts that are supplied with the redundant fan to attach the redundant fan to the existing fan Figure 125 Installing piggy backed fans 2 Align the screw holes in the fan with the screw holes on the BCM1000 Note Side by side redundant fan If you are installing a second fan in a 2 5 model BCM1000 you must remove the cover label on the back of the server to expose the fan a
19. CTM North American systems only The Calling line identification CLID Trunk media bay module CTM connects to four analog CLID PSTN lines CTM 8 North American systems only This CLID Trunk media bay module CTM connects to eight analog CLID PSTN lines 4X16 North American systems only This module combines a four line CLID Trunk media bay module CTM with a 16 line Digital Station media bay module DTM The Digital Trunk media bay module DTM connects to standard digital PSTN T1 E1 or PRI lines BRI The Basic Rate Interface media bay module BRI connects to four BRI S T ISDN lines NT1 required S interface for European profiles T interface for North American based profiles ASM 8 North American systems only The Analog Station media bay module ASM 8 connects to eight analog telephones or other analog equipment such as fax machines DSM 16 The 16 port Digital Station media bay module DSM 16 connects to a maximum of 16 digital telephones DSM 32 The 32 port Digital Station media bay module DSM 32 connects to a maximum of 32 digital telephones DECT This module allows radio based cordless handsets to access systems that are configured to accept the Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT profile The module connects to radio base stations which receive and transmit signals to the handsets Refer to Mobility services by region on page 299 to determine the profiles
20. DS30 5 supports If your system is set to a 3 5 split DS30 07 is not available to 05 BRI diab dul the station module any media bay modules partok the 4X16 L SDDSM32 06 sri LL _ Companion DECT 07 Setting module DIP switches for double density Doubling the available telephone lines also requires additional DN records to accommodate the additional telephones The following charts show the DIP switch settings for single and double density Note that the ASM8s do not have special double density single density settings whereas DSM16 and DSM32 modules must be set to one mode or the other Note that the second set of 16 lines are not consecutively numbered from the first set This was done to accommodate existing installations ASM 8 switch settings In a single density configuration such as for DS30 06 or 07 when they are set to the default PDD only offset 1 and 2 are available to ASMB8s In a double density configuration you can install four ASM8s per DS30 bus Table 1 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus and the dialing numbers DNs assigned to each DS30 P0607659 02 Installation and Maintenance Guide 36 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 addendum Table 1 ASM68 settings for 2 5 systems upgraded to 3 0 software Select Select Enter these switch To assign bus offset settings these DNs 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 5 system upgraded to
21. Number of lines Number of modules Type of lines Number of lines module per module required T1 digital lines DTM 24 DTM PRI digital lines NA DTM 23 DTM required for Companion wireless E1 digital lines DTM 30 DTM PRI digital lines EMEA DTM 30 DTM Analog lines CTM 4 CTM North American systems only Analog lines CTM8 8 CTM North American systems only Analog lines 4X16 combination 4 CTM module also requires a North American full DS30 channel system only for the DNs BRI ISDN lines BRI 4 ISDN loops BRI Cordless handsets DECT DECT 4 ISDN loops DECT selected profiles only requires a full DS30 channel P0607659 02 Chapter 4 Selecting the media bay modules for yoursystem 113 An example e Ifyou require 24 T1 digital lines you need one DTM because a single DTM can handle 24 T1 lines North America e If you require two analog lines and 24 T1 digital lines you need one CTM and one DTM Note Although the DTM supports several types of digital lines you cannot connect different types of lines to the same DTM You can add a maximum of three DTMs to your Business Communications Manager system and only on the BCM1000 Tip The BCM1000 can hold three media bay modules If you require more than three modules a BCM1000e can be connected to support an additional six additional modules Selecting the station media bay modules The nu
22. Swoajaaonbwner Note e a selection 1 2 3 4 the hardware profile for this unit an Etiquette core load to the MSC an CT2 Plus core load to the MSc an El core load to the MSC an El Global core load to the MSc an E1 CALA core load to the MSC the automatic MSC upload Disabled the System Status Monitor firmware DECT ALaw muLaw ALaw Main Menu Selections 2 6 enable you to upload the MSC software for your region 5 6 7 6 9 M _ a Enter the number beside the upload for the software you want to install If you do not know which software to upload refer to Core software and regions on page 295 Warning If you have a DECT system and your system requires a muLAW companding AN law protocol ensure that the entry in the brackets in entry 9 says muLaw If it does not refer to the DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide for directions about how to change this P0607659 02 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk 251 b Next you need to ensure the correct MSC configuration has been entered Enter 1 Select the hardware profile for this unit The screen shown in Figure 111 appears Figure 111 Profile screen Default MSC Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Image 1 BCM WVMN CONFIG WAN V 90 MSC NIC ETQ 2 BCM NVMN CONFIG NIC V 90 MSC NIC ETQ 3 BCM INMN CONFIG IWAN NIC MSC NIC El 4 BCM N_MN CONFIG NIC MSC NIC El 5 Base Platform n a n a MSC NIC n a 6 Select an alternate MSC ima
23. 000000 00 BCM1000e o off Oy a I a o ok CY oy 000 000 000 000 ao 1 Push against the bottom 2 Pull out from the top Restarting the system When you finish your maintenance procedures restart the Business Communications Manager hardware in the order described in this section Restoring the system to operation To restore the system to operation after a maintenance session follow these steps 1 Ensure that all cables inside the housing are connected snuggly to the correct boards and excess cable is bundled neatly out of the way Put the bezel back on the BCM1000 or BCM1000e if you removed it Put the lid back on the unit and replace the screws If you removed the unit from the rack or wall replace it Plug the BCM1000e if there is one back into the ac power source oOo oa fF ODN Plug the BCM1000 back into the ac power source P0607659 02 Chapter 16 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 241 The Business Communications Manager automatically starts booting Warning When you restart the system all IP clients voice mail and VoIP ports are not AN available until the system services restart If you have a mirrored disk system once the services have been restarted the system automatically ensures that the mi
24. 300 Appendix A System region attributes Table 56 Module availability by region Continued Region DSM16 DSM32 ASM CTM CTM8 4X16 BRI DTM DECT Hong Kong v v v y y y Italy v v v v North American y y y v v v Norway v v v v PRC y v v v v Spain v v v v Sweden v v v v Switzerland v v v v Taiwan y y v v v v United Kingdom v v v v Trunk availability by region Different countries have different available trunk types Table 56 provides a cross reference between regions and available trunks types Table 57 Trunk availability by region Country PRI specific ETSI 30 channels analog Region BRI S T 2 4 BRIU2 4 NA 23 channels Analog DID E amp M CLASS trunk card Australia v v v CALA y y v v v v Caribbean y v v v v v Denmark y v France v v v Germany v v v Global M v v v Holland y v v Hong Kong v v v v v Italy v v North American y y v v v v Norway v v P0607659 01 Appendix A System region attributes 301 Table 57 Trunk availability by region Continued Country PRI specific ETSI 30 channels analog Region BRI S T 2 4 BRIU2 4 NA 23 channels Analog DID E amp M CLASS trunk card PRC v y v y Spain v v Sweden v v Switzerland v v Taiwan v v v v v United Kingdom ov v v Table 58 PRI line protocol su
25. Awdilary egumen iad nu chee ad eew HROs O ORs oe RASSSSEES KREGER ERED BREE 21 T7316E Business Series Terminal and KIMS 20 eee 21 Market prome changes tf ised pale Le eee al oo eed Loe EA aa RE dasa 23 Product and documentation Updates o psce panes titt anr E peso EEEE pace ouds 26 BCM 3 0 1 program updates 0 0 22 0cce nee eee eee nena 27 Initializing the hard disk single disk system 0 000 eee eee 27 Productand documentation updates oo srs risia rerreiiriss pruri erir 32 Installation and Maintenance Guide 44 Contents BCM 3 0 program updates 020 eee ee 33 Plationm compatibili ci ccc cetera nero woe eo EEE EREEREER EREEREER EA 33 Explaining Double Density ci 5 50 0 ved eas Gab a eee oe a RRS CREM SORE TO Ras 33 Setting module DIP switches for double density 000 eeee 35 ASM 8 switch settings i cc ci econ eee ee eee ee eee ee ER eee 35 DSM16 DSM 32 single density switch settings upgraded system 36 DSM16 and DSM 32 double density switch settings upgraded system 37 CTM CTM8 and 4X16 CTM DSM switch settings 38 Upgrading from a standard system wowace ek eee ee retki aw de 39 Initializing the hard disk single disk system 00 000 cece eee ee 40 Product and documentation updates 4 hsscccds veneers sy Vas eveedsdanv eves 42 ae 6 hee seen chee E E ewes ee tekee ce aenn idee eee ue 59 Symbols used in this guid 22 cers eeeri ce
26. CALA 403 ETSI QSIG ISDN ETSI 300 403 300 239 MCDN Caribbean NI 2 NI 2 NI 2 Loop North American 4ESS E amp M DMS100 DID DMS250 Ground MCDN Fixed trunk types Hong Kong ITU T ITU T ITU T Loop Taiwan E amp M DID Ground Fixed trunk types Denmark ETSI QSIG 300 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 France 239 ISDN ETSI DPNSS Germany 300 403 MCDN Global ETSI QSIG 300 239 Holland ISDN ETSI 300 403 Norway PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Italy ISDN ETSI 300 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 102 ETSI QSIG DPNSS 300 239 MCDN ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 102 United Kingdom ETSI QSIG 300 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 239 ISDN ETSI DPNSS 300 403 MCDN ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 403 Product and documentation updates For the latest information about Business Communications Manager product and documentation updates access the Nortel Networks web site at the following URL http www nortelnetworks com support BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide P0607659 02 NORTEL Business Communications Manager 3 0 1 NETWORKS functional changes for BCM1000 BCM 3 0 1 program updates This document provides supplemental information about release 3 0 for systems using BCM1000s that has been upgraded from Business Communications Manager software version 3 0 to version 3 0 1 maintenance release Initializing the hard disk single disk system The BCM1000 is normally initialized at the factory However if you have to replace the hard drive in a si
27. Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 289 7 Slide the new DIMM edge connectors first into the slot Note The DIMM has two notches on the edge connector Position the DIMM so that one of the notches is on the side of the slot nearest to the Business Communications Manager cards 8 Carefully push the DIMM down until the fastening tabs clip to the side of the DIMM Note Do not force the DIMM into its slot If the DIMM does not slide in easily check the gt alignment of the DIMM 9 Replace any boards or cables that you removed to insert the memory chips 10 Replace the cover 11 Restore the unit to operation Refer to Restarting the system on page 240 for details Replacing the clock calendar battery The clock calendar battery supplies the power required to keep the BIOS information current if there is a power failure Figure 148 provides an overview of the process of replacing this component Warning You must replace the battery with a CR2032 3v Maxell coin cell battery Do not use any other manufacturer because this may invalidate the safety approval of the BCM1000 hardware and possibly cause a fire or explosion Figure 148 Process Map Battery replacement overview Do a software shutdown Set up unit for Install maintenance new battery WARNING faces up CAREFULLY lift battery off motherboard Restore unit to operation
28. Denmark Danish Norwegian Swedish NA France Euro French NA English English P0607659 02 BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide 24 BCM1000 BCM 3 5 addendum CallPilot profiles The following table lists the default prime language for the countries regions where the voice mail application is supported Table 6 CallPilot region default voice mail languages by country Country Default language Country Default language North America France Euro French Australia Germany i l 7 German Caribbean NA English Switzerland Global CALA LA Spanish Hong Kong Italy Italian UK Norwa Norwegian UK English 4 7 5 Europe Spain Spanish Denmark Danish PRC Mandarin Tai andarin Taiwan Holland Dutch Taiwan Sweden Swedish Brazil Portuguese The following table shows the companding law used for each region Table 7 Companding laws and profiles Companding Law mu law A law Caribbean Hong Kong North American Taiwan Australia Brazil CALA Denmark France Germany Global Holland Italy Norway PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide P0607659 02 BCM1000 BCM 3 5 addendum 25 The following table shows the Mobility services that are supported by the Business Communications Manager and the regions that can use each type Table 8 Mobility services by r
29. Grasp the edge of the front bezel and pull it forward L 1 Push against the bottom BCM1000e 2 Pull out from the top 3 Select an open media bay 4 Pull the latch beside the selected bay to release the media bay bezel Refer to Figure 54 Figure 54 Identifying the media bay module latches BCM1000 OOO000000000 media bay module latches o emg 3 BCM1000e Q O Beco oe 00 0 000 000 000 oe 000 0 0 0 0 0O 0 00 00 00 Installation and Maintenance Guide 154 Chapter 8 Installing media bay modules 5 On the back of the module if it has a wired connector between the daughter board and the back of the module ensure that the wires are intact and sitting as closely as possible against the back of the media bay module See warning below Figure 55 Warning of possible shorting issue on media bay modules Power connector connects to backplane 6 With the face of the module towards yourself insert the media bay module into the open bay ensuring that the sides of the module are para
30. I o 4 ROTAS l I RAID board Power Disk Status PCI Device PCI pevie Temperature Fan LEDs see note O Perevice PCI Device i PCIDevie e Note RAID board LED status monitoring is done through a separate Diagnostics screen Refer to Controlling and monitoring mirroring operations on page 259 Media Bay Module LEDs are discussed in Media bay module common features on page 90 The Business Communications Manager System Status Monitor allows you to view the status of the system LEDs on your PC This allows you to make preliminary decisions regarding the type of intervention required without necessarily having to view the BCM1000 hardware You can enter the System Status Monitor through the Unified Manager 1 Open the Unified Manager 2 Under Diagnostics click on System Status Monitor The LED Display screen appears Refer to Figure 97 This screen displays the current status of the operational LEDS Figure 97 System Status Monitor LED Display screen LED Display LED Display E Power E HDD E Watchdog E Wan E Wan E 90 E HSC E Nic E Temp E Fans On Flash On On On On On On Off Off Installation and Maintenance Guide 234 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting 3 To set the parameters for the System Status Sanity check click the LED Settings tab The LED Settings record appears Figure 98 System Status Monitor LED Settings record CED Display LED Settings LED Settings Version fi
31. Reset N A vw Sanity Time 240 Timeouts fio Table 43 lists the values on the LED Settings screen Table 43 LED Display screen settings Attribute Values Description Version Read only The current version of the LED monitoring application Reset Yes No N A Use Yes to allow the system status monitor board to reset the computing platform in the event that the sanity check fails the user set parameters Sanity Time 60 255 The time in seconds between sanity checks Default 240 Timeouts 0 254 The number of sanity checks that must fail before the system Default 10 status monitor sends a reset signal to the computing platform Emergency telephone does not function If the emergency telephone is connected to the system use the following procedure A OO N Check the power LED on the ASM 8 to check that the ASM 8 is receiving power Check that the emergency telephone has dial tone Check the external line and emergency telephone connections To avoid damage to the emergency telephone connect the telephone directly to the external line and check for dial tone Replace the MSC P0607659 02 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting 235 If the emergency telephone is connected to the CTM use the following procedure 1 Check that the system has a CTM installed 2 Check that there is no dial tone at the emergency telephone 3 Replace the CTM ATA 2 does not function If the Business Commun
32. e 6ring cycles e 6 ring cycles e 6 ring cycles e 10ringcycles e 10 ring cycles Handsfree none none none Pickup Group none none none Remind Delay 60 secs 60 secs 60 secs Allow SLR disabled disabled disabled Transfer Callback Show in second disabled disabled disabled Default 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles ISDN overlap receiving Options e 3ring cycles e 3 ring cycles e 3 ring cycles e 4 ring cycles e 4 ring cycles e 4 ring cycles e 5 ring cycles e 5 ring cycles e 5 ring cycles e 6ring cycles e 6 ring cycles e 6 ring cycles e 12ringcycles e 12 ring cycles e 12 ring cycles Dialling Plan market dependent market dependent market dependent defined in defined in defined in application application but application but but controlled by market controlled by controlled by market profile ID market profile ID profile ID ONN Blocking VSC for analog n a n a 141 tone VSC for analog n a n a 141 pulse VSC for BRI n a n a 141 VSC for PRI n a n a 141 State for BRI PRI n a n a send feature code Default CO lines 2 2 4 UTAM enabled disabled disabled Portable credits 0 defined in the n a application max Release reason Release text none none detail Release code disabled disabled disabled Display duration 3 sec 3 sec 3 sec Overlap Receiving disabled enabled disabled Local Number length for 8 8 8 P0607659 01 Appendix A System region attributes 307 Table 61
33. or from eKIM to eKIM but initial line assignment and hunt group appearance assignment occurs in system programming The T7316E telephone displays a set of icons in place of flashing arrows when it is connected to a system with BCM 3 5 software If you connect a T7316E telephone to a system that is running previous versions the standard line indicators display The KIM also displays these icons KIMs are only supported by BCM 3 5 and later software Table 3 T7316E and KIM display icons Ca Active call The line is active and or you are connected to this telephone om Ringing A call is coming into this line gt Hold The call on this line is on Hold at this telephone Cc Call forward The call on this line has been forwarded A Active button The feature assigned to this button is active Also used by Do Not Disturb Refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 5 Programming Operations Guide for details about programming the T7316E and CAPs BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide P0607659 02 BCM1000 BCM 3 5 addendum 23 The KIM hardware and T7316E both come with installation and initial setup user cards Refer to the CAP User Card for details about using the T7316E KIM as part of your telephony system Market profile changes A new market profile for Brazil is available in BCM 3 5 software The following table shows the core software available to each region Table 4 Core software defined by reg
34. the fields that occur in the Configuration Wizard Note When you change IP address Region Template and or Start DN the system prompts you for a restart after you accept the changes After the system restarts you can continue with your system configuration Warning Changing this information on an existing system completely erases the telephony programming and disables the telephony system It also reboots the BCM1000 and BCM1000e if there is one Installation and Maintenance Guide 172 Chapter 9 Starting the system Using an Ethernet crossover cable You use an ethernet crossover cable connected to a computer with a network card to connect your computer to the LAN card in the BCM1000 With this connection you can run Business Communications Manager Unified Manager to configure the Business Communications Manager system without a network connection You use this type of connection in these situations e the computer you are using does not have access to the Business Communications Manager system through the network e the Business Communications Manager is not connected to a LAN or WAN e you have to change the IP address and netmask for the BCM1000 before you connect it to the network Setting the crossover connections To connect to the Business Communications Manager using an Ethernet crossover cable you need a computer equipped with a 10 100 Base T network interface card and TCP IP protocol Figure 61 shows the con
35. to assign to the modules each module for the DS30 channel offset P0607659 02 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches 139 Table 14 shows possible DS30 channel and offset configurations for each type of module and the corresponding switch settings For DECT and FEM settings refer to DECT switch settings on page 149 and FEM switch settings on page 150 Example Position your DSM 16 module step 1 which requires one full DS30 channel step 2 in DS30 channel 2 step 3 Moving across note that the offset is 0 step 4 Set the DIP switches on the module to match the DIP switch settings indicated for that offset step 5 Table 14 Possible media bay module DIP switch settings Media bay module positioning DIP switch settings DS30 channel Offsets 23 45 6 0 1 2 3 offset DS30 ch supported Module set to offset 0 Module set to offset 1 m Module set to offset 2 C Module set to offset 3 Each shaded square represents the amount of the DS30 channel and the offset which the module requires lf your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available to media bay modules Installation and Maintenance Guide 140 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches Setting the DIP switches on the modules Before you install the media bay modules into the BCM1000 or BCM1000e housing you need to set the
36. 1 Initialize Menu 2 Upload an Etiquette core load to the HSC 3 Upload an CT2 Plus core load to the HSC 4 Upload an E1 core load to the HSC 5 Upload an E1 Global core load to the HSC 6 Upload an E1 CALA core load to the HSC 7 Toggle the automatic MSC upload Enabled 8 Selection not available no SSH firmware on BCH466 M Main Menu a nnn nnn Product Version BCH466 Release 3 6 Version RC 2 6 Issue 1 t e Initialization Complete Configuration Valid Service startup Auto anna nnn MMMM MMMM Motherboard TBD PCI Cards MSC Empty Modem LAN LAN MSCVersion Sa aa te lorena tenionientententententenentententententententen Hake a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M 7ff 2 Enter 1 Initialize Menu and press lt ENTER gt The Initialize Menu appears Refer to Figure 9 1 800 4 NORTEL www nortelnetworks com Installation and Maintenance Guide P0993298 02 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 addendum 41 Figure 9 Platform Initialization Menu screen 1 Initialize Universal Profile 2 Set service startup to Auto 3 Set service startup to Manual 4 Clear all event logs S Display active partition information 6 Display inactive partition information 7 Display Manufacturing Release Note 8 Platform Initialization Menu M Return to Main Menu a nn nn nee Product Version BCH466 Release 3 6 Version RC 2 6 Issue 1 Cae ee ltt MMi Initialization Complete Configuration Valid Servic
37. 103 Hard disk wiring single disk and screw locations 2 0 hardware 245 Figure 104 Hard disk and screw locations 2 5 version hardware 245 Figure 105 Remove the brackets from the hard disk 000e0 ees 246 Figure 106 Connect the brackets to the hard disk single disk system 247 Figure 107 Installing two hard disks for a mirrored disk system 247 Figure 108 Cabling the RAID board to the hard disks 2 005 248 Figure 109 Main Menu SCI66N gcc cinnk gence ced ee cade nnee dees eames en nns 249 Figure 110 Platform Initialization Menu screen 000 cee eee 250 Figure 11T Polle Sereen seis se dae asi dia oe ac gaged diag Seca A cc daa Bias oa 251 Figure 112 Base unit with RAID board plus redundant power and fans 252 Figure 113 Clip the RAID board onto the media bay module housing 253 Figure 114 RAID board LEDs on face of base unit 0 254 Figure 11S RAID Board ccd nce e sche ORR eR Ree tEn eRe ee Rn ee 255 Figure 116 Connecting the power cables for mirrored disks 2 5 version of BCM1000 256 Figure 117 Connecting the power cables for mirrored disks 2 0 version of BCM1000 257 Figure 118 RAID board LEDS tcc cce ck ekead a eked Dees a Re CROtas ace heR ww Kee 258 Figure 119 Process Map Replacing a cooling fan 0 eee eee 261 Figure 120 Business Communications Manager operational LEDs 262 Figure 1
38. 103 Hard disk wiring single disk and screw locations 2 0 hardware Arrows show bracket lo l screw locations gt t Power supply Figure 104 Hard disk and screw locations 2 5 version hardware Arrows show bracket screw locations Power supply O g i Ope Peeage Installation and Maintenance Guide 246 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk 5 Lift the bracketed hard disk s out of the unit 6 Remove the screws that fasten the brackets to the hard disk Refer to Figure 105 Note Mirrored disks gt If you are upgrading to a mirrored s
39. 3 0 on on on on on on 221 228 on on on on on 228 236 on 377 384 on 385 392 on on on on N Of N OF NM on o on 237 244 245 252 393 400 401 408 253 260 261 268 409 416 417 424 Select bus 05 Select Enter these switch offset settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 5 system upgraded to 3 0 on on on To TCustom DN assign range these DNs 269 276 277 284 425 432 433 440 381 388 389 396 457 464 465 472 T The extensions listed are based ona three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column 2 If your system is configured with a 3 5 channel split DS30 07 is not available 3 Available only on systems set to FDD 4 Available only on systems set to FDD with a 2 6 DS30 split DSM16 DSM 32 single density switch settings upgraded system The following table shows the switch settings for DSM modules deployed as single density on a system that has been upgraded from Business Communications Manager version 2 5 to version 3 0 All your current modules are probably single density modules If you intend to continue to use them you do not have to change any settings They will continue to function in the same manner as before DSM16 and DSM32 modules can be set to either density To s
40. 300 DN 316 16 Blue Yellow Port 216 Port 316 Port 416 Port 516 Port 616 Port 716 Installing an emergency telephone You can use the emergency telephone to make calls when there is no power to the Business Communications Manager hardware To install an emergency telephone on the Business Communications Manager system connect a single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM When you make a call from the emergency telephone the auxiliary port uses the telephone line connected to the Line 1 port of the CTM TIP You can connect an emergency telephone to every CTM installed on your Business gt Communications Manager system Use the following steps to install the emergency telephone 1 Connecta single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM 2 Connect an analog PSTN line cable to the Line port of the CTM Installation and Maintenance Guide 188 Chapter 11 Installing telephones and peripherals Installing IP telephones The Business Communications Manager emobility strategy includes support for the Nortel Networks 12004 and i2002 IP telephones the Nortel Networks i2050 Software Phone and the NetVision and the NetVision Data portable handsets The system can be set to automatically assign DNs to the Nortel IP telephones If you choose to manually assign DNs choose DNs from the following digital range if possible Ensure that the DN type in each DN record is set to IP te
41. 91 98 on on on on on on on on 3 1 off off 189 196 6 1 off off 99 106 on on on on on on on on 2 197 204 2 off off 107 114 on on on on on on on on on 0 off 151 158 0 off off 61 68 on on on on on on on 4 1 off off 159 166 HETA 1 off oft ott 69 76 on on on on on on on TE og HEH 778 If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available P0607659 02 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches 143 CTM switch settings There are two models of CTMs e CTMs have four lines therefore you can add a maximum of four CTMs per DS30 channel e CTMB8s have eight lines This module uses two offset settings per module Therefore you can add a maximum of two CTM8 modules per DS30 channel e You can also mix the two modules For instance if you have two existing CTM modules with offset 0 and 1 you can add a CTM8 on offset 2 CTM The CTM provides connections for four analog calling line identification CLID PSTN lines Each voice line uses one line in the offset Since each DS30 channel has four lines per offset you can assign a maximum of four CTMs to a single DS30 channel by making the offset switch settings different for each module You can also combine three CTMs with the trunk module part of the 4X16 module on the same DS30 channel CTMS The CTM8 provides connections for eight analog calling line identification CLID PSTN lines Each line u
42. ATA 2 supports a long loop must use a dedicated cable to connect the two configuration For more information refer to locations Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters on page 217 Portable systems The following sections describe the portable systems that are compatible with the Business Communications Manager system and the hardware components that are required Companion system components The Companion system allows portable access from a fixed line The system consists of the following hardware components e Companion base station transmits and receives signals between the Business Communications Manager hardware and portable handsets You install the base stations on walls or ceilings Each base station provides radio coverage for a maximum of 32 cells Note Companion systems installed in the United States require a keycode to activate the base stations Refer to The Companion cordless system on page 191 e C3050 portable handset The C3050 CT2 Plus portable handset is available in Canada only The Etiquette C3050 portable handset is available in the USA only You can assign the C3050 portable handset a separate telephone number or the same telephone number as a desktop telephone The C3050 supports basic features such as call forward call transfer conferencing and visual message waiting indication e Remote power interconnect RPI Unit The RPI provides remote power for base station sup
43. DIMM Dual in line memory module DLCI Data link connection indentifier DN Directory number DNS Domain name server DPNSS Digital private network signalling system DRT Delayed ring transfer to prime DSM Digital station module DTM Digital Trunk media bay module DTMF Dual tone multifrequency FEM Fiber expansion module HTTP Hypertext transfer protocol Hz Hertz I C Intercom IP Internet protocol ISDN Integrated services digital network Kbyte Kilobyte LAN Local area network MCDN Meridian customer defined network protocol MHz Megahertz Installation and Maintenance Guide 62 Preface MSC NIC OPX PBX PCI PEC III PRI PSTN QoS QSIG RAID RAM ROM SAPS TAPI TCP IP UTAM VoIP WAN Media services card Network interface card Off premises extension Private branch exchange Peripheral component interconnect Processor expansion card version III Primary rate interface Public switched telephone network Quality of service Q reference point signalling Redundant array of inexpensive disks Random access memory Read only memory Station auxiliary power supply Telephony application program interface Transmission control protocol internet protocol UTAM Inc Voice over IP Wide area network P0607659 02 Preface 63 Related publications The following documents provide further information about the BCM1000 and related media bay modules extension equipment and the applications and software on the s
44. DIP switches Make a note of these settings either on the chart shown in Table 14 on page 139 or in the Programming Record forms Follow these steps to set the DIP switches 1 Locate the DIP switches on the module Figure 51 Switches on the media bay module ay Underside of the S media bay module 654321 Of Pee On Tag es a eres Module is i On 123456 right side up DIP switches i a Back of the media bay module i Set the switches to correspond with the settings you chose Determining module DIP switch settings on page 138 Repeat for each media bay module you want to install You are now ready to install the modules into the BCM1000 or BCM1000e units Refer to Chapter 9 Starting the system on page 159 for details Tip Create a label with the DS30 channel and DIP switch settings and stick it to the front of the module to provide ease of reference for maintenance activities P0607659 02 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches 141 Line and extension numbers for specific modules The switch settings on the media bay module determine the line numbers and extension numbers the modules use The tables in this section show the correspondence between DS30 channel numbers switch settings and the line extension numbers for each type of module The DS30 channel and switch settings correspond with Table 14 on page 139 DTM switch setting
45. DS30 requirements 34 network standards 5 North American PRI settings 141 wiring chart 177 dual in line memory module see DIMM E E1 DTM modules 94 P0607659 01 Index 337 earphone jack 229 earth calling 16 electrical ground requirements 120 electrical requirements 120 electrical shock warning 9 59 120 electromagnetic compatibility 5 emergency numbers programming requirements 8 emergency telephone analog auxiliary jack 95 installing 187 troubleshooting 234 EMI device compliance 7 EMI EMC 9 emobility NetVision IP telephones 104 entering keycodes 173 environment standards and specifications 11 environmental requirements ATA2 217 BCM1000 119 equipment malfunction 6 tools 237 equipment and supplies installation checklist 121 equipment rack 123 129 Ethernet crossover cable 163 168 172 173 ethernet network interface card 75 Etiquette C3050 CT2 portable telephone 105 ETSI specifications 11 European only equipment 101 extensions DIP switch settings 141 number required 113 portable telephones 206 see also DNs external antennas 213 external clock 165 166 167 external devices BCM1000 ports 78 external equipment safety warning 76 external line isolation units LIU MSC jacks 76 external loudspeakers 228 external music source connections 230 installation 229 programming 230 specifications 229 volume 230 external paging amplifier 76 connecting 228 installing 228 requirement
46. Ethernet crossover cable 0 0 0 eee ee ees 172 Process map Trunk and station wiring process map 176 DTM PAGS wining anay vccacdanivedas Geos ees lt bse d ade tki 177 GTM RJT WIMI ANAY esser bakes eierne A 177 BRI RJ45 wiring aray ceciceieoeeei de eeee debe oeee acer i waas 178 Wiring for DSM 16 4X16 and DSM 32 0 2022020 000s 180 Wiig 1G AU AGW O occ cue e cae heereeer ie sosesdenaeee iage wae 181 Process map Installing a Companion system 004 191 PELDE sect eee se sala we a ees as a aa Mecha a de adeno hd de a aches ths daa 193 RPihmounting OS 2ccsndeccesecgestireteGhesesernegeeories 195 Opening Wer COVE peaches i oaieeenes phd Rd Sd Yee RRR 195 PPL ComMpOnen rsrsr ieee Sek Eee eee A 196 RPI connector printed circuit board 0 0 c eee ee eee 197 Output connector PINGUE 66c5 cece es de ae eee rabiso HARE DERE TOS 198 PU GONNSCIO PINOUL 2dcn00s4s500d bedtesetesadene pagewaws 198 Bracket termination board 2 6es0 eev ccs eee ee eee eee ween enews 204 Slide ihe cover on brack t toc coe cage doe k dene Cee eine enw 205 Installed antenna and lightning surge protectors USA 208 Antenna with antenna bracket USA 02 c eee 209 Lightning surge protector and bracket USA 2000 210 Indoor directional external antenna Canada 4 212 Indoor omnidirectional external antenna Canada 213 Install the out
47. Expansion requires keycode allows you to add extra mailboxes to your voice messaging system The application comes with a keycode that defines how many extra mailboxes are allowed CallPilot Fax Set up amp Operation Guide and CallPilot Fax User Guide Fax Suite requires keycode a CallPilot optional feature delivers fax messages to CallPilot mailboxes Users can use the application to send and retrieve fax messages as easily as they send and retrieve voice messages Installation and Maintenance Guide 82 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager e CallPilot Message Networking Setup and Operation Guide and CallPilot Message Networking User Guide Message Networking requires keycode to add extra mailboxes links the CallPilot system with other voicemail systems and allows the exchange of voice messages between users at different sites CallPilot supports digital networking using Voice Profile for Internet Messaging VPIM standard and Audio Messaging Interchange Specification AMIS networking e CallPilot Desktop Messaging Installation and Maintenance Guide and CallPilot Desktop Unified Messaging Quick Reference Guide Desktop Message Networking requires keycode provides a multimedia messaging application that works with an e mail client to provide a single graphical user interface for CallPilot voice fax and text messages as well as e mail messages e DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide region spec
48. FEM module The FEM DIP switches turn on ports each of which consumes one DS30 channel Installation and Maintenance Guide 116 Chapter 4 Selecting the media bay modules for your system Setting Offsets Each offset is one quarter of a DS30 channel Each DS30 channel supports 16 lines 32 time slots for most modules Exceptions e DTM modules support 23 to 30 lines per channel e FEM modules where each DS30 channel supports one Norstar fiber module connection Offsets are numbered 0 1 2 and 3 Modules that require less than a full DS30 channel can be assigned a DS30 channel number and an offset number This allows more than one module to be assigned the same DS30 channel number but with a different offset number Modules that can have offsets assigned include CTM CTM8 BRI and ASM 8 For example two CTM 8s can be assigned to the same DS30 channel number with different offset numbers However you cannot assign a CTM8 and an BRI module to the same DS30 channel Offsets are assigned using DIP switches 1 2 and 3 on the media bay module Note Media bay modules that do not or cannot share DS30 channels always assign the offset as O zero As well if the module requires more than one DS30 channel such as the 4x16 module only the first DS30 channel is set on the DIP switches The next consecutive DS30 channel number is automatically assigned by the module Figure 38 shows how a DS30 channel containing 16 line
49. Holland Hong subaddressing on S loop Kong Italy Norway PRC Spain A Sweden Switzerland Taiwan United ETSI Call Diversion partial rerouting Kingdom AOC E specific changes for Holland and Italy MCID CLIP COLP CLIR P0607659 01 Appendix A System region attributes 299 Mobility services by region Table 55 shows the Mobility services that are supported by the Business Communications Manager and the regions that can use each type Table 55 Mobility services by region Profile Available Mobility Service Caribbean Companion CT2 Plus Etiquette Hong Kong North American PRC CALA Companion CT2 Plus Taiwan Companion CT2 Plus Etiquette DECT Australia DECT Denmark France Germany Global Holland Italy Norway Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom Media bay module availability by region Some of the media bay modules are customized for a specific type of line and are not available to all regions Table 56 lists a cross reference between regions and the type of modules that can be used within the related area Table 56 Module availability by region Region DSM16 DSM32 ASM CTM CTM8 4X16 Australia v Ww D oO DECT Caribbean CALA Denmark France Germany Global lt i lt a ses SN I BS b SN BS BS mn s Holland Installation and Maintenance Guide
50. ISDN Primary Rate Interface This is the MCDN protocol which is used between members of the Nortel Networks Meridian family of Private Telecommunication Network Exchanges The signalling information is carried via time slot 16 of a 2 048 Mbit s digital transmission system MHz A unit of measure indicating frequency in millions of cycles per second microprocessor The Central Processing Unit CPU component that controls all activity inside the Business Communications Manager mirrored disks In terms of the Business Communications Manager this refers to the BCM1000 configuration that consists of two hard disks and a RAID board The RAID board ensures that both disks contain exact copies of each other If one disk fails the other disk assumes control Thus you can time the replacement of the disabled disk to suit your maintenance schedule This system does not replace the need for current BRU copies modem A communications device that allows computers to exchange data over telephone lines music source You can connect a radio or other source of music to the system to provide music for the Music on Hold and Background Music features A music source is not part of the Business Communications Manager system components Installation and Maintenance Guide 324 Glossary Network Basic Input Output System NetBIOS An interface and upper level protocol developed by IBM for use with a proprietary adapter for its PC network prod
51. ISDN and DECT The Unified Manager provides a DECT Wizard that helps you coordinate the handset DNs between the Business Communications Manager and the DECT module Refer to the DECT documentation for details about using the Wizard Note On systems upgraded from 2 0 to 2 5 with three digit DNs starting at DN 221 DECT handsets default to the 501 to 532 DN range These numbers are based on systems with three digit DNs that use the default DN of 221 If you change either of those settings on your system adjust the numbering accordingly Mobility services by region on page 299 lists the regions that can accommodate DECT The following documentation is available for this system e The Nortel Networks M626x DECT Deployment Tool guide is available on the Business Communications Manager CD Use the information in this guide to determine the most effective locations within your site for the base stations e Each handset also comes with a user guide that describes the handset features e The Business Communications Manager 2 5 DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide also on the CD describes the installation of the module and radio base station and how to configure the system to the Business Communications Manager Installation and Maintenance Guide 190 Chapter 11 Installing telephones and peripherals T7406 cordless systems The T7406 cordless system consists of a base station that connects to three ports on a Business Comm
52. If there is no modem the system only reboots twice P0607659 02 Installation and Maintenance Guide 42 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 addendum 6 Do one of the following e Run the Quick Start Wizard to create the system parameters and defaults Then restore your system data from your backup disk e Restore system and data information from your backup disk 17 Test your system for correct operations Product and documentation updates For the latest information about Business Communications Manager product and documentation updates access the Nortel Networks web site at the following URL http www nortelnetworks com support Installation and Maintenance Guide P0607659 02 43 Contents North American Regulatory Information 0000 cess eee eee 3 Mel steed phim onned biiwatokodedmeee elie pee eee Cennard 3 Enhanced 911 Configuration ssi lt rrssiiriirerrscesrreni Re eS 4 Radio frequency Interference cece ete tenes 4 Telecommunication registation 22445 keedeesr de eeuheReaeReraaeeesveeay eared 4 Network COnNMeCHON gis 60i4 coher sews COOH ede e Red DRRe Eee ORR ee Kee 5 CON Sn Ue wetter aie hdd death dni hed dhe eed Bao ne 5 Hearing Aid Company wiic ine ad awen badd Owe OW HOE a CRREw POET SOREN ridini 5 Electromagnetic Compatibility 05e 55 0000550855 00h o beet adeeb owed eee ew os 5 Telephone Company Registration occa caw ecw eee a ee ee he ee 5 Use ofa MUSIC BOUNCE codecs cutee Gees oe h
53. M T1 and E amp M This type of trunk line is used to create simple network connections to other phone systems This trunk always operates in a disconnected supervised mode P0607659 01 Appendix A System region attributes 303 Table 59 BRI and PRI line types DTM and BRI modules Continued Digital trunk types Description PRI ISDN interface with 23 B channels and 1 D channel at 1 544 MBps in Europe 30 B channels and 2 D channels at 2 048 Mbps This is the module that controls system timing These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are auto answer trunks by default These lines provide a fast accurate and reliable means of sending and receiving data images text and voice information using PRI lines allows for faster transmission speeds and the addition of a variety of powerful business applications including remote LAN access video conferencing file transfer and internet access BRI ISDN loop that provides both T S and U2 and U4 region specific reference point loops These loops can support both network T and S loops and terminal equipment S loop connections This type of line provides incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network ETSI ISDN BRI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute specification for BRI ISDN service BRI provides two bearer B channels operating at 64 kbits s and a data D channel which operates at 16 kbits s
54. Region defaults Continued Functionality Attribute North American Global United Kingdom Tandem alerting disabled disabled disabled TON NPI national E 164 national E 164 unknown unknown National number length 10 10 0 national number prepend n a n a 0 Provide tone on PRI enabled n a disabled Installation and Maintenance Guide 308 Appendix A System region attributes P0607659 01 309 Appendix B Media bay module combinations This section describes some combinations of trunk and station modules to demonstrate how to fit the modules into the DS30 channel resources These configurations are meant to help demonstrate how your system can be configured using the information in this guide and do not necessarily reflect real life configurations Combining CTMs and 4X16s The 4X16 combination media bay module is a combination of a CTM and a DSM A maximum of four CTMs can fit into a DS30 channel when each is given a different offset Therefore you can combine a maximum of three CTMs with a 4X16 combination module This configuration would occupy two full DS30 channels Which means you can install a maximum of three of these combinations in a Business Communications Manager box with an extension box added to it Table 62 demonstrates this configuration of CTMs and 4X16 modules including the switch settings for each module Table 62 CTMs combined with 4X16 modules Each heavily
55. TBD PCI Cards MSC Empty Modem LAN LAN MSCUersion aa eee het eee ene etentontentententententenentententententententen Hake a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M 7ff 6 Select 1 Initialize Menu and press lt ENTER gt The Initialize Menu appears Refer to Figure 3 BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide P0607659 02 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 1 addendum 29 Figure 3 Initialization Menu screen 1 Initialize Universal Profile 2 Set service startup to Auto 3 Set service startup to Manual 4 Clear all event logs S Display active partition information 6 Display inactive partition information 7 Display Manufacturing Release Note 8 Platform Initialization Menu M Return to Main Menu A Product Version BCM1000 Release 3 0 Version RC 2 6 Issue 1 Initialization Complete Configuration Valid Service startup Auto Motherboard SH815 PCI Cards MSC WAN Empty LAN LAN MSCUersion 36CJB19 Make a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M 7ff 7 Select 1 Initialize Universal Profile and press lt ENTER gt Note If the initialization process detects a core software load mismatch between the MSC and the gt hard disk the system displays a menu screen that prompts you to enter the most appropriate core load Figure 4 The load on the MSC is the most recent load if you replaced the hard disk Select menu op
56. Table 47 Table 47 Power supply LED Indicates state of system power OK N A at least one power supply N A O requires attention Older models may not have a Red LED The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the ac power cord This takes several minutes to complete Upgrading to a redundant power supply The redundant power supply allows you to change a failed power supply without turning off the system You can add a redundant power supply to a BCM1000 currently equipped with a standard power supply Figure 132 provides an overview of the steps required to upgrade your system from a standard power supply to a redundant power supply module Figure 132 Process Map Upgrading to a redundant power supply Shut the system Make internal Turn power down connections module a SS switches on ee ee cen Ensure power o ooo o Set up unit for module switches _ maintenance are off Restore unit to operation Remove Insert both en eer standard power modules into Check power LED supply power supply i housing Install redundant power supply housing P0607659 02 Chapter 19 Replacing a power supply 273 Setting up the base unit This section describes the steps for replacing a standard power supply with a redundant power supply After the redundant power supply is installed insert the two power supply modules Redundant power supply modules can be changed while the sy
57. The D channel is used primarily to carry call information Like loop start trunks BRI lines can be configured as manual answer or auto answer DASS2 British Trunk provides multi line IDA interconnection to the British Telecom network DPNSS international term Q Sig or Q 931 a digital private network signaling system which allows phone systems from different manufacturers to be tied together over E1 lines offering significant enhancements to Business Communications Manager 2 5 networking capabilities DPNSS makes it easier to support centralized network functionality within private networks for operators and attendants dealing with large numbers of calls Its routing capabilities provide more of the larger network capabilities without the expense of installing a new system re configuring all the nodes and worrying about a lot of downtime Most functionality over DPNSS lines is transparent once the DPNSS is programmed into the system DPNSS allows a local node acting as a terminating node to communicate with other PBXs over the network using E1 lines For example corporate offices separated geographically can be linked over DPNSS lines to other Business Communications Manager 2 5 systems bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be connected This allows connected Business Communications Manager 2 5 systems to function like a private network Analog trunk types Public Provides potential access for
58. Time out A setting that controls how long a Page Announcement can last Assign the Page Time out under Feature settings in System programming Page zone An area in the office that receives internal page announcements that other areas of the office do not hear Assign telephones to page zones under Capabilities in System DNs programming P0607659 01 Glossary 325 Parallel port A port that transfers data through multiple wires Parallel ports normally use a 25 pin interface that transmits and receives data using a separate data line for every bit Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI Slot Socket on the Business Communications Manager main printed circuit board that connects to the Business Communications Manager cards Personal Speed Dial Two digit codes 71 94 that can be programmed on the set to dial external telephone numbers You can access Personal Speed dial numbers only at the telephone on which they are programmed Pin 1 An indicator on the first pin on an electronic component You use this indicator to help you correctly align the component when attaching or installing it Port A connector on the Business Communications Manager that allows data exchange with other devices such as a printer or mouse portable telephone Typically a handset containing keypad receiver and transmitter that communications using a radio link to a base station connected to the Business Communications Manager Examples C
59. Unit overview 104 autodial 103 automatic telephone relocation 190 auxiliary equipment 3 5 release 21 BST doorphone 21 UPS 21 auxiliary jack 95 177 auxiliary port GATM constraints 20 auxiliary ringer installation 227 programming 227 backboard 126 background music volume 230 backplane installation warning 154 backup power RPI 193 backups maintenance warning 244 base station clearances 204 Companion 105 connecting plug top power supply 205 DECT 106 description 101 distances 203 hand off 203 indoor antenna 212 installation 203 maximum cable 197 minimum distances 203 omnidirectional outdoor antenna 213 positioning 192 203 powering up 206 proprietary extension cable 207 RG 58 U coaxial cable 211 RG 58A U antenna cable 207 RPI T7406 106 TCM connections 205 termination board 204 turn off power 207 U S installation 208 updating software 206 wiring length power 197 wiring RPI 197 basic rate interface module 74 battery clock removing 290 installing 291 battery feed voltage 217 baud rate 224 BCM 3 0 1 changes 27 BCM 3 5 changes 15 BCM1000 cable 120 check voltage 160 connect BCMe1000 132 DS256 port 132 fan LED 262 inserting LAN card 283 installation overview 86 P0607659 01 Index 333 installing clock battery 291 installing media bay modules 151 installing on a wall 125 knockout plate 273 BS 1 download 206 BST Doorphone 21 bus numbers DS30 channel hierarchy 135 Business Communic
60. and Maintenance Guide 72 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager Figure 17 BCM1000 interior components with a standard power supply system 2 5 battery Clock calendar Power supply Fan DIMM slots PCI card slots Io Ga a Fe Hard disk Media bay module cabinet Figure 18 BCM1000 interior components redundant system with mirrored hard disks 2 5 Clock calendar battery DIMM slots PCI card slots Redundant power supply Redundant fans i g _ H H E 5 o o 8 rT
61. and the hard disks For more information refer to RAID board LEDs on page 258 Initializing the hard disk single disk system The BCM1000 is normally initialized at the factory However if you have to replace the hard drive in a single disk BCM1000 you must re initialize the Business Communications Manager After you replace the hard disk and the system has booted up perform the initialization as follows 1 Make sure the Status LED on the BCM1000 is lit This LED indicates that the Business Communications Manager is operating correctly 2 Attach the base unit and a computer through the serial port as described in Setting up the null modem cable on page 169 3 Enter the terminal emulation program as described in Finding the configuration menus on page 170 e If the hard disk does not require initialization the main menu appears Refer to Figure 109 Figure 109 Main Menu screen Main Menu Platform Initialization Menu System Configuration Configuration Wizard Media Services Card System ID Diagnostics System Status Monitor Command line Reboot the system Exit 4H OTH ob wn eR Installation and Maintenance Guide 250 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk If the hard disk requires initialization the Platform Initialization Menu appears Refer to Figure 110 Figure 110 Platform Initialization Menu screen Select Upload Upload Upload Upload Upload Toggle Upload Toggle
62. any set on the system Private Provides potential access for a specific set Installation and Maintenance Guide 304 Appendix A System region attributes Defining time zones by country and language Time zones are based on the actual time zone where the Business Communications Manager is located The Time Zone dropdown list on the initialization screen allows you to be very specific in choosing a compatible time zone If your exact location is not on the list choose the one with the time zone closest to you Note that some time zones are individualized because they do not switch from Standard Time to Daylight Saving Time For example this is the case for Saskatchewan The format of the time and date changes are based on the prime language of the region Table 60 provides a list of formats based on language or country Table 60 Time date formats based on language Language Country Time Date format Danish 2001 01 01 13 57 Dutch 1 Jan 01 13 57 EuroFrench 1 jan 13 57 EuroSpanish 1 Ene 13 57 German 1 Jan 13 57 Italian 1 Gen 13 57 NA English Jan1 1 57pm NA French 2001 01 01 13 57 NA Spanish Ene 1 1 57pm Norwegian 1 Jan 13 57 Swedish 2001 01 01 13 57 Turkish 1 Ock 13 57 UK English 1 Jan 1 57 pm System defaults Table 61 compares the system defaults for the North American Global and UK regions In addition the following functionality applies e Regions
63. back wall and remove them Refer to Figure 127 Remove the four screws that hold the fan to the BCM1000e Lift the failed fan out of the unit P0607659 02 Chapter 18 Adding or replacing a cooling fan 267 Figure 127 Fan screws location in BCM1000e 2 0 models Fan connector on hub boar Figure 128 Fan screws location in BCM1000e 2 5 redundancy models Fan connectors S oe li Q on hub board Fan connector on hub board Installation and Maintenance Guide 268 Chapter 18 Adding or replacing a cooling fan Replacing a fan into the BCM1000e Follow these steps to replace the fan in the BCM1000e Place the fan in the BCM1000e so that the label faces the back wall of the unit Align the screw holes in the fan with the screw holes in the BCM1000e and attach the fan Connect the fan power supply cable to the hub board Replace the cover a fF OND Restore the unit to operation For details refer to Restarting the system on page 240 The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the ac power cord This takes several minutes to complete P0607659 02 269 Chapter 19 Replacing a power supply BCM1000s and BCM1000es can have standard or redundant power supplies This chapter describes Replacing a standard power supply how to replace a standard power supply how to upgrade from a standard power supply to a redundant
64. before beginning any procedures that require you to access the text based interface As well the connection to the Unified Manager is now through an https link rather than http To log on to the Unified Manager you enter https lt BCM IP address gt on your browser Any existing bookmarks will automatically convert to https during the connection process a 4 sj tjm O O c9 O am 4 Kan Q 4 amm O p Q am LL 16 BCM1000 BCM 3 5 addendum New hardware This section describes the new hardware that was released in conjunction with the BCM 3 5 software release This includes e Global Analog Trunk Module GATM on page 16 e Auxiliary equipment on page 21 Global Analog Trunk Module GATM The following table demonstrates who the GATM fits into the Business Communications Manager trunk module suite Table 1 Global Analog Trunk Module notes Trunk module type What it does Special notes DTM Digital Trunk media bay module on page 94 Connects digital public switched telephone lines to the Business Communications Manager system Can connect to four types of lines TI NA PRI ETSI in UK only and Euro PRI CTM Caller ID Trunk media bay module on page 95 CTM8 Caller ID Trunk media bay module on page 95 Connects a maximum of four analog public switched telephone lines to the Business Communications Manager system Connects a maximum
65. brackets are against the wall and the front cover is facing left or right Refer to Figure 43 P0607659 02 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM1000 127 Figure 43 Mount the BCM1000 on the wall Mounting brackets 0 ele oo evs o o es oo oo O Front cover oW 6 Insert two 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screws in the other two slotted holes 7 Insert a 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screw in one of the unslotted holes 8 Tighten all five screws Installation and Maintenance Guide 128 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM1000 Installing the BCM1000 on a flat surface You can install the BCM1000 on any flat surface that can support the weight of the unit Caution Refer to Environment checklist on page 119 for acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM1000 To install the BCM1000 on a table or shelf 1 Attach four rubber feet to the corners on the bottom of the base unit 2 Position the BCM1000 on the table or shelf Make sure you leave enough space around the unit for ventilation and for access to the power and system cables and to the media bay modules Replacing your BCM1000 hardware If you need to replace your BCM1000 which would be the case if the motherboard or MSC became inoperable you will need to regenerate all your keycodes to reflect the new system identification and enter them again af
66. busy tone M7000 set disabled enabled enabled Fax switch enabled enabled enabled Service Schedule time Night start 23 00 start 23 00 start 23 00 end 07 00 end 07 00 end 07 00 Evening start 17 00 start 17 00 start 17 00 end 23 00 end 23 00 end 23 00 Lunch start 12 00 start 12 00 start 12 00 end 13 00 end 13 00 end 13 00 Service 4 start 00 00 start 00 00 start 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 Service 5 start 00 00 start 00 00 start 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 Service 6 start 00 00 start 00 00 start 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 Call Forward Delay Show in second disabled disabled disabled Default 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 2 ring cycles Options e 2 ring cycles e 3ring cycles e 4 ring cycles e 6ring cycles e 10 ring cycles e 2ring cycles e 3ring cycles e 4 ring cycles e 6 ring cycles e 10 ring cycles e 2 ring cycles e 3 ring cycles e 4 ring cycles e 6 ring cycles e 10 ring cycles Installation and Maintenance Guide 306 Appendix A System region attributes Table 61 Region defaults Continued Functionality Attribute North American Global United Kingdom DRT Delay Show in second disabled disabled disabled Default 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Options e 1 ring cycles e 1 ring cycles e 1 ring cycles e 2 ring cycles e 2 ring cycles e 2 ring cycles e 3ring cycles e 3 ring cycles e 3 ring cycles e 4ring cycles e 4 ring cycles e 4 ring cycles
67. call on hold for programmed period of time host name The name that identifies a computer on a network that provides services to other computers in the domain such as databases or other Business Communications Manager systems Hotline This feature automatically calls a pre assigned number when the user lifts the telephone receiver or presses the Handsfree Mute button Assign Hotline under Capabilities in System DNs programming Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP The set of rules used for exchanging text graphic images sound video and other multimedia files on the world wide web Hz hertz A unit of measure for indicating frequency in cycles per second Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN A digital telephone service that allows for a combination voice and data transfer over a single high speed connection over the same copper twisted pair telephone line as analog telephone service intercom button A button that provides access to internal lines used for calls within a Business Communications Manager system These buttons also provide access to external lines through a line pool or external code Assign intercom buttons under Line access in System DNs programming internal line A line on your telephone dedicated to making calls to destinations inside your system An internal line can connect you with an external caller if you use it to access a line pool Installation and Maintenance Guide 322 Glossary
68. ee eaaearewndses 119 Pisparation checklist cc054d505 049 59504 50 ea PRED GRO ORDA ORE EERE OES 119 EnvicgninentGh rKllt acvcsuttcpagensdprcon aad aaa 119 Elecincal requiements 2cccccceariceid ever ceded seeerigarnseenenews 120 Internal wiring requirements 22 c2 snes dees One ke one ee ws 120 DIEGO cicalatungetesueeagats soReeawess caer eearkesaree can 120 PUAN GOP ycicn ved EEEE ye beeeoyene er bee ag banned donee ees 121 System equipment and supplies nassaan aa naana 121 Basie NhardWATO cs scccce et rarr r eee lee edcckne leeds EErEE 121 Opimmal ogM scion cao Ras ee Lobe ead R R 121 COMPANION SQUIPIMNGN sc csccksaeeiceeiec cet eee ee Gentes eee ea hues 122 Other cordless SYSIOMS coc icceee deed sebein Geet Geeeveaedshec aaws 122 Equipment for Installing the BCM1000 0 cee eee ee 122 Insialling ine BOM IG0G WA ICR 245650450 soS5SeG sed eeS eee eyed raer 123 Attaching the rack mounting brackets 0 0 0 eee eee eee ees 123 Installing the BCM1000 into the rack 00 e eee ee 124 Installing the BCM1000 on the wall 6 2 0 0 0c ee ee 125 Installing the BCM1000 on a flat surface 0 6 0 cee ee 128 Replacing your BOMIDOO hardware iccicaeddsdcadoeekscade seeds a kee se ees 128 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM1000e expansion unit 0 cece eee 129 Installing the BCM1000e into a rack 00 cee eee 129 Attaching the mounting brackets 20 2ee0sae05sne ese a ewe eae 129 Att
69. eee 271 Upgrading to a redundant power supply wc 6 6 eee ee dae 272 Setting Up the base UNI 2a cas ones es oeerdceke wea riir e iaie 273 Installing the redundant power supply 0 00 c ee eee eee eee 274 Replacing a redundant power supply module 000 e eee eee eee 277 Replacing a power supply in an BCM1000e 0 0c eee eee eee 278 Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 5 281 AERACI Gal GAS 2c i eeebasaii dhs dee eee sewad ee Peen sae eee eed bee 281 Removing adata CAM s ci cst dones bHee cee Se reui is Se eees Bee ERS 282 LSE Deo cald cians nokia o kee Lanes nek ER ok Seana 283 MEMOIRS cxasce ee ewenasenead en seperaaREredrenea beens cene neds Be 284 PS PES 2ccceseieedee de Ae eee reas so eee rear ebebdendee bees 285 ASRS GIR EC asiro hited eee Liebe Ladakh eek etalk 286 Replacing MEMO ocacreeetaetoredeiaeh es eee sO Reese veges dede ee EAE 287 Replacing memory DIMM CHIPS 2 626855 55 ose eee ee bee ee ees cece vy ees 288 Replacing the clock calendar battery 0 00 ccc eee eee eee 289 Removing the clock calendar battery 0 00 2 e eee eee ee 290 installing the new batery odes ade hdd died oa aia gh anal Pe aa edged teas 291 P0607659 02 Contents 51 Chapter 21 Replacing telephones iissinscaceds swore venneaseeenaensexaans 293 Determining the status of a telephone 0 0 cece eee ee 293 Replacing telephones with different mo
70. eee cw 299 Module availability by region 00 cee ee 299 Trunk availability by region 2 2 0 eee eee 300 PRI line protocol supported by region 0 ee eee 301 BRI and PRI line types DTM and BRI modules 302 Time date formats based on language 00e eee eee 304 Rogon Gains pkschideded anos oinede Riro brer rontani 305 CTMs combined with 4X16 modules 0 0 0c eee eee eee 309 DSM combined with 2 DTMs and 2 ASMS 0002000 310 Three BRI modules two DSM 32s and 1 DECT module 311 Cross referencing ports and DNS 0 0c eee anana 313 P0607659 02 59 Preface This guide describes how to install initialize and maintain the Business Communications Manager 1000 BCM1000 hardware for the Business Communications Manager 2 5 system This issue of the document also reflects the added functionality built into the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Feature Pack release The new hardware described in this and other documentation requires the Feature Pack 1 release of the Business Communications Manager firmware Compatibility between Unified Manager versions will be rectified during the upgrade procedure which is described in a separate document Warning Ensure that you make a complete backup of your data before attempting to AN upgrade your system Upgrade instructions are delivered with the upgrade firmware Informat
71. external call ATA 2 to Business Communications Manager system loss 2 2 dB 1 0 dB Business Communications Manager system to ATA 2 loss 0 5 dB 1 0 dB The maximum loss for ATA 2 to Central Office CO configuration shown in Figure 85 must not exceed 10 dB Figure 85 Insertion loss from the CO to the single line telephone BCM1000 ATA 2 Single line telephone Central Office cable loss eeii 7 E e te EEE Cable loss Business Communications Manager to ATA 2 ATA 2 to Business Communications Manager Se lt _ __ 10dB Max Longitudinal balance to ground 50 dB 60 to 4 000 Hz With IEEE 455 1976 test Overload level 3 dB P0607659 02 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters 219 Insertion loss measurement Measure the total insertion loss between the CO and voice messaging device by using standard dial up test lines with a transmission test set For example Hewlett Packard 4935A Transmission Test Set For CO to analog device measurement To measure the insertion loss from the CO to the voice messaging device 1 Establish a connection to the 1 mW kHz CO service line with a single line telephone attached to the ATA 2 Ensure that the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms a_ Replace the single line telephone with the test set b Use RECEIVE 600 OHM HOLD mode on the test set Ensure that the test set connects in parallel to the servi
72. includes e Platform compatibility e Explaining Double Density e Setting module DIP switches for double density on page 35 e Upgrading from a standard system on page 39 e Initializing the hard disk single disk system on page 40 Platform compatibility Business Communications Manager 3 0 is Windows XP compatible therefore any references in the main document about required computer platforms can include computers running Windows XP Explaining Double Density Business Communications Manager 3 0 software now utilizes the B2 channels on DS30 buses 02 to 07 for digital telephones thereby doubling telephone capacity The following figure shows a DS30 bus broken down into four offset groups of four single density or eight double density lines each Figure 11 Offsets are part of DS30 bus line groups Offset 0 ai 1 DS30 bus 16 lines 32 time slots single density 32 lines 32 time slots double density Offsets have four lines single density Offset 2 8 lines double density Offset 3 The default 3 0 system is a Partial Double Density PDD system in that it maintains DS30 06 and 07 in the original configuration of 16 lines per bus This accommodates those systems which use Companion If you choose to set your system to Full Double Density FDD DS30 06 and 07 become FDD and are no longer available for Companion operation To take advantage of the double density functionality you require DSM16 or DSM32 m
73. install the lightning surge protector at the cable entry point into the building Connect the lightning surge protector to ground before you connect the coaxial cable Installation and Maintenance Guide 208 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system Installing antennas United States of America The following points cover special information about installations in the United States of America e The outdoor antenna connectors on the base station are special proprietary BNC connectors e Antennas are supplied with cables attached and terminated with special proprietary BNC plugs to join with the connector on the base station e Cables are not supplied with outdoor antennas Before You install an outdoor antenna USA Before you install an outdoor antenna check the following points e Locate the antenna on the external wall of the building e Keep the outdoor antenna as close as possible to the base station connected to it The base station must always be inside the building The recommended installation height for the antenna is 13 to 16 ft above ground e Always install a lightning surge protector between an outdoor antenna and a base station Refer to Figure 78 Figure 78 Installed antenna and lightning surge protectors USA Antenna Mounting bracket Back to back proprietary BNC connectors Ss Lightning surge arrestor with mounting bracket v to base station or proprie
74. media processing Refer to the chapter on configuring MSC Resources in the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide Installation and Maintenance Guide 78 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager Connection ports You can connect to the BCM1000 through your computer via the serial port or a LAN card connection to perform setup and maintenance procedures Refer to Figure 20 This guide leads you through the process of making either of these connections Refer to Using a null modem serial cable on page 169 and Connecting the Ethernet crossover cable on page 173 Programming procedures using the Unified Manager are explained in the Programming Operations Guide Figure 20 BCM1000 external points of connection O O o li O O O o Fit o O 00000000000 O o ol 0 o fy ele o olo oco ocd o oj o o E oco o o OO O O Serial port LAN Note On some new systems the serial and video ports are swapped The serial cable connector will only fit on the correct port P0607659 02 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 79 BCM1000 LEDs A line of 10 operational LEDs display on the face of the BCM1000 Refer to Figure 21 These LEDs show the current state of various hardware components Fig
75. on page 100 Refer to Media bay module availability by region on page 299 and Trunk availability by region on page 300 to determine which media bay modules and which types of trunk lines are available in your location on page 103 Installation and Maintenance Guide 90 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware Media bay module common features Media bay modules are designed within a common casing which includes the following common features LEDs All media bay modules have power and status LEDS Figure 25 shows the location of the O Power and Status on a CTM These LEDs are located in the same place on all modules Table 5 describes the common LED states Table 5 Module Power and Status LED states Figure 25 Module LED locations Power LED Status LED Power C1 LED state Status Indicates state of Indicates condition of Green LED module power module status On Normal operation All monitored services are working Nk N A KSU startup slow flash or fast flash there may be a problem with the Hie yg DS256 cable or the DS256 clock Off Module is not Module not powered powered reseat module OR hardware fault replace module Red LED o Power converter failure Power to telephones may not be within
76. on the interior wall Installing a lightning surge protector Canada Install the lightning surge protector for the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna to protect it from electrical surges The recommended lightning surge protector is part number A0382082 Refer to the installation instructions from the manufacturer for more details on its installation To install a lightning surge protector follow these steps 1 Install the surge protector on the interior wall as close as possible to the entry point of the coaxial cable from the outdoor antenna Figure 84 shows where to locate the surge protector Follow the installation instructions provided with the surge protector Figure 84 Install the lightning surge protector Canada Exterior wall Interior wall Bee Copper plates o Surge protector Co axial cable to base station Cable clamps Co axial cable to outdoor external Low impedance antenna ground lead 2 Attach the ground lead to an approved ground before you connect the ground lead to the surge protector Installation and Maintenance Guide 216 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system The recommended wire gauge is 6 AWG 4 mm Connect the ground lead to the building ground Do not connect to a ground rod or series of ground rods If you cannot connect the ground lead to the building ground connect the ground lead to the metal frame of the building The connection mus
77. overview 86 DIP switches GATM 18 directional antenna 212 disable CSU disconnect BCM1000 and BCMe 1000 239 disk space 70 DNs ASM DIP switch settings 36 147 ATA2 222 DECT 149 default for IP telephony 188 DIP switch settings 141 DSM double density upgraded system 37 DSM singledensity upgraded system 36 DSM switch settings 37 148 see also extensions start DN 136 DNS server 168 domain Hyperterminal 170 Doorphone BST 21 double density module settings 33 DPNSS networking 80 DS256 port 132 DS30 double density 33 DS30 channels 2 channel modules 135 ASM switch settings 147 ASM switch settings upgraded 2 5 system 35 BRI switch settings 142 channel split describing channel splitting 114 Companion 136 CTM switch settings 143 DIP switch settings 138 139 DSM switch settings 148 DTM switch settings 141 hierarchy 135 offset configurations 116 sharing offsets 116 DSM 4X16 combination module 99 4X16 module 74 4X16 settings 145 DIP switch settings 139 148 DS30 channel hierarchy 136 DS30 channel requirements 117 DS30 requirements 34 hardware overview 98 wiring chart 180 DSM 16 description see also DSM 74 DSM 32 description see also DSM 74 DSM16 double density settings upgraded system 37 single density settings upgraded system 36 DSM32 double density upgraded system 37 single density upgraded system 36 DTM description 74 94 DIP switch settings 139 141 DS30 channel requirements 117
78. per DSM because the Companion system can use both B channels Refer to The Companion cordless system on page 191 The Companion cordless system Your Companion portable telephone allows you to leave your desk without missing telephone calls The telephones can access most Business Communications Manager business features such as call forward call transfer voice conference and voice messaging using feature codes Figure 68 provides an overview of the process for installing a Companion wireless system Figure 68 Process map Installing a Companion system Business Communications Manager Companion equipment DSM module Install external installed and antennas and configured lightning protection if required Restore system to operation Install remote power interconnect RPI Configure DN records for the Install base stations handsets Connect base stations to DSM In the United States you must enter z 7 z a UTAM keycode before you register gt Register Companion sets ike handsets Installation and Maintenance Guide 192 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system Note Companion wireless availability is region specific Refer to Mobility services by region on page 299 This option also requires a software keycode for activation Companion components Business Communications Manager
79. performing any maintenance procedure Text conventions This guide uses the following text conventions bold Courier text Indicates command names and options and text that you need to enter in italic text bold text angle brackets lt gt a command line interface Example Use the dinfo command Example Enter show ip alerts routes Indicates file and directory names new terms book titles Web addresses and variables in command syntax descriptions Indicates command names screen titles options and text for a graphical user interface GUI Indicates a keyboard key press or simultaneous key presses i e lt ENTER gt or lt CTRL j gt or when part of a command string indicates that a variable is to be entered Example lt IP address gt where the information to be entered at that point is the specific information for the required field in this case a specific IP address P0607659 02 Preface 61 Acronyms These are the acronyms used in this document ANSI American National Standards Institute ASM Analog station module AWG American wire gauge BIOS Basic input output system BPS Bits per second BRI Basic rate interface module CAP Central answering position CIR Committed information rate CLID Calling line identification CSMA CD Carrier sense multiple access collision detect CSU Channel service unit CTM Calling line trunk module DECT Digital enhanced cordless telecommunications
80. power supply BCM1000 2 0 or 2 5 hardware or BCM1000e 2 0 hardware how to replace the power supply module in a redundant power supply system If the BCM1000 or BCM1000e has a standard power supply that fails then all activity on the system ceases Figure 129 provides an overview of the process for replacing a standard power supply Figure 129 Process Map Replacing a standard power supply System down Set up unit for maintenance Remove failed power supply Install new power supply Reconnect power supply cables Check connections Restore unit to operation Check power LED Installation and Maintenance Guide 270 Chapter 19 Replacing a power supply Removing the standard power supply If the standard power supply fails the system will be down Follow these steps to remove the power supply 1 Set up the server for maintenance by removing all the cables from the front of the BCM1000 then disconnect the BCM1000 and the BCM1000e if there is one from the ac power connection Remove the cover from the base unit Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 4 Remove the power supply cables from the motherboard media bays and hard disk Note If you have an updated system with a piggy back fan arrangement the rear fan will be connected to a power supply cable 5 Cut the cable ties that hol
81. previous call using your headset the next call will come in over your headset P0607659 02 BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide 22 BCM1000 BCM 3 5 addendum The T7316E can be used alone or you can expand feature and line button capacity by adding one or more Key Indicator Modules KIMs Each KIM has 24 buttons with indicator displays A combination of T7316E KIMs is still referred to as a Central Answering Position CAP A KIM connected to a T7316E that is configured under CAP KIM assignment as an enhanced CAP eCAP supports line appearances multiple appearances of a target line and or hunt group appearances In this configuration the KIM is referred to as an eKIM A T7316E supports a maximum of four eKIMs The Business Communications Manager can support a maximum of 12 eCAPs A T7316E KIM that is not configured in system programming does not support line appearances target line appearances or hunt group appearances For this configuration the KIM is referred to as an OKIM A T7316E can support a maximum of nine OKIMs You need to add a system auxiliary power supply SAPS if you install five or more OKIMs on a T7316E The system can support as many T7316E OKIM combinations as required You can configure the KIM buttons for features and autodial numbers under User Preferences CAP KIM button programming The user can also configure memory button features at the telephone The user can move lines from the T7316E to an eKIM
82. protector 210 wireless adding to system 191 base station installation 203 DECT module 74 handsets Etiquette C3050 CT2 Companion 105 handsets installing 188 registering handsets Companion 206 see Companion and DECT wiring ASM 8 179 cable length 120 121 check before powerup 160 DB15 X 21 adapter cable 167 DSM 179 Ethernet crossover cable 172 FEM 182 GATM 19 grounding 120 LAN card 164 media bay modules 175 modem card 165 modem card DB25 cable 166 module installation warning 154 null modem cable 169 removing 239 requirements 120 RPI 197 shock warning 244 station media bay modules 179 V 35 adapter cable 166 WAN card 164 Installation and Maintenance Guide
83. refer to the Environment checklist on page 119 and the Electrical requirements on page 120 Order the required trunks from the central office Ensure that you have all the equipment and supplies you require to install the system Refer to System equipment and supplies on page 121 If you want to install the media bay modules into the BCM1000 before you install it ensure that the DIP switches are set correctly Refer to Chapter 4 Selecting the media bay modules for your system on page 111 and Chapter 8 Installing media bay modules on page 151 Environment checklist The installation area must be minimum of 4 m 13 ft from equipment such as photocopiers electrical motors and other equipment that produces electromagnetic radio frequency and electrostatic interference within 1 5 m 5 ft of a three wire grounded electrical outlet clean free of traffic and excess dust dry and well ventilated within the temperature ranges of 0 C and 40 C 32 F and 95 F between 20 and 80 non condensing relative humidity enough space and strength to support the BCM1000 minimum of 46 cm 18 in from the floor Note The installation area must be of sufficient height from the floor to prevent water gt damage Installation and Maintenance Guide 120 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM1000 Electrical requirements The following electrical requirements must be met Power must be supplied from no
84. settings on page 143 e Not all modules are available to all systems Refer to Chapter 2 Telephony hardware on page 89 for specifics about each module Note Remember if you have chosen a 3 5 channel split for your system channel 7 is no longer available for media bay modules Choosing the assigned order for modules Assign the media bay modules and DS30 channels in the order shown in Figure 49 Station modules are assigned starting with DS30 channel 2 This allows telephones to start numbering from the system Start DN Default 221 The exception to this is a DSM used for Companion which must be installed on channel 6 DSM32 or channels 6 and 7 two DSM 16s If your system is set to a 3 5 split you can only assign a DSM16 to channel 6 for Companion Trunk modules are assigned starting at DS30 channel 7 in a system with a 2 6 DS30 split and at channel 6 in a system with a 3 5 split The exception to this is the 4X16 module which requires two DS30 channels so it must be set to a DS30 channel that has the next channel open P0607659 02 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches 137 Figure 49 Assigning the modules to the DS30 channel hierarchy DS30 channels DSM 16 After you choose your modules choose where to assign them on the DS30 channels DN assignment begins with Start DN default 221 Station modules are assigned starting at the top channel
85. spec check base unit LEDs for possible power issue or replace module N A Flashing N A Loss of DS256 clock or DS256 cable may be disconnected Not all modules have red LEDs P0607659 02 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware 91 Power connections The back of the modules have a single connector that provides a DS256 channel and power to the module These connectors plug into the back of the media bay on the BCM1000 or BCM1000e Some modules also have a cooling fan that runs off the module power source Figure 26 shows the rear views of the two types of modules Figure 26 Rear of modules showing DS256 channel and power connectors DS256 and power connector Module wires are vul DS256 and power nerable to breakage connector See Warning below i Warning Media bay module wire shorts The wires that connect the media bay module daughter board to the module can become pinched between the module and the BCM1000 media bay if you insert the modules off the straight or with too much force This will cause a short in the equipment and could stop the Business Communications Manager from restarting Note Some of the new modules such as the DECT module do not have this wiring configuration However inserting the module carefully and correctly is still important to securely connect the power connector on the module to the backplane of the media bay Installation and Mainten
86. that can use the DECT protocol DECT base station installation information is provided in a separate document the DECT Installation and Operations Guide FEM The Fiber Expansion Media Bay Module FEM provides an easy upgrade from a Norstar system to a Business Communications Manager system by connecting a maximum of six Norstar expansion modules to a FEM installed in the BCM1000 P0607659 02 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 75 BCM1000e a separate cabinet with six additional bays for media bay modules It connects to the BCM1000 through an DS256 RJ45 connector A Business Communications Manager five meter DS256 cable is included with the BCM1000e expansion cabinet Telephones and adapters Business telephones and adapters connect to the media bay modules installed in the BCM1000 Business Communications Manager supports Norstar and Business Series Terminal telephones as well as IP based Nortel Networks telephones The Nortel Networks i2002 and i2004 IP telephones and the Nortel Networks i2050 Software Phone have separate installation and operations documentation Refer to the main index on your system CD The system also supports four types of cordless telephone systems Companion DECT T7406 Business Series Terminal BST and the Symbol NetVision and NetVision Data telephones Companion installation information is included in this guide and in the Programming Operations Guide Installation doc
87. the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide for more details P0607659 02 231 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting This chapter describes some hardware troubleshooting options for determining the cause of malfunctions or failure of the Business Communications Manager hardware The Business Communications Manager technical support group also provides tips and troubleshooting information under the Maintenance button located on the Unified Manager front page When analyzing Business Communications Manager problem you can use the information in this section to determine if the problem is hardware related If your hardware is stable you can refer to the Programming Operations Guide and to the technical tips in the Unified Manager to determine operational issues After you have corrected the problem test the Business Communications Manager system to confirm that the system is functioning correctly p Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the telephone cables and network cables and then disconnect the ac power cord before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Hardware problems can appear as any of the following e The operational LEDs on the BCM1000 or on the media bay modules are not reacting as expected e The Business Communications Manager system does not function at all e The emergency telephone does not function e ATA 2 does not function Instal
88. the base unit Refer to Figure 42 1 Align the screw holes on one side of the base unit with both rack mounting brackets or with one of the wall mounting brackets Note The brackets suspend the BCM1000 on the wall Consider the direction you want the media bay modules to face left or right when you choose the side to install the rack mounting brackets on 2 Fasten the bracket to the base unit using the screws provided with the bracket Refer to Figure 42 Caution Use only the screws supplied with the rack mounting brackets Do not replace screws Other screws can damage the BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide 126 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM1000 Figure 42 Attaching the mounting brackets to the BCM1000 o Q do S B2 Y Rack mount brackets ly Wall mount brackets Install the 2 cm 3 4 in plywood backboard on the wall Insert two 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screws in the backboard The screws must be 34 5 cm 13 5 in apart and level Do not tighten the screws heads against the backboard Leave approximately 0 5 cm 0 25 in of the screw out of the backboard insert and remove the media bay modules Note Position the screws to leave enough space beside the BCM1000 23 cm or 9 in to 5 Hang the base unit on the two screws using the outer slotted holes Make sure the base unit is level the mounting
89. the power module cee kee ee eke eee 277 BCM1000e standard power supply interior connections 278 BCM1000e redundant power supply interior connections 279 Installing the power module in a redundant BCM1000e 279 Process Map Data card replacement 000 eee eee 281 BOM1000 LAN card LEDS 25 205 260 5ssdeeeadbrs denne yave noes 282 ketal me LAN CAG socnegadeeiedn dodo Ora eee awrad sexe rons 283 Process Map PEC replacement 00 0c eee eee ees 284 Removing or replacing a PEC 0 0 00s 285 Process Map Memory replacement 0 20 0c eee eee eee 287 Removing and replacing the DIMMS 000 eee eee 288 Process Map Battery replacement overview 289 Removing the clock calendar battery 0 002 c eee eee 290 P0607659 02 57 Tables Table 1 Interface harmonized standards 0c cee eee eee ees 5 Table 1 Global Analog Trunk Module notes 2000 cece eee 16 Table 2 Global Analog Trunk Module DIP switch settings 18 Table 3 T73916E and KIM display GONE caasdecsc cere Sbdia carded dda ee ais 22 Table 4 Core software defined by region and carrier profile 23 Table 5 Telephony region Languages 0 020e cece eee eee eee 23 Table 6 CallPilot region default voice mail languages by country 24 Table 7 Companding laws and profiles 000
90. to the mounting surface 3 Connect the antenna to the appropriate base station radio Note The coaxial cable length must not exceed 10 m 33 ft gt Installing an indoor omnidirectional antenna Canada To install an indoor omnidirectional antenna use the following guidelines e Use the bracket supplied to install the antenna on a wall or ceiling This bracket provides the necessary clearance between the floor or wall and the antenna e Mount the bracket so that the external antenna is vertical The recommended installation position on a wall is halfway between the floor and the ceiling 1 Insert the antenna in the bracket so that the antenna is vertical Use two screws to install the bracket to the wall or ceiling To prevent cable stress on the coaxial cable fasten the cable to the mounting surface with a clamp 4 Connect the external antenna to the appropriate base station Note The length of the coaxial cable must not exceed 10 m 33 ft gt P0607659 02 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 213 Figure 82 shows the two methods of installing the indoor omnidirectional external antenna Figure 82 Indoor omnidirectional external antenna Canada Co axial Cable cable clamp Ceiling mount installation Wall mount installation Co axial cable Cable clamp Installing an outdoor omnidirectional antenna Canada When installing an outdoor omnidirectional externa
91. upgraded from earlier versions of the Business Communications Manager software This includes e Security changes on page 15 e New hardware on page 16 e Market profile changes on page 23 Security changes Business Communications Manager 3 5 introduces a number of security enhancements with the addition of a security layer to the programing One change that particularly affects maintenance procedures is the shift from the Telnet interface to using a secure interface SSH based to access the text based Unified Manager menus from a computer connecting to the Business Communications Manager over a LAN for instance when you want to initialize a new hard disk Connecting to the BCM1000 through a serial or crossover cable configuration is not affected by this change If your company wishes to continue using Telnet over the LAN or if you have DECT equipment the Telnet service can be manually enabled through the Unified Manager under Services If you have DECT equipment Telnet is required to run the DECT programming The client SSH application is called PuTTY A link to download this application to your desktop can be found under the Install Clients button on the first page of the Unified Manager The application installs on your computer not on the Business Communications Manager Therefore if you want to use a LAN to connect to the Business Communications Manager hardware during maintenance procedures you must install PuTTY on your computer
92. you buy one of these applications Refer to the Business Communications Manager Software Keycode Installation Guide for specific directions about entering a code Telephony features and options The telephony features and options have individual installation and features guides This section lists the application guides and provides a brief description of the application function e Programming Operations Guide and Telephone Features Programming Guide These guides provide programming for core telephony features and user features such as Voice telephony configuration for digital IP ISDN and radio based telephones and equipment over analog digital ISDN and voice over IP VoIP trunks How to use and program user telephony features at the telephone Companion Application Server software that controls the interface between the BCM1000 and the Companion wireless system available for selected regions Networking DPNSS upgrade requires keycode provides private voice networking for the UK Market Networking MCDN and ETSI Q SIG Voice Networking requires keycode allows you to network your Business Communications Manager system or a number of Business Communications Managers to a Meridian system This allows the network to use a common numbering plan as well as common voice messaging and auto attendant systems connected to the Meridian Data setup applications and protocols to configure the Business Communicati
93. 0 c eee eee ee eee 217 Operating requirements cccedaeaciavssieans PdHese84R PERE D REE RRS 217 Analog transmission parameters 20 0c e eee eee 218 C mectng Ie ATA 2 sareren iranek EEREN ae ea da ea sie cole A 220 Mounga mO AIS 2c vetnrsareienes atts dduns Coad Ebea AA 221 Determining the ATA 2 extension number 2 200 eee eee eee 222 P0607659 02 Contents 49 GConigurmo ME ATA 2 agen tadedewsn s teoeweeeadssianiehdadaiase pias 223 Testin the ATA 2 sec ccct ce SG et tte Sede eee REET Ke eee SD 223 ATA 2 data COmMmMUNICEION lee sane ay nie won dave aes R a goon eed ae 224 Data transmission reguiremeniS 6 5 50 s0neicnseradeda dae nada sadaak nou 224 FAX and modem transmission compatibility 00 00 eee eee eee 224 Installing a data communication device 0 0c eee eee ees 225 Chapter 14 Installing optional telephony equipment eee eee eens 227 PUMA NIG 64s 2 2000 6300860 taata ee Ae AS dee soe oes GEOHeNeTE ORE 227 A xiliary finger POOMMMING ws 2 lt kuw ewe che keke de okee ede we eed 227 Extemal paging SySIOMN casei ee beta e ees EMeE Ae eeu ee eee ee eee eae de awe 228 Connecting the paging system 25 ss 065 sds esses ee ees ee aes cane eaves 228 Exlortial MUSIC SONNO lt c icdud Ree Sl OREM ROOTS BOWERS RECS OREES RESTS URES BROS 229 Music an hold SpeciicationS ss case c twee cine cans enero ean ae eae e ew 229 Connecting the external music Source 02000 cee e
94. 00 eee eee 24 Table 8 Mobility services by region 2 seis c eas debe ester ete bweeeweeees 25 Table 9 Module availability by profile 066 4 45 bee ede ee ees 25 Table 10 PRI line protocol supported by region 200020005 26 Table 1 ASM8 settings for 2 5 systems upgraded to 3 0 software 36 Table 2 DSM 16 DSM 16 and DSM 32 DSM32 single density switch settings for 2 5 systems upgraded to 3 0 36 Table 3 DSM 16 and DSM32 double density switch settings for 2 5 systems upgraded to 3 0 37 Table 4 Basic BCM1000 base unit specifications a saaana aaan 71 Table 5 Module Power and Status LED states 000 a ee eee 90 Table 6 Trunk media bay modules 2s 5ccrcsceasceenssedisecerdsrdisevar s 93 Table 7 CPW LET CHONS ordrea kirst retka EN Berd aes deaeuiad ga 94 Table 8 Satan MOMMIES c2 ccc cide inerant nk roii es ewes Reed eee 97 Table 9 Specialized MOGwles asc 6 vend vais VAL Red SN HAE PORES DO ELw SD OR 101 Table 10 Determining trunk module requirements 00 0 00 112 Table 11 Station media bay modules required 0 00 eee eee eee 113 Table 12 Matching modules to DS30 channel capacity 118 Table 14 Possible media bay module DIP switch settings 139 Table 15 DTM switch settings T1 2as 4 96 seds05eessvaeuve riid venue ves 141 Table 16 DTM switch settings North American PRI 000 141 Table 17 DTM switch settings E1 and UK PRI
95. 1 On the front of the module locate the amphenol connector 2 Wire one end of the cable to the telco demarcation blocks of the building 3 Wire the other end of the cable to the analog lines Refer to the figure and table on the next page P0607659 02 BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide 20 BCM1000 BCM 3 5 addendum The following figure and table show the wiring pin outs for a GATM to connect to a service provider Connector pinout Line Pin Wire color GATM module 1 26 White Blue Both Line 1 Le 1 Blue White Line 2 2R 2 27 White Orange Both een 2 Orange White No 28 3 connectio 29 4 n 3 30 White Slate Both 5 Slate White 4 31 Red Blue Both 6 Blue Red No 32 7 connectio 33 8 n 5 34 Red Brown GATM8 9 Brown Red 6 35 Red Slate GATM8 10 Slate Red No 36 11 connectio 37 12 n 7 38 Black Green GATM8 13 Green Black 8 39 Black Brown GATM8 14 Brown Black No 40 15 to connectio 49 24 n Aux 50 Violet Slate Both 25 Slate Violet Auxiliary port function In download mode the auxiliary port function for all profiles operates as a true Auxiliary port This means that when the power comes back on and if the Aux Port is in use that line will show on the system telephones as being in use LCD indicator lit until the Aux Call is cleared In dipswitch mode the North American
96. 1 954 858 7777 email csrmgmt nortelnetworks com APAC Asia Pacific Technical Support CTAS Telephone 61 388664627 Fax 61 388664644 email asia_support nortelnetworks com P0607659 02 69 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager This chapter describes the Business Communications Manager hardware required to create the system The Business Communications Manager system provides private network and telephony management to small to medium sized businesses With this system you can create a telephony system that suits your special business requirements This compact system allows you to set up access to the public network As well you can create private networks between remote sites which also have Business Communications Systems or Meridian 1 equipment Private networks can be created using dedicated central office CO lines or through a LAN or WAN internet connection using voice over IP VoIP trunks You control your own system from your desktop using the Unified Manager and CallPilot applications The system supports a variety of Nortel Networks telephones which support many user and call features These features can be programmed by the system manager during the initial installation of the telephone Some features can also be programmed by the users through their telephones CallPilot voice mail and Auto Attendant applications are part of the basic Business Communications Manager syste
97. 1 Insert the power modules into the redundant power supply housing at the back of the server a The face of the module is flush with the casing You hear a click when it is properly seated b Secure each module with a screw through the tab on the right side of the module These holes align with the middle two holes on the right of the power supply housing Refer to Figure 136 Figure 136 Insert and attach the modules Module screws Power module status LED Rocker switches 12 Turn on the switches for both power modules 13 Restore the units to operation as described in Restarting the system on page 240 The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the ac power cord System recovery takes several minutes to complete The LEDs on the power supply are on when the ac power is connected P0607659 02 Chapter 19 Replacing a power supply 277 Replacing a redundant power supply module If the green LED for the power supply is not lit but the power switch on the module is on it indicates that the module has failed Note It is not necessary to remove power from the BCM1000 or BCM1000 to replace a gt redundant power supply module Follow these steps to replace the redundant power supply module 1 4 Turn the module switch to OFF Remove the screw from right hand tab Grasp the handle on the module and at the same time pull t
98. 11 External Clock B W 25 k wo P0607659 02 Chapter 9 Starting the system 167 Table 29 shows the wire connections for a DB15 X 21 adapter cable Table 29 DB15 X 21 adapter cable i Chassis Ground 15 3 Receive Data A A 17 Receive Clock A 6 5 Clear to Send A 19 Request To Send B 10 7 Signal Ground 8 21 9 Receive Clock B 13 23 11 External Clock B 14 25 13 Clear To Send B 12 Replacing the cards Refer to Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware on page 281 for instructions about removing and installing these cards Installation and Maintenance Guide 168 Chapter 9 Starting the system Setting initial system configurations After starting the BCM1000 you are ready to set the initial configuration parameters The initial configuration defines your Business Communications Manager to the network It also gives the system a unique identity and initial parameters From that point you can continue with the specific configurations for your system which are described in Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide and the other user guides for each optional application you choose to add to your system Required data parameters Obtain the following parameter values from an Internet Service Provider ISP or corporate network administrator e initial IP address and netmask for each net
99. 16 module Each analog extension requires a Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Upgrading from an existing Norstar system A special media bay module allows you to convert existing Norstar expansion modules from the Norstar ICS to full Business Communications Manager capability The FEM allows you to connect a maximum of six Norstar expansion modules to a BCM1000 Each expansion module connection requires one DS30 channel therefore the BCM1000 used for this purpose can only support one FEM module and no BCM1000e if you are converting a fully configured Norstar system Determining system capacity After you have selected the modules you require you must ensure that the Business Communications Manager can support all the modules This is determined by the DS30 channel requirements of each module The following sections describe these channels and how you fit your modules into the overall system planning Understanding DS30 channel numbers A DS30 channel is a block of virtual pathways on the media services card MSC On a default system six DS30 channel blocks can be assigned to media bay modules Which block the module is assigned to determines the range of line trunk numbers or extension numbers DNs that can be allocated by the module to the equipment connected to that module The other two blocks are permanently routed to the PEC DSPs to support internal Business Communications Manager functions such as voice mail VoIP tr
100. 2 knockout plate 273 L LAN card connecting with default IP address 168 Ethernet crossover cable 172 inserting card 283 installing 283 overview 75 removing 282 wiring 164 LAN CTE overview 82 language by region 23 296 South and Central America 296 latch 153 LEDs BCM1000 79 fan 262 flashing 161 module troubleshooting 157 monitor at startup 155 off 161 PCI device LAN card 282 Installation and Maintenance Guide 340 Index power supply 272 power supply module 275 solid green 161 262 solid red 161 262 SSM board 263 states 161 262 system status monitor 233 licence music on hold 6 lightning protector installation 207 lightning surge arrestor installation 208 installation in Canada 215 installation in U S 209 lightning surge protector 211 limitations Companion channel split 136 192 line protocol by region 26 Line jack 165 line protocol by region 26 301 line services ISDN support by region 298 lines BRI and PRI line types 302 module DIP switch settings 141 protocol by region 301 link protocol 168 local area network card 75 loop current 217 loop resistance 217 M7000 International only 103 M7100 North America only 104 M7100N International only 104 M7208 North America only 104 M7208N International only 104 M7310N International only 104 M7316 North America only 104 M7324 North America only 103 M7324N International only 103 maintenance maintain bac
101. 2 of the available media bay module DS30 channels Exception DSM 16 or DSM 32 used for Companion In this case DSM 32 must be set to channel 6 DSM 16 can be installed in both channels 6 and 7 If channel 7 is not available you cannot use a DSM32 Trunk modules are assigned starting with the last available media bay module DS30 channel channel 6 or 7 depending on the DS30 channel split in effect Exception a 4X16 module cannot be assigned to the last channel Lines start at 61 on DS30 channel 7 6 DSM 32 Example of North American based setup setup DS30 channels DSM 32 2 DSM 32 3 cM 4 DSM 16 Channel 5 supports BRI the station module 5 part of the 4X16 ET DSM32 0 amp BRI DECT 7e 3 5 channel split Channel 7 is not available to any module if your system has been configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split Modules that require two DS30 channels such as the DSM32 and the 4X16 must be assigned to channels higher than 6 to allow all their channels to be active Companion Only a maximum of 16 Companion base stations 30 handsets can be registered on a system configured with a 3 5 split Example of a European based Installation and Maintenance Guide 138 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches Determining module DIP switch settings After you determine
102. 21 Remove the fan cable from motherboard pre 2 5 chassis 263 Figure 122 Remove the fan cables from SSM board 2 5 models 263 Figure 123 Removing the fan BCM1000 version 2 5 single fan model 264 Figure 124 Screw attachments beside fan holes BCM1000 version 2 5 redundant model 264 Figure 125 Installing piggy backed fans 0 00 cece eee eee ees 265 Figure 126 Connect the redundant fan cable to the adapter 266 Figure 127 Fan screws location in BCM1000e 2 0 models 267 Figure 128 Fan screws location in BCM1000e 2 5 redundancy models 267 Figure 129 Process Map Replacing a standard power supply 269 Figure 130 Removing power supply bracket single power supply models 270 Figure 131 Remove the power supply ScrewS 00 eee eee eee 271 Figure 132 Process Map Upgrading to a redundant power supply 272 Figure 133 Remove he Knockout s cocina serdatganeeeiateeee EEEE ems 273 Figure 134 Attach the redundant power supply housing 04 274 Installation and Maintenance Guide 56 Figures Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Securing the power supply bracket 0000s 275 Insert and attach the modules 0000 e eee eee eee 276 Removing
103. 307 7 Orange Red Port 207 Port 307 Port 407 Port 507 Port 607 Port 707 33 Red Green DN 228 DN 244 DN 260 DN 276 DN 292 DN 308 8 Green Red Port 208 Port 308 Port 408 Port 508 Port 608 Port 708 34 Red Brown DN 229 DN 245 DN 261 DN 277 DN 293 DN 309 9 Brown Red Port 209 Port 309 Port 409 Port 509 Port 609 Port 709 P0607659 02 Chapter 11 Installing telephones and peripherals 187 Table 34 Cross referencing ports and DNs Continued DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 channel channel channel channel channel channel Pin Wire color 2 3 4 5 6 7 35 Red Slate DN 230 DN 246 DN 262 DN 278 DN 294 DN 310 10 Slate Red Port 210 Port 310 Port 410 Port 510 Port 610 Port 710 36 Black Blue DN 231 DN 247 DN 263 DN 279 DN 295 DN 311 11 Blue Black Port 211 Port 311 Port 411 Port 511 Port 611 Port 711 37 Black Orange DN 232 DN 248 DN 264 DN 280 DN 296 DN 312 12 Orange Black Port 212 Port 312 Port 412 Port 512 Port 612 Port 712 38 Black Green DN 233 DN 249 DN 265 DN 281 DN 297 DN 313 13 Green Black Port 213 Port 313 Port 413 Port 513 Port 613 Port 713 39 Black Brown DN 234 DN 250 DN 266 DN 282 DN 298 DN 314 14 Brown Black Port 214 Port 314 Port 414 Port 514 Port 614 Port 714 40 Black Slate DN 235 DN 251 DN 267 DN 283 DN 299 DN 315 15 Slate Black Port 215 Port 315 Port 415 Port 515 Port 615 Port 715 41 Yellow Blue DN 236 DN 252 DN 268 DN 284 DN
104. 4 TCM 15 OBIX15 TCM 16 OBIX16 RPI 8 BIX wiring chart Table 38 lists the wiring chart for the RPI 8 BIX Table 38 RPI 8 BIX wiring chart White Blue Blue White TCM White Orange Orange White PWR White Green Green White 29 PWR White Brown 4 OBIX2 Brown White 30 Bee TCM White Slate 5 Slate White 31 PWR Red Blue 6 Blue Red Installation and Maintenance Guide 200 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system Table 38 RPI 8 BIX wiring chart Continued 10 OBIX4 BS4 19 OBIX7 BS7 Red Orange Orange Red TCM Red Green Green Red PWR Red Brown Brown Red PWR Red Slate Slate Red TCM Black Blue Blue Black PWR Black Orange Orange Black PWR Black Green Green Black TCM Black Brown Brown Black PWR Black Slate Slate Black PWR Yellow Blue Blue Yellow TCM Yellow Orange Orange Yellow PWR Yellow Green Green Yellow PWR Yellow Brown Brown Yellow TCM Yellow Slate Slate Yellow PWR Violet Blue Blue Violet PWR Violet Orange Orange Violet TCM Violet Green Green Violet PWR Violet Brown Brown Violet P0607659 02 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 201 RPI 8 BIX wiring chart Table 39 lists the wiring chart for the RPI 16 BIX Table 39 RPI 16 BIX wiring chart 26 PWR White Blue 1 OBI
105. 5 DECT system components 106 DPNSS networking 80 DSM 16 and DSM 32 digital station module 98 DTM digital trunk module 94 Fax Mail application 81 hard disk install 247 hard disk space 70 hardware components 70 12050 soft phone 82 LAN CTE requires keycode memory 285 288 memory amount 70 Message Networking requires keycode 82 NetVision system components 106 PCI slots 70 Personal Call Manager 83 ports 78 power supply 269 Professional Call Center requires keycode 81 QoS Routing 83 remove BCM1000 cables for shutdown 239 removing the hard disk 244 replacing fan 261 restart 240 shutdown 238 station media bay modules 97 supported adapters 75 supported telephones 75 system components 69 system features 80 T7406 system components 106 telephony components 74 TSP 82 Installation and Maintenance Guide 334 Index VoIP Gateway requires keycode 82 wiring requirements 120 C cables analog digital length 120 DB15 X 21 adapter cable 167 fan cable adapter 266 labelling 239 maximum distance 197 modem card DB25 166 power supply 273 power supply removing 270 RAID board connections 255 removing before shutdown 152 shock warning 244 shutdown remove 239 V 35 adapter cable wiring 166 calendar battery removing 290 Call Center Agents key code required 80 Call Center Agents requires keycode 80 Call Center overview 81 Call Center Reporting requires a keycode 81 Call Cent
106. 81 Extension comparison CHEM 2ei45 ses 5 53 24558 hie Ped dS VeRe ewes 183 Cross referencing ports and DNs 0 cece eee eee 186 RPL REQUIEMGNS c c 2scceccices cede screens cee ecamec dae 194 CADO dSIanEOS t ccn re ddee pedeevedes Honey ddes bonmenea see es 197 AU VINE Gee ree seesaw eatd hema ees 4s eeb i ekoreeae case 199 RPS BIX WIKNG Chall sosro seeedeee ede ved eee eee deeeeaws 199 MEETS BIX wiring chari 2 ccke 14 oie ee eww dh dee ios ues 201 Minimum distance between office areas and base stations 204 Clearance for the base stations 2 00 e ee eee ees 204 UTAM MESSIOS ios Cae e ee eek ee aan abies 206 LED Display screen settings 0 00 e eee eee eens 234 RAID bead LED Stalo opcicvniiecdhvecadevared tad ov aaus Bas 258 MOLY Miner Seling cecsa goede dis eid sedeseadeteekoeaese aad 259 Fan and temperature LEDs on the server 02000 005 262 Pover SOD LED cond oe ds dated eee ddan od gems eal ceed dee 272 BOMID00 POLED SigiGs chscanpenteue ones oeees ioe S49 RS SH 004 282 Core software defined by region and carrier profile 295 LSE cdkey eid ttn g eed deh teed ome Ce eee 296 South Central America language breakout 000 296 COMMA A bceey cae eeeeee GAG pa bee eeedasbatGauaeeanee 297 LOU OGIVO ee ise hee eee ees alee Rhee ee pee ey 298 ISDN services by Protocol 0 0 00 cece eee ee eee 298 Mobility services by regi n sos 6 scue eee eee ee
107. ACES 3 on on on on 235 238 N A N A 235 238 3 0 on on on on on off 181 184 181 184 189 192 181 184 1 on 189 192 189 192 197 200 189 192 Chl 4 2 on 197 200 197 200 205 208 197 200 D 3 on 205 208 N A N A 205 208 4 0 on on on on off on 151 154 151 154 159 162 151 154 1 on on 159 162 159 162 167 170 159 162 ons 2 on on 167 170 167 170 175 178 167 170 pee ee 3 on on 175 178 N A N A 175 178 5 0 on on on on off off 121 124 121 124 129 132 121 124 1 129 132 129 132 137 140 129 132 Chl 2 137 140 137 140 145 148 137 140 B 3 145 148 N A N A 145 148 6 0 on on on off on on 91 94 91 94 99 102 91 94 1 on on on 99 102 99 102 107 110 99 102 Chl 7 2 on on on 107 110 107 110 115 118 107 110 Se ae 3 on on on 115 118 N A N A 115 118 7 0 on on on off on off 61 64 61 64 69 72 1 on on on a 69 72 69 72 77 80 N A 2 on on on 77 80 77 80 85 88 3 on off off off on off 85 88 N A N A Custom DN range for 4X16 1 The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column Installation and Maintenance Guide P0607659 02 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 addendum 39 Upgrading from a standard system When you upgrade your BCM1000 from a single power supply and fan to a redundant system you need to remove the jumper from the connectors on the Sys
108. Australia United Kingdom UK English Denmark Danish Norwegian Swedish NA English France Euro French NA English Germany German NA English Global NA English NA French NA Spanish Turkish Holland Dutch Euro French NA English Italy Italian NA English Norway Norwegian Swedish Danish NA English Spain Euro Spanish NA English Sweden Swedish Norwegian Danish NA English Switzerland German Euro French Italian NA English Table 51 shows a breakdown of the language support for South American and Central American countries Table 51 South Central America language breakout Language Spanish English French Country Dominican Republic Peru St Thomas G vana Haiti Jamaica Panama USVI RA Puerto Rico Uruguay Aruba St Kitts Argentina Venezuela Bahamas St itera Bolivia El Salvador Bermuda A St Maarten Chile Honduras Curacao Suri rast uriname Columbia Ecuador Trinidad Turks amp Caicos Costa Rica Paraguay Anguilla St Vincent Guatemala Antigua i St Thomas Mexico Barbados Camani lands Nicaragua Dominica Bee Grenada P0607659 01 Appendix A System region attributes 297 Caller ID displays The North American region supports the following format 5554775 613 All other regions display the numbers in a continuous string of a maximum of 14 characters 6135554775 Companding law by region Table 52 shows the companding law used for
109. B channels Mobility services by region on page 299 lists the region profiles that can accommodate the Companion system Companion sets default to DNs in the 565 to 596 DN range and use the DN type Companion P0607659 02 Chapter 11 Installing telephones and peripherals 189 The following documentation is available for this system e A site survey is required before you can install this system When you purchase the Companion system you are provided with deployment documentation that will assist you in planning base station locations e Refer to Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system on page 191 for installation instructions e The handset vendors provide a user guide with each set that describes the handset features DECT Systems A DECT media bay module provides a pathway for a maximum of 32 cordless handsets to access the Business Communications Manager The handsets can either be twinned with stationary sets or they can act as independent sets Up to eight base stations can be deployed around a site Each base station connects to a port on the DECT media bay module which provides both trunk BRI and station module functions The handsets are registered to the base station but they can also roam between base stations DECT sets are ISDN sets and use the DN range of 597 to 624 with DN type ISDN and DECT If you require more than 28 DECT handsets use DNs from the Companion range and change the DN type to
110. CM1000 system e JPF 10 10 10 1 e Subnet 255 255 255 0 Warning If the default IP address would create a network conflict you must change the IP address of the BCM1000 before you connect any network connections To change the IP address outside of a network you can use one of the following e aterminal and a null modem cable e acomputer and an ethernet crossover cable Refer to Using a null modem serial cable on page 169 or Using an Ethernet crossover cable on page 172 for detailed instructions about connecting to the base unit Connecting the cards The data networking hardware is installed in the BCM1000 at the factory All systems that use remote data management have one LAN card Some systems have a LAN and a WAN card Some systems can have two LAN cards Some systems also have a modem card Figure 58 shows one of four profiles available Figure 58 Locating the data cards on the BCM1000 o0 0000 00 O O o O O o WAN card Modem card LAN card Note This illustration shows a profile 1 data card setup Your system may not have all the cards indicated Installation and Maintenance Guide 164 Chapter 9 Starting the system A Warning Do not plug these cables into the system unless it is running For mainte
111. Companion has four main components Software Companion software manages the telephone traffic between Companion base stations and portable telephones Base stations connect to the Business Communications Manager in the same way that Business Communications Manager telephones do You register the Companion portable telephones on the system They do not require any ports on the system You can connect a maximum of 60 portable telephones and a maximum of 32 base stations 32 cells to the system Note If you choose a 3 5 channel split for your system you cannot assign a module to channel 7 This limits you to a maximum of 16 base stations which can support a maximum of 30 handsets Companion base stations Position the base stations around the coverage area to send and receive calls between the portable telephones and Business Communications Manager Base stations use digital radio technology and support handoff and roaming within the coverage area The coverage area can be a maximum of 160 000 square meters 1 700 000 square feet when using the maximum number of base stations Companion wireless handsets Business Communications Manager supports the following wireless handsets Companion 3020 Companion C3050 Etiquette Companion C3050 CT2Plus and Companion C3060 The portable telephones used with your Business Communications Manager system are small lightweight units with complete digital performance to provide clear voice qualit
112. DN type to NA Portable Custom DN channel 112131415 16 DSM16 DSM 32 range P0607659 02 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches 149 DECT switch settings The DECT module supports a maximum of eight DECT radio base station connections This module occupies one full DS30 channel which can support a maximum of 32 cordless handsets when all eight base stations are deployed For detailed instructions about using the DECT module refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide Table 23 shows the settings for each DS30 channel and the assigned dialing numbers DNs Table 23 DECT module settings Select Select Use these peta DS30 Offset DS30 channel DNs on 2 5 Custom DN range channel offset system updated 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 system on lon lon lon lon Ton 2 0 597 624 501 532 on lon lon lon lon 3 0 597 624 501 532 4 Q jer jee ee ye lor 597 624 501 532 5 ghee opion fort ott 597 624 501 532 6 g mom lor 0n 597 624 501 532 oe ge Pe on a 597 624 501 532 O M e If you need more DNs use DNs in the 565 to 596 range Ensure no other devices are assigned to these DNs before you use them Change the DN type field to ISDN and DECT The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a differen
113. For details refer to Shutting down the system software on page 238 Otherwise skip to step 2 3 Set up the BCM1000 for maintenance as described in Shutting down the system hardware on page 239 4 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 5 Grasp the top edge of the PEC you want to remove and pull upward Refer to Figure 145 Figure 145 Removing or replacing a PEC Installation and Maintenance Guide 286 Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware Installing a PEC When you replace or add PECs ensure you have followed the directions for shutting down the system from the previous section Also ensure you have a current data backup of your system AN Warning Possible data loss Ensure that you do not touch the PEC casing to any of the components on the MSC as you are sliding it into position This may cause shorting to occur which can erase memory or cause a loss of telephony programming If this occurs complete the installation of the PEC and then restore the data from your backup medium Follow these steps to correctly install a PEC 1 Decide which slot you are going to install the PEC into on the MSC board 2 Line the card up between the rails of the slot Refer to Figure 145 on page 285 3 Carefully push the PEC down into the slot until it is firmly seated Note Do not force the card into its slot If
114. M1000 that the 5 m 16 ft cable between the unit and the BCM1000 can be connected without stress on the cable Caution Refer to Environment checklist on page 119 for acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM1000e Required equipment e a wall mounting bracket supplied with the unit e two 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screws e a plywood backboard 2 cm 3 4 in thick Follow these steps to mount the BCM1000e on wall 1 Install the 2 cm 3 4 in plywood backboard on the wall Note If the backboard for the BCM1000 has enough room for the BCM1000e you do not require a second backboard 2 Choose a location on the backboard that is level and leaves enough space on the sides 23 cm or 9 in to insert and remove the media bay modules 3 Use the slotted holes on the wall mounting bracket to mark the location for the two mounting screws 4 Screw two 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in screws into the backboard leaving 6 mm 1 4 in of the two screws showing 5 Align the screw holes between the unit and the wall mounting bracket 6 Fasten the wall mounting bracket using four screws Refer to Figure 46 Figure 46 Attaching the wall mounting bracket to the BCM1000e ey Installation and Maintenance Guide 132 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM1000e expansion unit Caution Use only the screws supplied with the wall mounting bracket Do not replace
115. M7000 103 M7100N 104 M7208N 104 M7310N 104 M7324 103 M7324N 103 T7100 103 104 T7208 103 104 T7316 103 104 Message Networking requires a keycode 82 miniature jack 230 minimum distances Companion base station 203 mirrored disk RAID cable connections 255 upgrading to 252 mirrored disks drive status 259 monitoring 259 power routing 256 mirrored hard disk install 247 mirroring process 249 positioning in the brackets 247 RAID connections 248 removing disk 244 mobiles by region 299 mobiles by region 25 mode select GATM 18 modem card auxiliary jack 95 backup to integrated QOS routing 75 DB15 X 21 adapter cable 167 DB25 cable wiring 166 internal V 90 interface 75 required parameters 168 V 35 adapter cable wiring 166 wiring 165 Modem transmission compatibility 224 modem external connecting an ATA2 220 module switches overview 86 modules determining DIP switch settings 138 double density settings 33 DS30 channel hierarchy 135 GATM 16 GATM description 17 installing new hardware 153 offset configurations 139 power supply 274 replacing 156 version 3 changes 33 wiring 175 monitoring mirrored disks 259 mounting brackets 123 125 129 131 moving telephones 190 MSC auxiliary ringer 227 description 74 external music source 229 external paging 228 inserting card 283 page output jack 228 page relay 229 page signal output jack 228 remove LAN card 282 removing cables 152 removing front cover 240 Mu
116. Part No P0607659 02 September 17 2003 Business Communications Manager BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide e Changes for version 3 5 software new hardware e Changes for version 3 0 1 software initialization e Changes for version 3 0 software Installation and Maintenance for version 2 5 software NORTEL E NETWORKS Copyright 2003 Nortel Networks All rights reserved October 2003 The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks NA Inc Trademarks NORTEL NETWORKS and Business Communications Manager are trademarks of Nortel Networks NA Inc Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Symbol Spectrum24 and NetVision are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies Inc All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners P0607659 02 North American Regulatory Information Safety Business Communications Manager equipment meets all applicable requirements of both the CSA C22 2 No 950 95 and UL 1950 Edition 3 Danger Risk o
117. Power Supply SAPS A device which provides power to a telephone that is more than 300 m 975 ft and less than 1200 m 3900 ft from the server or to a CAP module Station media bay module Physical units installed in a Business Communications Manager that connect the telephone lines to the system subnet mask A value used to route packets on TCP IP networks When the IP layer has to deliver a packet through an interface it uses the destination address contained in the packet together with the subnet mask of the interface to select an interface and the next hop in that subnet synchronous A synchronous signal is sourced from the same timing reference A synchronous signal causes the interval between successive bits characters or events to remain constant or locked in to a specific clock frequency Installation and Maintenance Guide 328 Glossary System speed dial code A two digit code 01 to 70 that you program to dial a telephone number a maximum of 24 digits long You can program System speed dial codes for the complete system under the System Speed heading T1 Digital carrier system or line that carries data at 1 544 Mb s Target lines Lines used only to answer incoming calls A target line routes a call according to digits it receives from an incoming trunk You refer to target lines in the same way as physical lines Telephony Application Program Interface TAPI A standard program interface that
118. RAID 1 disk mirroring protocol which creates an exact data duplicate of the system hard disk on a second co located hard disk within the BCM1000 If one of the hard disks becomes inoperable the system halts the mirroring process and boots from the unaffected hard disk You can then schedule disk replacement during normal maintenance periods This does not replace your BRU backup disks which should still be run on a regular schedule and be kept off site Do Not Disturb A feature that stops calls from ringing at a telephone Only Priority Calls ring at the telephone when this feature is set A line button flashes when a call is received but the set does not ring domain name The domain name is used to translate Internet IP addresses into common language to allow for easier user access Domain Name Server DNS The domain name system or server is the system that maps names of objects into IP numbers or other resource record values dual tone multifrequency DTMF Two distinct telephone signaling tones used for dialing dynamic IP address This feature is provided by an IP address server which assigns an IP address to a computer every time it logs on to the network Emergency 911 dialing The ability to access a public emergency response system by dialing the digits 9 1 1 emergency telephone A single line telephone that becomes active when there is no power to the Business Communications Manager This telephone is also referr
119. Refer to Mobility services by region on page 299 Table 64 demonstrates this combination including the switch settings for each module Table 64 Three BRI modules two DSM 32s and 1 DECT module Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one module Switch setting 1 3 2 DS30 DECT BRI DSM 32s channel Offset 0 Offset 0 1 and 2 OffsetO 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 on on on on on on 3 4 on on on on DECT switch settings BRI settings BRI settings on BRI settings on Installation and Maintenance Guide 312 Appendix B Media bay module combinations Changing configurations Here are some points to consider when changing modules in existing or in new Business Communications Manager systems e Trunk and analog station modules cannot share a DS30 channel e Modules that require more than one DS30 channel automatically assign the next channel in chronological order Therefore if an existing installed module uses either of the required DS30 channels remove the installed module You must then assign the DIP switches for both modules so there is no conflict between them or with any other installed module e The goal is to have a balanced mix of trunk and station modules e Write the DIP switch settings for each module in a place that is handy to reference when you decide to change or add modules e If you update your Norstar system
120. The Programming Operations Guide provides a detailed record about the information that you require to configure basic system programming Warning If you change this information on an existing system the telephony programming is erased and the telephony system is disabled for a period of time The Business Communications Manager also performs a cold start Entering the software keycodes If you have purchased any of the optional Business Communications Manager applications that require keycode activation refer to Business Communications Manager Software Keycode Installation Guide for information about how obtain the keycodes from the Nortel Networks Keycode Retrieval System KRS and how to enter them into the Unified Manager These codes can be entered after basic system configuration is complete Regenerating keys after system replacement If you need to replace your BCM1000 which would be the case if the motherboard or MSC became inoperable you will need to regenerate all your keycodes to reflect the new system identification and enter them again after you perform your system data restore Installation and Maintenance Guide 174 Chapter 9 Starting the system P0607659 02 175 Chapter 10 Wiring the modules This chapter describes how to wire the cables that connect to the station and trunk modules e Station modules require 25 pair wired cables to connect the modules to the equipment in the telephone room wh
121. X9 Blue White 27 ee TCM White Orange 2 Orange White 28 PWR White Green 3 Green White 29 PWR White Brown 4 Brown White 30 TCM White Slate 5 Slate White 31 PWR Red Blue 6 Blue Red 32 PWR Red Orange 7 OBIX11 Orange Red 33 EN TCM Red Green 8 Green Red 34 PWR Red Brown 9 Brown Red 35 PWR Red Slate 10 Slate Red 36 TCM Black Blue 11 Blue Black 37 PWR Black Orange 12 Orange Black 38 PWR Black Green 13 OBIX13 Green Black 39 BSts TCM Black Brown 14 Brown Black 40 PWR Black Slate 15 Slate Black Installation and Maintenance Guide 202 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system Table 39 RPI 16 BIX wiring chart Continued Yellow Blue Blue Yellow TCM Yellow Orange Orange Yellow PWR Yellow Green Green Yellow 44 PWR Yellow Brown 19 OBIX15 Brown Yellow 45 Bete TCM Yellow Slate 20 Slate Yellow 46 PWR Violet Blue 21 Blue Violet 47 PWR Violet Orange 22 Orange Violet 48 TCM Violet Green 23 Green Violet 49 PWR Violet Brown 24 Brown Violet P0607659 02 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 203 Installing Companion base stations Before you install portable equipment ensure that a site planner determines base station locations and records the base station information in a provisioning record Caution You must install all base stations within 1230 m 4000 ft TCM wiring length of the BCM1000 or base station module To optim
122. a minimum of 54 in and a maximum of 9 ft 9 in distance between the center of one base station to the center of another e for Canada a minimum of 9 cm and a maximum of 1 5 m distance from edge to edge i Warning Never install base stations in rows Position base stations away from office areas or areas with high portable telephone traffic Table 40 on page 204 shows the minimum distance between office areas and base stations Install the base station on the ceiling or high on walls to maintain these minimum distances Installation and Maintenance Guide 204 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system Table 40 Minimum distance between office areas and base stations Number of base stations in the cell Minimum distance between office areas and base stations 1 1 m 40 in 2 1 4 m 56 in 3 1 8 m 72 in 4 2 m 80 in Attaching a Companion base station Install base stations on a wall or on a ceiling When installing base stations on a wall install them with their covers at the bottom as shown in Figure 77 on page 205 Allow for clearances around the base station as indicated in Table 41 Table 41 Clearance for the base stations Clearance conditions Canada USA Clearance from all other objects 9 cm 3 5 in Vertical clearance from base station center to base station center 27cm 54 in Horizontal clearance from base station center to base station center 41 cm 54 in
123. aces equivalent of a BRI module and does module not require a separate module for trunk line functions Installation and Maintenance Guide 94 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware Digital Trunk media bay module The Digital Trunk media bay module DTM connects a standard digital PSTN line to the Business Communications Manager using either a digital or PRI line e On North American Business Communications Manager systems the DTM connects to a T1 or PRI line With a T1 line you can add a maximum of 24 digital telephone lines With a PRI line you can add a maximum of 23 digital telephone lines e On International Business Communications Manager systems the DTM connects to an ETSI or PRI digital line With an ETSI or PRI line you can add a maximum of 30 digital telephone lines The front bezel of the DTM has a RJ48C connector that connects the DTM to the service provider connection point The faceplate also has a set of loopback connectors you can use to run loopback tests For details on loopback tests refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide Figure 28 shows the front of the module Figure 28 DTM module LEDs and connectors front view Power LED Status LED In Service LED Loopback Test LED Continuity Loopback Receive LEDs Transmit LED Loopback S RJ48C digital telephone line connector Front view Table 7 provides a description of the function for each DTM LEDs Tab
124. aching the BCM1000e to the rack 0 0 0c eee eee 130 Installing the BCM1000e on the wall 0 0 c eee ee 131 Installing the BCM1000e on a flat surface 00 0 cee eee 132 Connecting the BCM1000e to the BCM1000 0000 eee eee 132 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches 0c ee ween 135 Rules jor assigning DS30 channels 26 6520020000040 sense sense inne iras 135 Notes about assigning modules 0 0 ccc eee eee ee 135 Choosing the assigned order for modules 2 00 e eee eee 136 Determining module DIP switch settings 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 138 Setting the DIP switches onthe modules 00 anaana 140 Line and extension numbers for specific modules 200 0 eee eee 141 DTM Switch SOngs 6220 lt d0c2 otto cetrtermtad seeeas eed omewiees 141 BRLOwten SOS 2 cient da kit IRE nn baad ek kore Glen aa E 142 GTN onton OONO 22 picn dette Ghueedaye pabaeeceae E A 143 AAS SEN SOMOS Yai s bt ehhh e tee Riad Gee eRe ewe ee RS 145 P0607659 02 Contents 47 ASM 8 switch SeUINGS 24uncccadensa khOES eee be Ree eee eds MES TSI RES BOOS 147 DSM SWHGh SCUINGS si sccaxge sider eddy hebed tented eee edaraomediees 148 DECI Sich ONGS ac gust hehehe sabe beu dandy dude nate een 149 FEM SMC SSIS rsrs ti nkan sa petehat eda gee eae ban 150 Chapter 8 Installing media bay modules 000 cess cece eee ween eee 151 Shutting Gown the System an
125. aeeeer eee vane erect ees 103 Potable SYST cas 0se4escere eee ceeneede boaters cae bosarsvaaosc4 105 Companion system components 00 2 0c eee ee eee eee 105 DECT system components occi cas voearsadebceear sews sd oeek rssi 106 T7406 system components 1 5 6 ced eee coh bee vk d Dhee cee 106 NetVision system components 002 cee eee eee eee eee 106 Chapter 3 Auxiliary r6QuIPGINGNS 2 ccccics need ce ces eee ees ee eee ees 109 Compuler specications on ccus ike o ced teed peels ded ER sek swale ey 109 Browsor SQUIRTING 4 02 dudes pe Seiad adsgned hates Eee eee Speeds 109 Preloading Java class files on your workstation 0 00s eee eee 110 Optimizing Unified Manager speed 200 eee eee eee 110 Chapter 4 Selecting the media bay modules for your system 0055 111 Selecting the trunk media bay modules 00 0 cece eee ee eee 112 Selecting the station media bay modules 0 00 e eee eee ee 113 Upgrading from an existing Norstar system 0 00 cee eee 114 Determining system capacity gt ee 4 5454 Senses ees Hehe eke Oe 114 Understanding DS30 channel numbers 00000 0 eee ee eeaes 114 SeHNG UNS 6252 0 ctor tate ceavasdieotehe 6eees ARPS CRN eS RES EERE 116 Determining module channel requirements 00 0c e eee eee eee 117 Installation and Maintenance Guide 46 Contents Chapter 5 Installing the BCM1000 4 ccieecdsce i aaeee ed cersewe
126. air work is required Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions a When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed b Ifthe product has been exposed to rain water or liquid has been spilled on the product disconnect and allow the product to dry out to see if it still operates but do not open up the product c If the product housing has been damaged d If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Caution To eliminate the possibility of accidental damage to cords plugs jacks and the telephone do not use sharp instruments during the assembly procedures Warning Do not insert the plug at the free end of the handset cord directly into a wall or baseboard jack Such misuse can result in unsafe sound levels or possible damage to the handset Save these instructions P0607659 02 11 International Regulatory Information The CE Marking on this equipment indicates compliance with the following This device conforms to Directive 1999 5 EC on Radio V Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment as adopted by the European Parliament And Of The Council This is a class A product In a domestic environment thi
127. ake sure the terminal loop resistance is less than or equal to 200 ohms Note If necessary install the ATA 2 near to the data communication device to maintain a maximum loop resistance of less than 200 ohms When using 0 4 mm wire 26 AWG the ATA 2 must be within 800 m 2 600 ft of the BCM1000 4 Disconnect the single line telephone from the ATA 2 5 Plug the data communication device into ATA 2 Installation and Maintenance Guide 226 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters P0607659 02 227 Chapter 14 Installing optional telephony equipment This chapter tells you how to connect the optional ringer page and music telephony equipment to the media services card MSC connectors on the front of the BCM1000 Auxiliary ringer customer supplied An auxiliary ringer is a customer supplied piece of hardware that provides external ringing capability to telephones connected to the Business Communications Manager system if the telephones are set to allow it To install this equipment follow these steps 1 Use the installation instructions that came with the ringer hardware to install the auxiliary ringer 2 Connect the ringer generator miniature jack to the auxiliary ringer output on the MSC Refer to Figure 91 Figure 91 Auxiliary ringer jack Auxiliary ringer jack MSC faceplate Ring Tip CI Sleeve O Auxiliary ringer Tip Auxiliary relay output O Ring Auxiliary relay outpu
128. al telephones AAAA I 1 I I I i I I I I i DECT Installation and g Maintenance a I pI Three port Switch A 3 IP Telephony i Configuration Guide a Installation i manuals come with telephones E p P0607659 02 Preface 65 Operations documentation J Documentation CD Hardware Installation lt 4 Using the PRE and equipment g 71 00 User Card T7208 User Card T7316 User Card T7406 User Card M7324 User Card i2004 User Card i2002 User Card NetVision Feature Card Central Answering Telephony Configuration Position CAP User Card Prime Telephone User Card Telephone Feature Card Hospitality Features Card ATA User Guide CallPilot Quick Reference card NVM interface CallPilot Quick Reference card CP interface N Using the telephones and equipment 4 Voice Mail and Call Management Applications I Sai eo oe ee oe oe mmHmHHHHHHH Ww Quick Start Wizard I Setting up Lines Routes and Programming Operations Guide 4 Access Codes Controlling calls Setting up Telephone records and features Data Configurations Ee Networking Ee Registering Telephones IP IP Telephones re A i Software Keycode Instal
129. all another user and ask that user to stop forwarding calls to their set P0607659 01 Glossary 317 call log An incoming call log accessed through the set that displays the following information for every call e sequence number within the Call Log e name and number of caller e long distance indication e call answered indication e time and date of the call e number of repeated calls from the same source e name of the line that received the call Camp on A feature that allows the user to reroute a call to a telephone when all the lines on that telephone are busy To answer a camped call use Call Queuing or select a line if the camped call appears on the set Queued calls get priority over camped calls camp timeout The length of a delay before a camped call returns to the telephone that camped the call Set the length of delay under Feature settings in System programming central answering position CAP An M7324 telephone that provides backup answering and set monitoring Assign a CAP under CAP assignment in System programming channel service unit CSU A device on the Digital Trunk Interface that is the termination point of the T1 lines from the T1 service provider The CSU collects statistics on the quality of the T1 signal The CSU ensures network compliance with FCC rules and protects the network from harmful signals or voltages client A client is a computer system or process that requests a service
130. all the RAID board you need to install a second hard disk and then wire the RAID board to the hard disks and to the BCM1000 Install the second hard drive as described in Installing a new hard disk on page 247 2 Connect the ribbon cables as described in Connecting RAID board ribbon cables on page 255 3 Connect the power cables to the hard disks the RAID board and the media bay module housing as described in Routing power for mirrored systems on page 256 4 Restore the system to operation Refer to Restoring the system to operation on page 240 The RAID board automatically starts the mirroring process within 45 seconds after the system comes back online This occurs after the service up window closes about six minutes into the power up sequence Your computer will display a status bar as the initialization continues Note Initialization times 20G HDD approximately three hours 8 4G HDD approximately 80 minutes The event log will state when the initialization is complete HDD Rebuild Complete System Status Monitor Result P0607659 02 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk 255 In the mirrored disk configuration the RAID controller board automatically writes the same data from the primary hard disk to the secondary mirrored disk Once this is complete the board ensures that the disks remain identical With this configuration if one disk fails the second disk has an exact copy of the current
131. alling the Companion system RPI output connections Feed the output pairs in through the bottom of the RPI and route the pairs to the output connectors Figure 74 shows how to route the output pairs If you use one pair to power a base station connect the power pair to PWR 1 and PWR 1 If you use two pairs to power a base station connect one pair to PWR 1 and PWR 1 and the second pair to PWR 2 and PWR 2 Caution Ensure both pairs have the same polarity If you connect two power pairs with opposite polarities you can damage the base station and RPI Figure 74 Output connector pinout OBIXn RPI input connections Feed the TCM input pairs from the Business Communications Manager distribution frame through the top of the RPI and route them to the input connectors IBIX1 to IBIX4 Figure 75 shows how to route the input pairs The maximum number of input pairs in an RPI installation is 16 Table 37 lists the pinout and signal references Figure 75 Input connector pinout Pin7Z Ping Pin3 Pin y v v Y AULT A A A A Pin8 Pin Pin4 Pin2 IBIXn P0607659 02 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 199 Table 37 Input wiring TCM 1 OBIX1 TCM 2 OBIX2 TCM 3 OBIX3 TCM 4 OBIX4 TCM 5 OBIX5 TCM 6 OBIX6 TCM 7 OBIX7 TCM 8 OBIX8 TCM 9 OBIX9 TCM 10 OBIX10 TCM 11 OBIX11 TCM 12 OBIX12 TCM 13 OBIX13 TCM 14 OBIX1
132. allows communication over telephones or video phones to people or phone connected resources elsewhere in the world Transfer A feature that allows you to redirect a call to another telephone in your Business Communications Manager system over a network or outside your system Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP A language controlling communication between computers on the Internet TCP e checks packets of information for errors e sends requests for re transmission in the event of errors e returns multiple packets of a message into the original sequence when the message reaches its destination IP e controls how packets are sent out over networks e has a packet addressing method that allows any computer on the Internet forward a packet to another computer that is a step or more nearer to the recipient Trunk The public telephone system or private network connection between the Business Communications Manager system and the outside world Trunk media bay module Physical units installed in a Business Communications Manager that connect the system to the outside world User Speed Dial Two digit codes 71 94 programmed to dial external telephone numbers These numbers are available only at the telephone on which they are programmed P0607659 01 Glossary 329 V 90 A data transmission standard used by the modem installed in the Business Communications Manager This standard allows data to b
133. an plugs in beside the first fan Refer to Figure 139 on page 279 Note that the version 2 0 cabinets only have one set of fan perforations as shown in Figure 138 To replace a standard or redundant power supply in a version 2 5 BCM1000e unit you can follow the instructions given in the sections noted below e Standard supply BCM1000e Replacing a standard power supply on page 269 Refer to Figure 138 Figure 138 BCM1000e standard power supply interior connections Cooling fan cable connectors Power supply screws P0607659 02 Chapter 19 Replacing a power supply 279 e Redundant power supply Replacing a redundant power supply module on page 277 Refer to Figure 139 and Figure 140 Figure 139 BCM1000e redundant power supply interior connections Power supply screws Fan cables Figure 140 Installing the power module in a redundant BCM1000e Installation and Maintenance Guide 280 Chapter 19 Replacing a power supply P0607659 02 281 Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware Besides the hard disk power supply and cooling fans a number of components the BCM1000 uses for data functions can be replaced These components can be replaced Replacing data cards WAN cards LAWN cards modem cards computer memory PEC cards motherboard battery Depending on your location you can have various configurations of data cards that can include WAN c
134. anager ATA2 User Guide The default is Tones OFF Testing the ATA 2 Confirm that the ATA 2 is operating by connecting a single line telephone to the ATA 2 Make an internal call and an external call using the telephone connected to the ATA 2 Next call the ATA 2 from an system telephone Refer to the Business Communications Manager ATA2 User Guide for details Installation and Maintenance Guide 224 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters ATA 2 data communication The ATA 2 connects a standard analog data device such as a FAX or modem to the Business Communications Manager system This section shows the additional steps required to install ATA 2 for data communication Data transmission requirements When using the ATA 2 for data transmission the analog loop resistance must not exceed 200 ohms for example 730 m of 0 4 mm wire or 2 400 ft of 26 AWG wire The external line assigned to the ATA 2 must follow the transmission network requirements described in the data communication device specifications Transmission rates baud over 1 200 bps require a modulation design compatible with the telephone line bandwidth Use a conditioned external line to prevent data corruption during transmission Note Maximum loss from the ATA 2 analog terminal to the CO must be 10 dB or less at 1 kHz If the loss exceeds this limit condition the line This loss ensures correct data transmission for different types of data termina
135. analogy telephone and connect a new telephone of a different type into the same jack for example replacing an T7310 telephone with an M7324 the new telephone keeps the old extension number but does not retain the user parameters The new telephone receives a default profile for a telephone of its type Refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide for set configuration information If the new telephone has fewer lines than the old one automatic outgoing line selection cannot work with the Handsfree Mute feature You must select a line manually Note If you replace a digital telephone with an IP telephone or vice versa programming is lost because the connection method is different and the DNs are assigned differently Refer to the JP Telephony Configuration Guide for directions for installing and moving an IP telephone Status of the replaced telephone The replaced telephone loses its programming and internal number If the telephone is plugged in again at another jack the Business Communications Manager considers the replaced telephone a new telephone P0607659 02 295 Appendix A System region attributes This appendix provides a number of tables that show the relationship of system programming to the region or software that you select at system startup Each region is designed using a set of system defaults that provide specific functionality for the region in which the system is deploy
136. ance Guide 92 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware DIP switches The six DIP switches that you use to set the DS30 channels and offsets are found either on the bottom of the module or on the rear behind the power connector Figure 27 shows the possible locations of the DIP switches on the modules For more information about setting DIP switches refer to Chapter 8 Installing media bay modules on page 151 Figure 27 DIP switch positions on the modules DIP switches Top of module Rear of module P0607659 02 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware 93 Trunk media bay modules Table 6 DTM You install the trunk media bay modules in the BCM1000 or the BCM1000e Trunk media bay modules connect telecommunications lines to the Business Communications Manager hardware These are determined by e which lines are available from your telephone service provider e what lines you require for the types of telephones you want to use e budget considerations Table 6 lists the types of trunk media bay modules that are available for the Business Communications Manager system Trunk media bay modules Connects digital public switched Can connect to four types of lines TI Digital Trunk media bay module telephone lines to the Business NA PRI ETSI in UK only and Euro Communications Manager system PRI BRI Connects a maximum of four ISDN Note The DECT module contains the Basic Rate Interface media bay BRI interf
137. and Taiwan auxiliary ports also act as true auxiliary ports However the UK and Australia profile auxiliary port function is different In these profiles when the power is restored the Aux Port call is terminated and the line is available to system telephones BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide P0607659 02 BCM1000 BCM 3 5 addendum 21 Auxiliary equipment The BCM 3 5 software release also introduces support for some auxiliary equipment e A new telephone and add on module are being introduced to replace the M7324 CAP module as a Central Answering Position CAP A T7316E telephone connected to one or more Key Indicator Modules KIMs is still referred to as a CAP When it becomes an enhanced CAP eCAP the KIMs support line appearances multiple appearances of the same target line and hunt group appearances Refer to 773 16E Business Series Terminal and KIMs below e The BST Doorphone is installed outside exterior doors The device provides ringing at one or more system telephones and or an alerting tone through the paging feature Verbal communication can be initiated to the doorphone by dialing the doorphone DN from any system telephone Communication can be initiated from the doorphone by pressing the Call button to create a ring or an alert at the assigned internal telephone The voice path is created when the user at the internal telephone answers the call either by picking up the handset or pressing the Handsfree butt
138. annel Table 20 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the assigned lines and dialing numbers DNs for each DS30 channel Table 20 4X16 switch settings Select Select Enter these switch settings To assign And this DS30 DS30 channel channel offset 1 2 3 4 5 6 these lines and DNs range DS30 channel 3 237 252 DS30 channel 4 253 268 DS30 channel 5 269 284 DS30 channel 6 285 300 on on on on on on 0 211 214 on on on on on 219 222 2 ene 2 on on on on 227 230 3 on on on on 235 238 0 on on on on on 181 184 on on on on 1 189 192 CA m 2S O a 3 an TEESE SITAN A 205 208 0 on on on on on 151 154 on on on on 159 162 i m 2 u a l 3 2n EA an ea on 175 178 0 on on on on ce 121 124 on on on 129 132 BE 2S M 3 on 145 148 Custom DN Installation and Maintenance Guide 146 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches Table 20 4X16 switch settings Continued 91 94 99 102 107 110 115 118 Enter these switch settings P And this Custom DN these lines PS30 channel and and DNs 2 DS30 channel 7 301 316 Not supported P0607659 02 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches 147 ASM 8 switch settings Two ASM units can share a DS30 channel number Table 21 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and
139. any inductive load on the output e The page relay contacts connect to the tip and ring terminals of the jack The sleeve terminal of the jack connects to ground You must use a stereo plug to connect the page relay Connecting the paging system Install the external paging system using the installation instructions that came with the paging system 1 Connect the paging system audio input to the Page output on the MSC Refer to Figure 92 Figure 92 Audio input jack Audio input jack MSC faceplate Ring Tip go Sleeve 0 Tip Page signal O O Page output Ring Page signal O Sleeve Ground P0607659 02 Chapter 14 Installing optional telephony equipment 229 2 Connect the paging system relay to the Page relay output on the MSC Refer to Figure 93 Figure 93 Page relay jack Page relay jack MSC faceplate Ring Sleeve O Tip Page relay output O Page relay Ring Page relay output O Sleeve Ground O AN Warning The paging connections must not be connected to exposed plant Tip Paging tips Business Communications Manager external paging does not support talk back paging equipment unless you use an external line port The Business Communications Manager system provides paging over the telephone speakers when there is no external paging equipment External music source customer supplied You can use any approved low power device as a music source This wo
140. ard LAN and modem cards North America only All three types of cards are removed and replaced in the same manner the only difference being which PCI slot they are inserted into For a description of the function of each type of card on the BCM1000 refer to Data networking components on page 75 Figure 141 provides a general procedure for card replacement in the PCI slots of the BCM1000 Figure 141 Process Map Data card replacement If possible do a software shutdown Remove the card Install the new card in the same slot Set up unit for maintenance Remove the top and front covers Replace the header screw Remove the header screw securing the Restore unit to operation Check LEDs Installation and Maintenance Guide 282 Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware Removing a data card Five LEDs on the front of the BCM1000 indicate PCI card status LAN cards can be inserted any of the first three PCI slots Refer to Figure 142 Table 48 lists the various LED states Figure 142 shows the configuration for profile 1 Note that the WAN card is connected to the first two PCI LEDs Note There are four possible profiles for data card placement in the BCM1000 gt If the data card placement on your base unit differs ensure that you replace the cards in the same slots they were removed fr
141. as cocdiidia ee rhumaes cat cena meee ened 152 Installing a media bay module c4 a2 eca0e oceans cada reken Meee Se LRES BREE 153 Reconnecting the equipment 0 cee ee eee 155 Replacing media bay modules ac ase ee eae eed ed a ed eae 156 Installation replacement troubleshooting 0 0 0 157 Chapter 9 Staring Ihe System io ve eek eae ede Soest aerate See eek eeu ened 159 Che king power and WINN ice coil cece kei miekin deka decane etd eye 160 Checking system power and status 00 0 cece eee 161 Connecting the data networking hardware 00 eee eee eee eee 163 Beee a a e ov cctes ceawiveenessGare Sens seele Cerda wotea begs 163 Connecting wiring to the LAN card 2 0 cee eee eee eee 164 Connect wiring ta the WAN Gard 665 cca eee ede ee 164 Connect wiring to the modem card 0 cee ee ee ees 165 Replacing TIE cards 60444408059 0547 0848S oRdN oe od N Deedee EES 167 Setting initial system configurations 0 6 0 s 00s see eee eee eee 168 Required data parameters sic ceei aves saves cade evees teed donee aw awe 168 Da aun seule ssn te oak bebe elds Veh yea eA Aoieem eee 168 Connecting when there is an IP address conflict 00000 169 Using a null modem serial cable 2 000 e eee eee 169 Using an Ethernet crossover cable 0 00 e eee eee 172 Entering the software keycodes oc scceu sank d adGev eo See SdOGks Seeds Soke eees 173 Regener
142. at uses two B channels and a D channel 2B D ETSI BRI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute specification for BRI ISDN service baud rate A unit of measurement of data transmission speed Baud rate is approximately equivalent to Bits Per Second BPS Typical baud rates are 300 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 BIOS basic input output system A program contained in Read Only Memory ROM that acts as the interface between software programs and the computer hardware bit A bit is the smallest unit of information identified by the computer A bit has one of two values 0 or 1 to indicate off or on Bus A collection of communication lines that carry electronic signals between components in the system Call Forward A feature that forwards all the calls arriving at a telephone to another telephone in the system To have calls forwarded outside the system use Line Redirection Call Forward No Answer A feature that forwards all calls arriving at a telephone to another selected telephone in the system The system transfers the calls after a specific number of rings Assign Call Forward No Answer under Capabilities in System DNs programming Call Forward On Busy A feature that forwards all calls at a telephone to another selected telephone if the original telephone is busy Assign this feature under Capabilities in System DNs programming Call Forward Override An automatic system feature that allows the user to c
143. ates an exact data duplicate of the system hard disk on a second co located hard disk within the BCM1000 If one of the hard disks becomes inoperable the system continues with normal operation on the remaining disk You can then schedule disk replacement during normal maintenance periods This process does not replace your BRU backup disks which should still be run on a regular schedule and should be kept offsite The data backup and recovery process BRU are discussed in the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide Installation and Maintenance Guide 74 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager Telephony components The telephony components perform call processing by connecting the telephones or peripheral telephony equipment such as fax machines to the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN lines They also process telephony information that has been received through an IP link MSC The Media Services Card MSC is a PCI card which performs call processing and media processing of the voice channels The BCM100 MSC contains two PEC IIIs that provide voice channel processing for the MSC You can upgrade your system with two additional PEC IIIs Refer to Media Services Card on page 76 gt Note You can upgrade the PEC Is on your 2 0 BCM1000 to PEC IIIs You cannot mix PEC Is with PEC IIIs You must be running Business Communications Manager 2 5 software or greater to allow this
144. ating keys after system replacement 0000 0 00s 173 Chapter 10 Wiring the MOGUICS p cc sented ena ceed ocean nn eed awe ens banners 175 Module wiring WAIMNINGS cs ws cd cosa lwben coOea ewer dea Neuen rapas wanrni 176 Connecting media bay modules to Service Providers 00 005 177 Wiring media bay modules to internal connections 000 eee eee 179 FEM WING 02 ned oeeee he SEER eeit DERE ed EOE ERE ERE EE Ree ee ee Ree 182 Connecting the fiber Gables occ hake dau d sea hee FRc dee ee eE de abe E 183 Installation and Maintenance Guide 48 Contents Chapter 11 Installing telephones and peripherals 00 cece eee eens 185 System telephon sS cico ad os catove easy Roa oH Ed on Ae TERE 0 er dead ow es 185 Annaog terminal AOA shaies set scdoia teasseovesansddaaedaduiaracthas 185 Central Answering Position CAP ice secede veeee ee daeee te ewe dae eee 186 Telephone port and DN cross reference 00 cette eee eee ee 186 Installing an emergency telephone eee eee eee eee ees 187 installing IP telephones 5225554 ct0d 4o04Rbnrreans a9 sneha deraeydue bu ed 188 Installing radio based portable systems 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee ees 188 Companion portable system aaau aaaea eee eee 188 BEC Sy Stee 64 65 9G 06 8 h 9 Re 8 RES OS 84S OA AR Re Aan 189 T7406 Cordless SYSIOMS ssc s0ccooeee ee Geode En awe r erR MED ORR RE 190 Moving TIEOIRNES 3hc0 ccc ctrtann eed anh e ecte
145. ation 212 indoor omni directional external antenna installation 212 installation restrictions 211 installation strategy 208 Lightning surge protector 215 lightning surge protector 211 maximum length cable 216 omni directional 212 213 outdoor omni directional external antenna installation 213 passive 211 positioning 211 proprietary extension cable 207 RG 58A U coaxial cables 207 U S installation 208 antistatic grounding strap 60 237 API LAN CTE application TSP 82 application requirements 109 Installation and Maintenance Guide 332 Index applications features 80 ASM ASM 8 description DIP switch settings 139 147 DIP switch settings upgraded 2 5 system 35 DS30 channel hierarchy 136 DS30 channel requirements 34 117 hardware description 100 wiring chart 181 ASM 8 see ASM ATA2 analog device measurement from CO 219 analog device measurement to CO 219 analog loop resistance 224 configuration requirements 223 connecting 220 data communication 224 data transmission requirements 224 environmental requirements 217 extension DN number 222 external line assignment 224 FAX compatibility 224 insertion loss measurement 219 install data communication device 225 installing 185 maximum loss 218 modem compatibility 224 mounting on wall 221 overview power source 221 test 223 Tones On OFF 223 transmission rates 224 troubleshooting 235 Attendant Console 80 audio input jack 228 AudioConference
146. ations Manager memory 287 power LED 272 power supply 269 power supply switch 160 remove LAN card 282 removing cables 152 removing the cover 239 removing the front bezel 153 replacing memory 285 288 replacing the hard disk 243 restart 240 securing the power supply 271 BCMe1000 cable 120 check voltage 160 connect BCM1000 132 DS256 port 132 install in rack 129 install on a flat surface 132 installing media bay modules 151 mounting on the wall 131 overview 75 power supply 278 power supply switch 160 proximity to BCM1000 129 proximity to BCMe1000 129 redundant power supply 278 removing cables 152 removing the cover 239 removing the front bezel 153 restart 240 temperature LED fan 262 BNC connector 208 210 216 board wiring pinching warning 154 bracket hard disk 247 bracket terminal board 204 BRI DECT module settings 149 description 74 DIP switch settings 139 142 DS30 channel requirements 34 117 line types 302 network standards 5 wiring 177 wiring chart 178 BRIM S T 96 browser requirements 109 4X16 98 4X16 combination module 99 ASM analog station module 100 Attendant Console requires keycode 80 BCM1000 LEDs 79 BCM1000 overview 70 BCMe1000 overview 75 BRIM S TCUSDN trunk module 96 cable between 120 Call Center requires keycode 81 Call Detail Recording 81 checking the power 160 component diagram 71 72 connection points 78 CTM CTM8 Caller ID analog line 95 data networking components 7
147. b go back to return to the System Configuration Start Page screen after all network IP addresses are configured 14 Enter r to reboot the system and to apply the network IP address changes 15 Do one of the following e Run the Quick Start Wizard and manually reconfigure your system e Run the Quick Start Wizard to create the system parameters and defaults Then restore your system data from your backup disk e Restore system and data information from your backup disk Warning You can only perform a restore from a current backup disk that was backed up from the AN same software version as your system is currently running In this case if you do not have a backup that was run on a version 3 0 1 you need to manually reenter your data 16 Test your system for correct operations P0607659 02 BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide 32 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 1 addendum Product and documentation updates For the latest information about Business Communications Manager product and documentation updates access the Nortel Networks web site at the following URL http www nortelnetworks com support BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide P0607659 02 NORTEL Business Communications Manager 3 0 NETWORKS functional changes for BCM1000 BCM 3 0 program updates This document provides supplemental information about release 3 0 for systems using BCM1000s that has been upgraded from BCM 2 5 software This information
148. ble 33 compares the designated extension numbers on the Norstar and on the Business Communications Manager Table 33 Extension comparison chart Ports 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DS30 channel 2 FEM port 1 Norstar 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 BCM 225 226 227 228 221 222 223 224 233 234 235 236 229 230 231 232 DS30 channel 3 FEM port 2 Norstar 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 BCM 241 242 243 244 237 238 239 240 249 250 251 252 245 246 247 248 DS30 channel 4 FEM port 3 Norstar 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 BCM 257 258 259 260 253 254 255 256 265 266 267 268 261 262 263 264 Installation and Maintenance Guide 184 Chapter 10 Wiring the modules Table 33 Extension comparison chart Ports 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DS30 channel 5 FEM port 4 Norstar 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 BCM 273 274 275 276 269 270 271 272 281 282 283 284 277 278 279 280 DS30 channel 6 FEM port 5 Norstar 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 BCM 289 290 291 292 285 286 287 288 297 298 299 300 293 294 295 296 DS30
149. cate through a stationary base station which is wired to a digital station media bay module on the BCM1000 or BCM1000e Depending on your system configuration you can have up to 64 sets assigned to your system For installation instructions refer to Installing the Companion hardware on page 193 Provides two line display but no line memory or display buttons The handset accesses a restricted set of system features DECT region specific provides cordless access to the system through a DECT media bay module The cordless handsets can be twinned with a stationary set or configured to act as an independent set You can register up to 32 sets ona module Each Business Communications Manager system can support one DECT module Has display but no line display or memory buttons and has access to a restricted list of system features For base station installation and handset registration instructions refer to the DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide Norstar M7208 one line display eight memory buttons with indicators Norstar M7208N UK and Australia only same features Audio Conference Unit ACU provides large room audio conferencing The keypad provides many of the set features of the basic Norstar M series telephones without display or memory buttons This set comes with three microphones Installation instructions are provided by the vendor T7406 Cordless Telephone system provi
150. ce line before removing the single line telephone or the line drops Remove the single line telephone Measure the 1 kHz tone at the far end of the analog port which is where the analog loop ends and where the voice messaging device connects Note The tone must be greater than 10 dB for example 9 dB is acceptable gt For analog device to CO measurement To measure the insertion loss from the voice messaging device to the CO 1 Establish a connection to a silent termination on the CO service line with a single line telephone attached to the ATA 2 Make sure the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms by e replacing the single line telephone with the test set e using TRANSMIT 600 OHM HOLD mode on the test set Make sure the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the single line telephone or the line drops Remove the single line telephone Introduce a 1 kHz tone into the analog line at 10 dBm and measure the level at the CO exchange Note The difference in levels is the transmit loss and must be less than 10 dB for example 9 dB is acceptable Installation and Maintenance Guide 220 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters Connecting the ATA 2 After you have determined that the proper environment exists you can connect the ATA 2 to the line and set Refer to Figure 86 Figure 86 Single line telephone installation overview ATA 2 power c
151. changes to Complete It is safe to turn off the system Click the Done button 0 a oo oo Exit the Unified Manager 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 3 Ensure the cables connected to the front of the base unit and the expansion unit are clearly marked 4 Remove the cables from all the media bay modules and the MSC on the BCM1000 front panel and the BCM1000e if there is one 5 Disconnect the BCM1000 and BCM1000e power cords from the ac outlet P0607659 02 Chapter 8 Installing media bay modules 153 Installing a media bay module After the system is powered down you can install and remove media bay modules as required Follow these procedures to install a media bay module Reverse the procedure to remove modules 1 Ensure that the switches on the media bay module are set correctly For information about how to set the switches refer to Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches on page 135 In the case of FEM modules the switches activate the front ports Ensure that the switches accurately reflect the ports you require Refer to FEM switch settings on page 150 2 Remove the front bezel from the unit where you want to install or remove the module by grasping the edges and pulling forward Refer to Figure 53 Figure 53 Removing the front bezel BCM1000
152. channel 7 FEM port 6 Norstar 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 BCM 305 306 307 308 301 302 303 304 313 314 315 316 309 310 311 312 P0607659 02 185 Chapter 11 Installing telephones and peripherals You can add telephones and peripherals before or after you initialize your system Telephone configurations are determined by which station module you are using and what DS30 channel settings you chose for the module Refer to Chapter 2 Telephony hardware on page 89 Chapter 4 Selecting the media bay modules for your system on page 111 and Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches on page 135 The system creates default settings for the telephone DN records when it is first initialized The settings are based on which telephony profile you choose when you run the Quick Start Wizard To change these settings use the Unified Manager application System DNs headings Specific instructions for configuring telephone operation through the Unified Manager are contained in the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide Note Programming occurs on the set when the Business Communications Manager recognizes the set on the system System telephones The Business Communications Manager system supports a number of analog digital IP telephony and cordless telephones Refer
153. chines You require tone dialing to access the features that PBX systems can provide or to use another system remotely Redundant systems In terms of this product the BCM1000 and BCM1000e units can be installed with redundant power supplies and redundant fans Redundant power supplies provide two modules The system runs off of one of the modules If that module goes down then the second module takes over You can then remove the first module and replace it with a new module without turning off the system Quality of Service QoS On the Internet and in other networks QoS refers to guaranteed throughput level QoS allows a server to measure improve and to some level guarantee the transmission rates error rates and other data transmission characteristics QoS is critical for the continuous and real time transmission of video and multimedia information Q reference point signalling QSIG QSIG is an ETSI standard signalling for multi vendor peer to peer communications between PBXs and or central offices This is an International standard and not available in North America RAID board This is the board that controls the mirrored disk system It provides the controls that ensure that both hard disks are identical as well as the capability to stop the mirroring process Random Access Memory RAM Computer memory that stores data temporarily RAM stores the data used by the microprocessor because it executes instructions The cont
154. cond module works assume that the first module is defective and replace it with a new module If the O Power LED lights but the Status light does not light or continues to blink wait 10 minutes to allow for information download If the light continues to blink power down the system and check the DIP switch settings on the module This might also indicate a loose cable at the back of the media bay module housing If the LEDs are on solid but the module cannot communicate or be communicated with check the Unified Manager settings for the module For information about the LEDs on the BCM1000 refer to Table 25 on page 161 Installation and Maintenance Guide 158 Chapter 8 Installing media bay modules P0607659 02 159 Chapter 9 Starting the system The BCM1000 and BCM1000e are each powered through an ac outlet The voltage required depends on the geographical location of the units All systems are initially set at the factory based on the intended destination You must check that the voltage and wiring are correct for you system before you connect any of the units to the power source Incorrect power settings result in equipment damage Note Newer standard power supplies 2 5 hardware and all redundant power supplies can auto select voltage Ensure you are aware of what type of power supply your system has Read the following warnings You must protect yourself and the Business Communications Mana
155. configure the lines or sets associated with the module Refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide for steps about changing the default settings for each line loop P0607659 02 Chapter 10 Wiring the modules 179 Wiring media bay modules to internal connections After you have the trunk modules wired you can install the wiring to the station modules These are the modules which connect to the internal telephone sets All station module wiring uses 25 pair cable with a female amphenol connector at the media bay module end Note DSM 32 modules require two 25 pair cables Follow these steps to connect the wiring for the DSM 16 DSM 32 ASM 8 or 4X16 modules 1 Wire 16 wire pairs from the amphenol connector to the local connecting blocks so they connect to the 16 station sets you want connected to this module Use Table 31 and Figure 66 on page 180 Note Use 16 wire pairs from each connector for the DSM 32 Note If you are connecting an DSM 16 4X16 or DSM 32 use Table 31 on page 180 If you are connecting an ASM 8 use the Table 32 on page 181 For an overview of BIX wiring conventions refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 BIX Box Wiring Guide 2 Install the telephones and peripheral equipment wiring if new system a Attach the cables for the telephones to the connecting blocks b Install the telephones Each telephone comes with hardware installation instr
156. connections is broken down into four offset groups of four lines each Figure 38 Offsets are part of DS30 channel line groups Offsets Offset 0 o have Offset 1 1 DS30 channel li es Offset 2 16 lines eac Offset 3 P0607659 02 Chapter 4 Selecting the media bay modules for yoursystem 117 Determining module channel requirements Figure 39 shows how much of a DS30 channel each module requires Figure 39 Space requirements for media bay modules Trunks lines Stations extensions Combination and specialized media bay modules 1 DS30 Channel 1 DS30 Channel offset set to 0 offset set to 0 1 or 2 2 DS30 Channels J ASM8s offset set to O 1 2 or 3 1 DTM max of per DS30 2 per DS30 channel channel 4X16 1 offset of j _ 1 DS30 channel 1 DS30 Channel Tig H n offset set to 0 1 or 2 1 DS30 Channel m i u i ffset set to 0 ae 3 BRIs j g for telephone per DS30 and equipment channel 1 DSM 16 connections per DS30 channel acer or 3 10830 coennel es offset set to 0 4 CTMs 2 DS30 Channels I per DS30 offset set to 0 1 DECT channel per DS30 1DSM32 channel per 2 DS30 1 DECT per system channels 1 DS30 Channel offset set to 0 1 or 2 Note The FEM module requires a ae sala DS30 channel for each port that is MaX 9 active If all ports are active 2 offsets no other modules can be added to the 4 per DS30 system channel
157. connector on the BCM1000e eee eee 132 Figure 48 BCM1000 DS256 confection 2 22s ca0eaceees cease eetade ew sas 133 Figure 49 Assigning the modules to the DS30 channel hierarchy 137 Figure 50 How to use the configuration map 0 00 e eee eee 138 Installation and Maintenance Guide 54 Figures Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Switches on the media bay module 00 0 eee eeee 140 Process map Installing a media bay module 151 Removing the front bezel srsssrrrrsissisressurirni een 153 Identifying the media bay module latches 000 153 Warning of possible shorting issue on media bay modules 154 Process map Replacing a media bay module 156 LEDs confirm that BCM1000 is active 00 e eee eee 161 Locating the data cards on the BCM1000 04 163 Sella PMU ccc eaen boees Gaede bee Reese reDeeaoeeepRei gens 169 Man MEMU occ deceit aseetadeiGareidadetevees orietako Nt 171
158. cription 74 CTM CTM8 95 DTM 94 DTM description 74 rules for assigning 135 wiring 175 TSP overview 82 see LAN CTE twisted pair cable 120 two line display M7310N 104 M7316 104 M7324 103 M7324N 103 T7316 103 U UK profile P0607659 01 Index 347 GATM 16 Unified Manager configuring the PC 172 keycodes 173 PC requirements 109 uninterruptible power supply see UPS Universal Power Supply UPS 21 universal service code USOC 5 update power supply 272 upgrade mirrored system 252 upgraded system DSM double density settings 37 DSM single density settings 36 upgrading hard disk process 243 UPS RPI 193 US regulations FCC 7 user ID Hyperterminal 170 using your equipment 10 UTAM 203 206 V V 35 adapter cable wiring 166 V 90 modem data parameter 168 version 3 changes 33 version 3 0 1 changes 27 version 3 5 changes 15 voice applications 217 voice channels changing the channel split 114 Voice Manager 80 voice over IP 82 VoIP Gateway 82 12050 soft phone 82 IP telephone 82 103 188 voltage checking before startup 160 power supply switch 160 requirements 120 volume 230 W wall mounting bracket 131 wallboards Call Center Reporting 81 WAN media services card 75 network standards 5 required parameters 168 wiring 164 Warning symbol 59 weight installing on table 132 wide area network see WAN Windows XP 33 wire color 20 180 181 186 199 313 wire gauge surge
159. ct and Restore unit to remove failed operation fan Check fan LED Installation and Maintenance Guide 262 Chapter 18 Adding or replacing a cooling fan Troubleshooting fan operation There are two LEDs on the front of the BCM1000 and one on the front of the expansion cabinet that can be used to assess fan function Refer to Figure 120 Figure 120 Business Communications Manager operational LEDs O NORTEL ne ooo0o 8 8 eo E O O ro 990099 C ool OOO 000 gt 000 a e Jew eo Operation LEDs 00 0 Temperature Fan Table 46 describes the possible states of the fan and temperature LEDs Table 46 Fan and temperature LEDs on the server LED Label Description Green LED On Red LED On Only l Temperature Temperature is below threshold Temperature is in alarm status One of the problems could be that one of the fans has failed A Fans All installed fans are working There is a problem with a minimum of one fan Removing a fan from the BCM1000 The BCM1000 can have one or two fans If the BCM1000 has two fans before you shut down the system determine which fan has failed 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown com
160. d sews ca kwsoeeed cee emedeeee ween 59 TACNE 4 5 soho eos So 6545 5 te eo Ro ea Ue BE Oh aeRO ee ee 60 MOONS a0 Sa Reis a COuwa ees 24 SSS ESF25084 44 08s 4OR Rew RET TENREN PaweS 61 Related publications sciccccc0ds0 seen set enteewenneosaneeeriowstean awed 63 System documentation Map o 45 nse behets Se ek wae 63 M talalon documentan sac54G ted axe renee ieee eesedew conse 64 Operations documentali 3 x45 cad exedy se dh aS aoe Rees RANE Oe da ed aes 65 Call Management documentation 0 000 ee 66 Unified Manager and hardware maintenance documentation 67 How tet HEI 6 sce nteechd eo ee es eH EM ed DEED eee Rad Ra ee he aA 67 Presales Suppo IOAN c2eenen sud sear baenaaeareaawraeereaae ne 67 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 69 Business Communications Manager system components 2 05 69 Comp ter GOMPONGMIE csi exes se eadieee tee ei da PePaseeed Reker oo ei eee a 70 Hardware COnPONGING ccescdewi sear cee ceed cede ORE Cee eR RES 70 Telephony componeme ss eae de th ata a ha hel deen asso dena ea 74 Data networking componenis sc dinke deeha eas ately Fee enbe eens ay 75 Media NiC ONA oi do bete vai eveddiw ad be bad ood weed ewe ewes 76 MSC IP call processing hardware 00 cee eee eee eee a CONNGCHON POMS cas ccns cccer cect eehOr sews isr e EME Sem REE NIe ees 78 BOMIO0O LEDS 4 5 c0geus died shag vediatadede ed areeed da eii e e 79 Dis E e acess Ko
161. d the power cables to the BCM1000 6 Remove the power supply bracket screw Refer to Figure 130 Figure 130 Removing power supply bracket single power supply models Power supply bracket screw N Y NNN SAAN N WAYS RBIKS Y SSS XQ 7 Remove the power supply bracket P0607659 02 Chapter 19 Replacing a power supply 271 8 Remove the four power supply screws from the back of the BCM1000 Refer to Figure 131 Figure 131 Remove the power supply screws Version 2 0 hardware Removable label 9 Remove the power supply from the chassis Installing a standard power supply Follow these steps to install a standard power supply 1 N oF FB WO KD Check to see if the new power supply is an auto adjust power supply This means the power supply does not have voltage switch Otherwise set the switch to the same ac voltage as the power supply you removed Place the new power supply into the BCM1000 Align the screw holes in the housing with the screw holes in the base unit Secure the housing with screws Inside the unit reconnect the power supply cables Replace the cover Restore the unit to operation For details refer to Restarting the system on page 240 Installation and Maintenance Guide 272 Chapter 19 Replacing a power supply 8 Monitor the power LED Refer to
162. d trpia HODES ARES REESE RARE 190 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 2000 e eee eee eee eee 191 The Companion cordless System ci scscesncesca ceca deans dane taes anna ENa 191 Companion COMPONENE 25 00 sceericweisees Paces seeererwer a rer wane 192 Installing the Companion hardware 0 anaana eee eee ees 193 Installing a RPI for the base stations 05 0000es nee even ee ee eee 193 Mouniing tis RPI UMI ov as cceecs sete vees dee eod doe tedhendeehe es 194 Wiring ihe and connecting the RPI oi cnet ee isa heals 197 Installing Companion base stations 0 0 eee 203 Positioning a Companion base station 00200 eee 203 Attaching a Companion base station 2000 0c eee eee 204 Registering Companion telephones 0 0 0c cee eee eee eee 206 Resianing he SVS Aicck Uo ks hak eade raneh ukna ooh seg eed Mawes 206 Installing external antennas and lightning surge protection 207 Read before you install equipment 02 0 c eee eee ee 207 Installing antennas United States of America 04 208 Installing a lightning surge protector USA ce eee ee eee 209 Installing antennas Canada 2 3 ccs casee cere vena cetteensecees 211 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters 00 00 e eee eee eee 217 Before melallalion 2vcceiicbucnac it ennb nta diene de vees ake de aes 217 Environmental requirements 0 02
163. dels 00002 eee eeeeaes 294 Status of the replaced telephone 0 00 e eee eee eee eee 294 Appendix A System region attributes 0 eee eee 295 Core software and PeglonSc cc chai caeed pees se esdSe Kade seOE EKER ED ORE RE ROE 295 LSU RCH a scsi aimee sh at a a Be ae hgh a Ba RR ae RR a 296 eer Met as Ss Adem mate oka AEA ee Sead eck aan A chon eh deen 297 Companding law Dy region lt acear steeds s east s iano eets Gaede Cave Eee Rows 297 SON Me SeviGes lt 25 5138548 eae SHA SS SAE eo Roe oe 298 Mobility services by region u eye ngee ye dds doen e gee EQS 299 Media bay module availability by region 0 0 00 eee 299 Trunk availability Dy NEGION 26554 aes4ehas sana sagas eed sGb ede dende sade ened 300 BRland PRIMG Rae e oss vn ce padetat yee et Soe phe eee ees daxe was 302 Defining time zones by country and language 200 e eee eee ee 304 SSe a co van eduanwndent ia ta elie Gra eile neh Leas 304 Appendix B Media bay module combinations 0000 eee eee ee eee 309 Combining GTMS and 4X168 ss cscs cca es tee eters eee PME ER Ee RR EE 309 FUL Oa Oda rita E AEE ESENE 310 DECTEONDNIO S esia eaa E 311 Changing BOUCHE soar serier Rak RR EES ERLE OVE EERE SERRE ERE ees 312 MESON SOI tcvede Cee h hn hhh i eed Lenina a 312 wet DNeand PO NUMDOIS 2 s0 c6eeeetdedtiasetaded ieee sivedeeeenadd 313 COSSY os cider tose edu sba dasan cues enl ees aa 315 INDO cca chase nonce ene ht an kee cenc
164. densing Bridge taps Not allowed between the Business Communications Manager system loading coils and Business Communications Manager ATA2 Operating requirements The following are requirements for operating other analog or data communication devices Ringing signal North America 20 Hz 1Hz Frequency Voltage 80 V rms 10 Ringing signal Europe 25 Hz 1 Hz Frequency voltage 75 V rms 10 Ringer equivalence number 3 Battery feed voltage 48 V dc 10 Loop current 20 mA minimum FIC code OL13ABC Installation and Maintenance Guide 218 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters ATA 2 to Business Communications Manager 135 ohms maximum for example 800 m of system loop resistance cable only 0 5 mm wire or 2 600 ft of 24 AWG wire Analog loop resistance on terminal side for 1 300 ohms maximum for example 4 600 m of voice applications cable only 0 4 mm wire or 15 000 ft of 26 AWG wire Analog loop resistance on terminal for data 200 ohms maximum for example 730 m of applications cable only 0 4 mm wire side or 2 400 ft of 26 AWG wire Analog transmission parameters North American systems only The following are the required analog parameters for an ATA2 Input impedance at tip and ring 600 ohms Return loss gt 20 dB for 200 to 3 400 Hz when Network terminated with 600 ohms Insertion loss on an internal call ATA 2 to Business Communications Manager system loss 3 0 dB 0 5 dB Insertion loss on an
165. des cordless mobility in a small office environment Each base station supports three telephones Function is based on the T7316 M7310 telephone The base station connects to a digital station media bay module on the system Provides six memory buttons with indicators and a two line display with three display buttons For installation instructions refer to the T7406 Cordless Telephone Installation Guide Symbol NetVision and NetVision Data telephones H 323 based IP telephones provide eMobility access oo through a LAN WAN ae connection via a wireless S access point A display menu provides access to user and call feature Provides multi line display capability but no line memory or display buttons P0607659 02 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware 105 Accessories e Station auxiliary power supply SAPS e Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA 2 provides power for the Business converts digital signals to analog signals to Communications Manager central answering allow communication with analog devices such position CAP module Can also be used to as FAX machines modems and answering extend the loop length between a telephone or machines The ATA 2 supports a maximum terminal and the Business Communications transmission rate of 28 8 kbit s With a single Manager hardware from 1 000 to 2 600 feet You line telephone the
166. digital telephones and does not require a separate trunk module Refer to 4X16 media bay module on page 99 Figure 31 Faceplates of DSM 16 and DSM 32 Power LED Status LED Amphenol connector Power LED Status LED Amphenol connectors P0607659 02 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware 99 4X16 media bay module North American systems only The 4X16 provides both analog trunk connections and connections to digital telephones The module is a combination of a CTM media bay module with four analog lines and a DSM 16 digital telephone media bay module Each of the four ports supports Caller ID and disconnect supervision An auxiliary port beside Line 1 allows you to use an analog telephony device such as a modem fax or telephone to share the trunk Figure 32 shows a diagram of the 4X16 The 4X16 has one amphenol connector and five RJ11 connectors on the faceplate For details on the 4X16 wiring refer to Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters on page 217 Figure 32 Faceplate of 4X16 module LEDS connectors and jacks DSM16 amphenol connector Power LED Status LED Line 1 Aux Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 100 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware Analog Station media bay module North American systems only The Analog Station media bay module ASM 8 connects to eight analog telecommunication devices These devices can be standard analog
167. door omnidirectional external antenna Canada 214 Install the lightning surge protector Canada 215 Insertion loss from the CO to the single line telephone 218 Single line telephone installation overview 000 220 FIRS DUIS Gen cee Gea e PRL AGERT eG E T AT 220 PIRI Mee 1caccekade wake Khemeicehc ae Dice eRe meee 221 ATA 2 DOCK VIEW 64 20 60 5c4c8c28b00 terta KSEE EES KR eee REE Os 222 Data communication device installation overview 225 AUK NCA acicaevecepeeeeeesGere seb te sores pee eons 227 Audio INPUT JACK 22 cas aent s dois sees ae ewhsaeed dawid seed exes 228 P0607659 02 Figures 55 Figure 99 Page relay jak cx coed 060k oxee8e oek ao kek GGe Oks Kets Sobk See Es 229 Figure 94 MUSG On HOlG JACK nica ccdacteatieedasern tenecreteteseara we 230 Figure 95 SSM board Connections 2 okies a kh ba a ee Ae ag E 232 Figure 96 LED locations on the face of the BCM1000 233 Figure 97 System Status Monitor LED Display screen 004 233 Figure 98 System Status Monitor LED Settings record 4 234 Figure 99 Process Map Preparing the units for maintenance 237 Figure 100 Remove the tep COVEr 2 conc cide cea ee sedan ena cede enen ee oes 239 Figure 101 Removing the front bezel cc sc ckncee eee iasenewae aperire ens 240 Figure 102 Process map Hard disk replacement 200 eee eee eee 243 Figure
168. dules are the devices in the Business Communications Manager system that permit you to connect your extensions and the public switched telephone network PSTN lines to the call processing capabilities of the Business Communications Manager system A special media bay module called a Fiber expansion module FEM allows you to update from a Norstar system to a BCM1000 by reusing the Norstar expansion modules and the fiber cables to the modules When you order your Business Communications Manager system there are no media bay modules installed in the BCM1000 or the BCM1000e This configuration allows you to select the number and type of media bay modules that best meet your requirements If you have a large Business Communications Manager system there are some configuration restrictions that can apply to your system For information about these restrictions refer to Rules for assigning DS30 channels on page 135 Figure 36 Process for determining modules Determine trunk Determine which and extension DS30 channels requirements are available Determine DS30 channel requirements Set DIP switches on modules for each module bance Install modules into the Determine if any ihe Sea beved BCM1000 or BCM1000e The first step in selecting the media bay modules is to determine the number of extensions internal lines and PSTN lines trunk lines you have or need This determines how many m
169. e on page 172 After you set the initial parameters you can connect to the Unified Manager through the network to complete the system setup using the Quick Start Wizard If you do not have a network connection you can also access a Quick Start Wizard through a serial link For detailed information about configuring the BCM1000 using the Unified Manager refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide Using a null modem serial cable You must use a null modem cable connection to the BCM1000 if the default IP address is not compatible with your LAN or WAN network Required equipment e null modem cable e VT100 compatible terminal or a computer that has a terminal program such as Hyperterminal Warning Your terminal must be VT100 compatible and must support the VT 100 National Character set If the terminal does not support the National Character set the text displays incorrectly Setting up the null modem cable Table 30 shows the correct wiring for the BCM1000 serial port of the null modem cable Table 30 Serial port pinout 1 Data Carrier Detect DCD 6 Data Set Ready DSR a E 2 Serial data in RX 7 Request to Send RTS 3 Serial data out TX 8 Clear to Send CTS 4 Data Terminal Ready DTR 9 Ring Indicator RI 67 8 9 5 Ground required connections Transmission parameters Installation and Maintenance Guide 170 Chapter 9 Starting the system
170. e 107 on page 247 Note If you are replacing a failed disk on a mirrored disk system ensure the new disk is replaced in the same position in the bracket that the failed disk was removed from Figure 107 Installing two hard disks for a mirrored disk system Note space ey between hard disks gt qc B Za Mirrored hard disk Primary hard disk ee Installation and Maintenance Guide 248 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk 3 Place the hard disk assembly back into the BCM1000 a Align the holes in the brackets with the holes in the bottom of the inside of the BCM1000 b Fasten the hard disk bracket to the housing 4 Reconnect the drive s to the system Note All connectors have a notch that allow you to align the connectors correctly If you cannot push a connector in easily do not force it e Single hard disk Connect the power supply to the hard disk connector and the ribbon IDE cable from the controller to the hard disk e Mirrored hard disks a Reconnect the power cables as described below Warning Ensure that you connect the hard disk cables to the same hard disk from which AN they were disconnected Failure to do so may prevent the system from booting b Connect the Primary ribbon cable from the RAID board to the disk you removed it from If you are upgrading from a single disk system to a mirrored system this will be the disk on the bottom c Connect the M
171. e 239 3 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Remove the front cover Remove the screw that secures the header of the card to the BCM1000 housing Use both hands to carefully hold the card along the top and lift the card straight up and out of the unit Installing the card Follow these steps to replace the LAN WAN or modem cards 1 Insert the new card in the same PCI slot from which you removed the damaged card Refer to Figure 143 2 Fit the bottom tab of the board header into the opening below the card slot as you push the card down until it sits firmly in the connector on the motherboard Fasten the board to the housing with the header screw Replace the front cover Replace the top cover oo Ff Q Restore the BCM1000 to operation For details refer to Restarting the system on page 240 Figure 143 Install the LAN card q O O49 20005 ANR ANN NS Installation and Maintenance Guide 284 Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware Replacing PECs The 2 5 BCM1000 comes equipped with two processor expansion cards PEC IIs mounted on the media services card MSC These modules provide signal processing capabilities for such applications as voice mail and IP telephony applications If you plan to run a lot of IP telephones you may need to upgrade to four PEC IIs The 2 0 version of the BCM1000 co
172. e 28 DTM module LEDs and connectors front view 04 94 Figuie29 CTMand CIME LEDS and jaCkS cccicccesdediaweddenedieeat sand 96 Figure 30 BRI LEDS f0 PekS 0ceeenteeeeeirereee ee seedeerenear ences 96 Figure 31 Faceplates of DSM 16 and DSM 32 2 0 cece ee 98 Figure 32 Faceplate of 4X16 module LEDS connectors and jacks 99 Figure 33 ASM BS IoOntvViOW o2 0cke dutenian iak dakai E tinea urge 100 Figure 34 DECT faceplate with eight RJ45 connectors 000 101 Foure 35 FEMLEDS cress eek turr ae ode eins ods oeRss eas ds obese HOR 102 Figure 36 Process for determining modules 0 00 e cece eee eee 111 Figure 37 DS30 channel model 02 00 cera eee ee eee eee eee ee istess 115 Figure 38 Offsets are part of DS30 channel line groups 116 Figure 39 Space requirements for media bay modules 2 4 117 Figure 40 Attaching the rack mounting bracket to the BCM1000 123 Figure 41 Fasten the BCM1000 to the equipment rack 004 124 Figure 42 Attaching the mounting brackets to the BCM1000 126 Figure 43 Mount the BCM1000 on the wall 00 20 cee eee eee 127 Figure 44 Attach the rack mounting bracket to the BCM1000e 129 Figure 45 Fasten the BCM10006e to the equipment rack 05 130 Figure 46 Attaching the wall mounting bracket to the BCM1000e 131 Figure 47 DS256
173. e a DIMM when the DIMMs fails or when you want to increase the amount of RAM in the Business Communications Manager Note There must be at least one DIMM installed in the BCM1000 in order for the system to function 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shutting down the system software on page 238 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Set up the BCM1000 for maintenance as described in Shutting down the system hardware on page 239 3 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 4 Ensure access to the memory chips is clear of cables and other parts e Ifyou have a version 2 5 BCM1000 which has a System Status Monitor board attached to the front of the housing you may need to disconnect some of the cables to get at the memory slots e If you have a WAN card in the first PCI slot you may need to remove it to get adequate access Refer to Removing a data card on page 282 Note If you are adding a new DIMM to the second DIMM slot go to step 6 gt 5 Carefully push down on the fastening tabs on either side of the DIMM you want to remove As you press down on the fastening tabs the DIMM lifts out of the DIMM slot 6 Remove the DIMM from the slot by grasping either end as shown in Figure 145 Figure 147 Removing and replacing the DIMMs P0607659 02
174. e bee cee ee hed ee ee ee 331 Installation and Maintenance Guide 52 Contents P0607659 02 53 Figures Figure 11 Offsets are part of DS30 bus line groups 005 33 Figure 12 Space requirements for station media bay modules on a per DS30 configuration 34 Figure 13 Assigning double density modules to the DS30 bus hierarchy 35 Figure 14 Business Communications Manager core system components 69 Figure 15 External functional hardware BCM1000 200 eae 70 Figure 16 BCM1000 interior components for standard system pre 2 5 71 Figure 17 BCM1000 interior components with a standard power supply system 2 5 72 Figure 18 BCM1000 interior components redundant system with mirrored hard disks 2 5 72 Figure 19 MSC optional equipment ports 0 cee eee 76 Figure 20 BCM1000 external points of connection 0 008 78 Figure 21 BCMI000 operational LEDS is ccccgewce sea take ae tee dee es awa 79 Figure 22 DS256 connector on a BCM1000 anda BCM1000e 85 Figure 23 Installation and initialization overview 0 0 00 cee eee ee eee 86 Figure 24 Telephony hardware components 000 cece eee ees 89 Figure25 Mod le LED locations iccc tern cde rea ea casero wee deals 90 Figure 26 Rear of modules showing DS256 channel and power connectors 91 Figure 27 DIP switch positions on the modules 00 eee eae 92 Figur
175. e eee eee eee Ee dwt Ede Ree ded kee 6 Rights of the Telecommunications Company 0 00 eee eee eee eee 6 PODIS saenwiede dpndueehew uct ag aeauaees O4208 6 ERIT abt e CE SR Rte EGS 6 Canadian Regulations please read carefully 2000 cee eee eee 6 US Regulations please read carefully 0000 cece eee 7 Federal Communications Commission FCC Notice 7 EMVEMG FOG Partie artisan rest T IIA ASEA ASEE IS 9 Important Safety Instructions n srrrisrersnie tonne datke ina a 9 International Regulatory Information 00 0 cece eee 11 AAU E E E E E E aR dd He Ri A oh So dis RA a DPBS wd Raed aha aw oo Bale 11 Additonal Safety INIOMNSUGN 2disevecaedeio5eteerdeod en eaede seiner wads 13 Limied Warrenty cocuccctee eo ines FERED ER RED ERS EERE EES SEM ORS Lees See 13 CRO Nant Ao E Ce eee CLs tak I ee eee Redan weed 13 Warrenty Repair Sorvi S sss srrrerisgssniews stet kEDENSTANS NENEN 14 Anter Waranty SEIVIES siecrrsresrecitredtheswkted teri A irta srek 14 BCM 3 5 program updates ssaaaassnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 15 SRCUNMY Nange e Koike Let ed dete lORre test Siurde adres pedis arrinte aa 15 Now HARIWENS 26 0 cee eases ce eN ee SEE Ted ERR eH ERE nO REA eT OM RES 16 Global Analog Trunk Module GATM 2 220052 0600 cen deaebergeseae be cewa 16 GAIM Swifth Stings J ccc ieee en cee eubee ede eheteded dee Re bew ee eee 18 WG Wie AW srs k acts dee Celt as ORR ed 5 Hees SERA OWE Ee ees 19
176. e front of the controller Report menu item Status Screen Launches a new browser window that displays mirroring summary The summary shows which hard disks are installed where they are placed and which is the active hard disk Drive Status Displays status bar to indicate process of mirroring View Refresh Use this to update status screen Installation and Maintenance Guide 260 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk P0607659 02 261 Chapter 18 Adding or replacing a cooling fan Cooling fans circulate air through the chassis of the BCM1000 and expansion unit to prevent the components from overheating This chapter describes how to replace a cooling fan It also describes how to add a redundant fan to two versions of the base unit Note A redundant cooling fan is included in the kit when you add a redundant power supply to the server Figure 119 provides an overview of the fan replacement process Note BCM1000 version 2 5 hardware The cooling fan connections on the BCM1000 version 2 5 hardware connect to the system status module SSM Ensure that you follow the directions provided for this version of the hardware when reconnecting new fans Figure 119 Process Map Replacing a cooling fan FAN LED and or Temp LED indicate problem Install new fan Set up unit for Connect fan maintenance cables to power Disconne
177. e jack is not already installed in your location you can order one from your telephone company Order the appropriate USOC Network interface jack as specified in the installation instructions for wall mounted telephones or for desk table use In some states customers are permitted to install their own jacks Your telephone may not be connected to a party line or coin telephone line Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information It is no longer necessary to notify the Telephone Company of your phone s Registration and REN numbers However you must provide this information to the telephone company if they request it The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operation or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service Do not attempt to repair this equipment If you experience trouble write for warranty and repair information Nortel Networks 640 Massman Drive Nashville TN 37210 USA Ringer Equivalence Number The FCC Registration label on bottom of phone includes a Ringer Equivalence Number REN which is used to determine the number of devices you may connect to your phone line A high total REN may prevent phones
178. e label attached to the lower right corner of the mounting bracket record the port number used Include the marking information for all of the base stations on the completed installation floor plans 9 Slide the cover on the bracket using the guide to position it correctly Refer to Figure 77 10 Snap it into place Figure 77 Slide the cover on bracket Installation and Maintenance Guide 206 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system Registering Companion telephones To use Companion portable telephones you must first install radio base stations to transmit and receive radio signals to and from the portable telephones See Installing Companion base stations on page 203 You use a different method to install portable telephones than desktop telephones There are no direct connections between the portable telephones and the system Do the following e Install the batteries and battery charging units for each portable using the instructions that come with the portable e Enter the software keys for Companion in the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager under Software keys e Register every Companion portable for use with the system Note You must register a portable telephone before you can use it By default Companion portable telephones are not assigned extension numbers The range of portable extensions available for wireless registration is 565 to 596 Fo
179. e performed a Unified Manager shutdown The base unit cannot start operating again until after power has been disconnected and then reconnected 3 Ensure you have room to access the part you are working on Remove the base unit from the rack if necessary Removing the top cover from the unit You must remove the top cover to access any of the internal components of the BCM1000 1 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 2 Remove the two screws from the cover at the back of the unit 3 Lift the back of the cover and slide it back and up Refer to Figure 100 Figure 100 Remove the top cover e LS Lift cover at A rear of i server i Installation and Maintenance Guide 240 Chapter 16 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades Removing the front bezel The front bezel is a plastic cover installed on the front of the BCM1000 You must remove the bezel to add or remove the cards or the media bay modules Refer to Figure 101 1 To remove the front bezels Base unit Grasp the edge of the front bezel and pull it forward Expansion unit Push against the bottom of the bezel and then pull the bezel out from the top Figure 101 Removing the front bezel BCM1000 Grasp the edge of the front bezel and pull it forward
180. e personnel with the appropriate training and experience Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of working with telephony equipment and wiring They must have experience in techniques that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage Warning Leakage currents Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events on network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground via the power cord However if the ac power is unplugged prior to disconnecting the cables from the front of the base unit this hazard can occur System shutdown You must disconnect the media bay module cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet System startup You must reconnect the power cords to an grounded outlet before reconnecting the cables to the media bay modules h Danger Electrical shock hazards Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunications network and ac mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Business Communications Manager system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground In addition all unused slots must have blank faceplates installed The covers on all units must be in place at the completion of any servicing To connect the Global analog trunk module GATM to the network follow these steps
181. e rings the display shows Set lt nn gt calling The number that appears on the display is the ATA 2 extension number Record the extension number Note The Automatic Set Relocation feature works with ATA 2 gt P0607659 02 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters 223 Configuring the ATA 2 Configure the ATA 2 using Business Communications Manager Unified Manager For detailed information about using Unified Manager refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide 1 Open the Unified Manager 2 Assign the following line features to the ATA 2 e assign one external line to the telephone e set ringing for this line ON or OFF as required e assign one intercom line e assign Held Line Reminder to ON e disable Full Handsfree e disable Handsfree Answerback e disable Paging Reception 3 Assign an external line an intercom line or a line pool as the Prime Line for the ATA 2 Note Direct access to a CO line for modems fax machines and credit card verification machines is possible using the Hotline feature For direct access to a CO line program an external line as the Hotline Enter a pause to replace the telephone number for the Hotline F78 Exit the Unified Manager Set the ATA 2 to Tones ON when you are assigning an analog voice device Set the ATA 2 to Tones OFF when you are assigning a data communication device For details refer to the Business Communications M
182. e startup Auto Sa eee enone oestetenientententententententententententententen Motherboard SH815 PCI Cards MSC ZX Empty LAN LAN MSCVersion 36CJB19 ean eee Hake a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M 7ff 3 Enter 1 Initialize Universal Profile and press lt ENTER gt The MSC Initialization menu screen appears after about a minute Refer to Figure 10 Figure 10 MSC Initialization Menu screen MSC Initialization Henu 1 Select Etiquette MSC load 2 Select CT2Plus WSC load 3 Select E1 HSC load 4 Select E1 Global HSC load 5 Select E1 CALA load 6 Do not select any load 7 Platform Initialization Menu M Return to Hain Henu atolls eee inteateteteeeietentententententententententententententententetetanten Product Version BCH466 Release 3 0 Version RC 2 2 Issue 4 amet et MMMM Initialization InProgress Configuration Valid Service startup Manual f Motherboard SH815 PCI Cards MSC WAN Empty LAN LAN MSCVersion 36CKC66 k Hake a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M 7j 4 Enter the number beside the upload for the software you want to install If you do not know which software to upload refer to Core software and regions on page 295 5 The system automatically reboots as part of the initialization process When the system reboots the telnet session disconnects Note If there is a modem the system reboots four times
183. e that both the GATM4 and the GATM8 have only one amphenol connector The firmware differentiates how many lines the connector supports Power LED Status LED Amphenol connector There are two models of GATM GATM 4 The GATM4 provides connections for four analog calling line identification CLID or Supervision Disconnect PSTN lines Each voice line uses one line in the DS30 bus offset Since each DS30 channel has four lines per offset you can assign a maximum of four GATM4s to a single DS30 bus by making the offset switch settings different for each module GATM 8 The GATM 8 provides connections for eight analog calling line identification CLID or Supervision Disconnect PSTN lines Each line uses one line in the DS30 bus offset Since each DS30 bus has four lines per offset you require two offsets for each GATM8 You can assign a maximum of two GATM 8s to a DS30 bus by making the offset switch settings different for each module You can also combine a GATM 8 with a 4X16 module on the same DS30 number When you choose an offset number for the GATM 8 the system automatically adds the next offset number You cannot assign offset 3 to the GATM 8 module because this does not allow the module to assign the second set of lines The following figure graphically shows how you can allocate the GATM modules over a DS30 bus One DS30 Bus One DS30 Bus Combined allocation Combined allocation with 4X16 offset 0 1 2 or 3 offset set to 0 1
184. e the ports where there are telephones installed Note The following table is based on a system with three digit DNs with a start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs the system automatically adds a 2 for each additional DN length unit i e 221 becomes 2221 Appendix B Media bay module combinations on page 309 contains a blank table to use if you changed the start DN on your system Table 34 Cross referencing ports and DNs DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 channel channel channel channel channel channel Pin Wire color 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 White Blue DN 221 DN 237 DN 253 DN 269 DN 285 DN 301 1 Blue White Port 201 Port 301 Port 401 Port 501 Port 601 Port 701 27 White Orange DN 222 DN 238 DN 254 DN 270 DN 286 DN 302 2 Orange White Port 202 Port 302 Port 402 Port 502 Port 602 Port 702 28 White Green DN 223 DN 239 DN 255 DN 271 DN 287 DN 303 3 Green White Port 203 Port 303 Port 403 Port 503 Port 603 Port 703 29 White Brown DN 224 DN 240 DN 256 DN 272 DN 288 DN 304 4 Brown White Port 204 Port 304 Port 404 Port 504 Port 604 Port 704 30 White Slate DN 225 DN 241 DN 257 DN 273 DN 289 DN 305 5 Slate White Port 205 Port 305 Port 405 Port 505 Port 605 Port 705 31 Red Blue DN 226 DN 242 DN 258 DN 274 DN 290 DN 306 6 Blue Red Port 206 Port 306 Port 406 Port 506 Port 606 Port 706 32 Red Orange DN 227 DN 243 DN 259 DN 275 DN 291 DN
185. e transmitted to the modem at 56 kbit s and transmitted from the modem at 33 kbit s Voice Message Center If you have subscribed to Call Display services you can receive visual Voice Message Waiting Indication on a display telephone If you have Voice Message Waiting Indication you can program the telephone numbers required to access a maximum of five external voice message centers You can program which of the five centers is to be accessed by each specific line Voice over IP VoIP The capability to deliver voice using the Internet Protocol In general this means sending voice information in digital form in discrete packets rather than in the traditional circuit committed protocols of the public switched telephone network PSTN Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ WFQ is a queuing method that allows low volume traffic such as Telnet to be given priority Interactive traffic receives higher priority than batch transfers Wide Area Network WAN A collection of computers or Business Communications Managers connected or networked to each other over long distances normally using common carrier facilities Installation and Maintenance Guide 330 Glossary P0607659 01 331 Index Numerics 10 100 Base T network interface card 172 16 wire pairs 179 2 6 channel split 114 25 pair cable amphenol connector cable 122 179 wiring guides 175 4X16 channel requirements 117 combination module station component 98 combin
186. each region Table 52 Companding law Companding Law p law A law Caribbean Australia Hong Kong CALA North American Denmark Taiwan France Germany Global Holland Italy Norway PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom Installation and Maintenance Guide 298 Appendix A System region attributes ISDN line services Table 53 shows the ISDN private network services that are supported by the Business Communications Manager Table 54 shows the network based ISDN supplementary services and the features available for each Table 53 ISDN line services MCDN over PRI SL 1 DPNSS DASS2 ETSI QSIG Basic Call Basic Call Basic Call Basic Call DDI DDI DDI DDI Name display Diversion Originating line identity OLI Name display Number display Redirection Terminating Line Identity TLI Number display Centralized voice mail Centralized voice mail Call Charge Indication CCl Camp on Call Offer Call Charge Rate Indication CCRD ISDN Call Connection Limit Loop avoidance Network Call Transfer Executive Intrusion Break in Three Party Trunk Route Optimization TRO Route Optimization Trunk Anti Tromboning Table 54 ISDN services by Protocol Protocol Available ISDN services NI Basic Call Caribbean North America DID Name display Number display ONN blocking ETSI Euro Basic Call Australia CALA Denmark France DDI Germany Global
187. ectors 198 input wiring 199 installation 193 maximum cable 197 mounting 194 opening 195 output connectors 198 overheating 194 power supply 194 requirements 194 RPI 16 BIX UL 194 RPI 16 BIX wiring chart 201 RPI 8 BIX UL 194 RPI 8 BIX wiring chart 199 turn off before connecting 204 ventilation 194 wiring 197 input connections 198 output connections 198 wiring charts 199 rubber foot attaching 128 132 S safety extra low voltage SELV barrier 178 external equipment 76 safety instructions 9 SAPS 120 security changes BCM 3 5 15 security code keycode 173 selecting media bay modules 111 P0607659 01 Index 345 serial data in out 169 service order code SOC 5 service provider disable internal CSU trunk wiring 177 sets per line 8 shock warning 244 shutdown protocol 164 remove cables 239 shock warning 244 signal ground 166 167 signal ground common return 165 software Attendant Console 80 features 80 restart 241 TSP 82 South America supported languages 296 space requirements 119 specifications system standards 11 SSH 15 SSM board 263 standard power supply 269 start DN 136 startup monitor LEDs 155 restarting after shutdown 239 system 155 Station Auxiliary Power Supply see SAPS station media bay module 4X16 combination module 99 ASM and ASM 8 modules 100 DSM 16 and DSM 32 98 station module amphenol connector 179 wiring 179 station modules ASM switch settings 147 ASM switc
188. ed This can include specific languages and a specific order in which the languages are set as default language 1 whether Companion or DECT mobility will be allowed and what type of trunks can be used Core software and regions Each Region setting requires a specific core software to perform correctly Table 49 shows the core software available Table 49 Core software defined by region and carrier profile Core Software Carrier s w ID T1 CT2 Plus T1 Etiquette E1 Euro E1 Global E1 CALA Region Caribbean Caribbean Denmark Australia Australia Hong Kong Hong Kong France CALA CALA North American North American Germany Global Global Taiwan Taiwan Holland PRC PRC Italy Norway Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom South American and Central American countries are assigned to regions in the following way e Caribbean includes Antigua Bahamas Barbados Bermuda Cayman Islands Dominican Republic Jamaica USVI Puerto Rico and Trinidad e CALA refers to all other Caribbean and Latin American countries with European based standards Installation and Maintenance Guide 296 Appendix A System region attributes Languages Table 50 lists the languages available for each region and a specific order in which the languages are set as default Table 50 Languages Region Language CALA Caribbean Hong Kong North American PRC Taiwan NA English NA French NA Spanish
189. ed in the same sequence as the 35 Red Slate X10 10 26 first one 10 Slate Red X10 10 26 36 Black Blue X11 11 27 11 Blue Black X11 11 27 37 Black Orange X12 12 28 12 Orange Black X12 12 28 38 Black Green X13 13 29 13 Green Black X13 13 29 39 Black Brown X14 14 30 14 Brown Black X14 14 30 40 Black Slate X15 15 31 15 Slate Black X15 15 31 P0607659 02 Chapter 10 Wiring the modules 181 Table 31 DSM wiring chart Continued Sets Sets Pin Wire color Port 1st 2nd 41 Yellow Blue X16 16 32 16 Blue Yellow X16 16 32 42 40 noconnections 17 25 Table 32 and Figure 67 provide the wiring scheme for the eight pairs that connect to the ASM 3 Plug the female amphenol connector into the interface on the front of the module Table 32 ASM wiring chart Pin Wire color Port Set Figure 67 Wiring foran ASM 8 26 White Blue X01 1 1 Blue White X01 1 27 White Orange X02 2 2 Orange White X02 2 a 28 White Green X03 3 connector 3 Green White X03 3 29 White Brown X04 4 4 Brown White X04 4 30 White Slate X05 5 5 Slate White X05 5 31 Red Blue X06 6 6 Blue Red X06 6 32 Red Orange X07 7 7 Orange Red X07 7 33 Red Green X08 8 8 Green Red X08 8 34 50 no connection 9 25 Note Refer to Line and extension numbers for specific modules on page 141 to see the relationship between the DS30 channel number and the DNs Configuration information is i
190. ed to as a 500 2500 telephone Ethernet A local area network that networks computers with coaxial cable or twisted pair wiring This protocol makes use of Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detect CSMA CD LAN to allow computers such as the Business Communications Manager to listen for pauses before they communicate Installation and Maintenance Guide 320 Glossary event message These are messages generated by the system to record activity The messages are written to the system log external call A call to or from a destination outside the Business Communications Manager system external line A line assigned to a telephone that allows calls to the PSTN external paging A feature that allows voice announcements over an externally installed loudspeaker connected to the Business Communications Manager The external speaker is not an Business Communications Manager component FAX FAX works with Business Communications Manager Voice Messaging FAX allows a caller to send a fax document to a voice mailbox feature code A unique code used to access Business Communications Manager features and options on the telephones filtering Filtering is the process of examining a data packet on the network to determine the destination of the data and whether the packet gets passed along on the local LAN copied to another LAN or dropped frame relay A frame relay is a high speed packet switching WAN protocol de
191. edia bay modules you require and what type of modules you require These following sections describe how to determine which modules and how many you require for your system After you determine which modules you want to use you must ensure they fit into the available system resources These sections describe how the modules work within the available DS30 channels of the Business Communications Manager Installation and Maintenance Guide 112 Chapter 4 Selecting the media bay modules for your system Selecting the trunk media bay modules The number and type of lines coming into your system determine which trunk media bay modules and how many modules you require to support your needs Trunk lines come from either the public network PSTN or they support connections in a private network If you are setting up an entirely new system a site survey must be done to determine your current and future needs We recommend that you do the survey before you order any modules Note If you plan to add any lines in the near future include them in your initial estimates gt To select the trunk media bay modules 1 Record the number of each type of line you have in Table 10 If you do not know the number or type of lines you have contact your service provider 2 Use the number of lines and the number of lines per module to determine how many modules you need Table 10 Determining trunk module requirements Type of media bay
192. ee eee 230 External music source programming lt 10 224004sa8seduae eu eidaanerads 230 Chapter 15 WOUBIGSNGOUNG oss coscc set cdutevcudubadeceeeeseteesteswasawe 231 Using the System Status Monitor to monitor LEDs 2200055 232 Emergency telephone does not function 0 0 eee eee ees 234 ATA 2 does NOU IUNCUON oc cine orcs raed tenngeraassGadecaevetabdendaeeoas 235 CCRC hE VAN oe badd Oe dan aoe be Ra beeen oben 235 Checking for dialtone at the ATA 2 0 00 cee ee 236 Checking for trunk line dial tone to the ATA 2 20 cee ee 236 Chapter 16 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 5 237 Special tools iccccctccavee hietortendrmies sod ee ane bee ESTRAS Er Se eae 237 Shutting down the system software 0 0 cece eee 238 Shutting down the system hardware o c cadisciant cadesiebseudsne pane riai 239 Removing the top cover from the unit 0 0 cee eee eee eee 239 Removing the front bezel cue c coger uee Laat mek Ie begs CRN eee 240 Restarting Wie SYSIGN ki sasc ceeded onera tott dO PE Od ET OhS Gawd Ge deeEeane 240 Restoring the system to operation 0 00 cece eee eee 240 PONG TORU s 0 5s ambien S NLA T Adie dei A ele Rage he ad 241 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk cee acersd des enseeeeraeseaceeseraeaws 243 Removing the bard GEK 4 44548 04448404 e684 ote Wa oo ad Seah ORs 244 mstalling a new hard disk surg kiddune Hedda eee deus eek heme Res 247 Initiali
193. een a Personal Computer PC a telephone and the Business Communications Manager server that allows third party software to function on PCs on the same network as the Business Communications Manager This allows customized solutions for such applications as hotel motel packages or text messaging programs TSP version 2 0 systems only requires keycode supplies the interface between the Business Communications Manager system and Microsoft TAPI This interface allows you to use TAPI applications on the Business Communications Manager system P0607659 02 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 83 Multimedia Call Center Setup and Operation Guide and Multimedia Call Center Web Developers Guide Nortel Networks Multimedia Call Center requires keycode allows call agents and users to interact through either or both a telephone connection and an IP connection This allows the conversation to occur over the voice connection or through text chatting Further this application allows exchange and viewing of web pages and allows the attendant to show the client screen captures Personal Call Manager User Guide Personal Call Manager a TAPI based application provides a graphical interface that allows you to use your computer to manage your calls and address book while still using your telephone for voice communication Note This application also requires a LAN CTE client licence T7406 Cordless Telephone Installat
194. egion Available Companion Companion CT2 Plus Mobility service CT2 Plus Etiquette Companion CT2 Plus Etiquette DECT DECT Region Caribbean CALA Taiwan Australia Hong Kong Brazil Denmark North American France PRC Germany Global Holland Italy Norway Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom Some of the media bay modules are customized for a specific type of line and are not available to all regions The following table lists a cross reference between regions and modules Table 9 Module availability by profile Region DSM ASM CTM 4X16 GATM BRI DTM DECT Australia X X X xX xX Brazil xX X Xx X X Caribbean X X Xx X Xx CALA X X X X X Denmark Xx xX xX xX France xX X xX X Germany X X Xx Xx Global X X X X X X Holland X Xx xX X Hong Kong X X X X X X Italy X Xx Xx Xx North American X X X X X X X Norway X X X X PRC X X X X Xx Spain X X Xx Xx Sweden X X X X Switzerland X xX xX xX Taiwan xX X Xx X X Xx X United Kingdom X Xx X xX xX P0607659 02 BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide 26 BCM1000 BCM 3 5 addendum Table 10 PRI line protocol supported by region Region BRIT side BRI S side PRI T1 Australia ISDN ETSI 300 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 403 DPNSS MCDN ISDN ETSI 300 403 ETSI QSIG 300 239 Brazil ISDN ETSI 300 ISDN ETSI 300 102 ETSI QSIG 300 239
195. elephones Delayed Ring Transfer DRT to prime This feature allows the system to transfer unanswered calls on external line to the prime telephone related to the called set The number of rings can be adjusted Activate this feature under Feature settings in System programming dial up connection A dial up connection is a temporary connection between computers This connection is established over an analog or digital telephone line dialing restriction Restrictions are numbers you cannot dial when the dialing filter with those numbers is in effect Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS DPNSS is a networking protocol that provides operators with access to Enterprise Edge features over multiple combined networks Corporate offices separated geographically can be linked over DPNSS to other Enterprise Edge systems bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be connected This allows connected Enterprise Edge systems to function like a private network DPNSS is available for International systems only directory number DN A unique number that the Business Communications Manager system assigns to every telephone or data terminal P0607659 01 Glossary 319 disconnect supervision A feature that enables the system to detect if an external caller hangs up Enable Disconnect Supervision under Trunk Line data in Lines programming disk mirroring The Business Communications Manager supports the
196. ents of RAM are erased when you restart or turn off the Business Communications Manager Remote access The ability to dial into an Business Communications Manager system from outside the system and use selected features The Class of Service determines which lines features and dialing capabilities are available P0607659 01 Glossary 327 Restriction filter Restriction filters prevent selected telephone numbers or feature codes from being dialed Restriction filters can be applied to lines sets specific lines on a set and to Class of Service passwords Read Only Memory ROM Memory that stores data permanently ROM contains instructions that the Business Communications Manager needs to operate The instructions stored in ROM are used by the Business Communications Manager each time it is turned on or restarted Router A device that forwards traffic between networks based on network layer information and routing tables A router decides which path network traffic follows using routing protocols to gain information about the network and algorithms to choose the best route based on a routing matrix Routing The path a message takes from its origin to its destination on a network or the Internet Serial port A port that sends and receives data one bit at a time Software keycode Refer to Keycode static IP address A static or fixed IP address that is permanently assigned to a computer Station Auxiliary
197. enu 1 Platform Initialization Menu 2 System Configuration 3 Configuration Wizard 4 Media Services Card System ID 5 Diagnostics 6 System Status Monitor 7 Command line 8 Restart the system X Exit nn MMMM Product Version BCM1000 Release 3 6 Version RC 2 6 Issue 1 Initialization Pending Configuration Valid Service startup Manual nn MMM MMMM Motherboard TBD PCI Cards MSC Empty Modem LAN LAN MSCUersion ae ee eee eee ieee tenant tentententententententeeenentententententen Hake a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X 7ff 5 Select1 Platform Initialization Menu and press lt ENTER gt The screen shown in Figure 2 appears Figure 2 Platform Initialization Menu screen Platform Initialization Menu 1 Initialize Menu 2 Upload an Etiquette core load to the MSC 3 Upload an CT2 Plus core load to the HSC 4 Upload an E1 core load to the MSC 5 Upload an E1 Global core load to the HSC 6 Upload an E1 CALA core load to the MSC 7 Toggle the automatic MSC upload Enabled 8 Selection not available no SSM firmware on BCH466 HM Main Menu 4 MMMM MMMM MMMM MMMM MMM MMMM MMMM Product Version BCM1000 Release 3 0 Version RC 2 0 Issue 1 4 Initialization Complete Configuration Valid Service startup Auto Motherboard
198. er Reporting requires keycode 81 Call Detail Recording 81 call icons T7316E and KIM 22 call information recording 81 call management Attendant Console 80 call statistics Clarify Call Center Reporting 81 Caller ID by region 297 CTM description 74 internal lines 97 caller directed transfer Call Center 81 CallPilot Manager 80 CallPilot regions 24 Canadian Regulations 6 cannot connect to network 172 CAP International only 103 installing 186 M7324 103 North America only 103 SAPS cable 105 T7316E plus KIM 21 CAPN module M7324N 103 Caution symbol 59 cells Companion 105 Central America supported languages 296 Central Answering Position see CAP and CAPN channel service unit see CSU channel split Companion 136 192 channel splits 114 chassis ground 165 167 CLCI CIR frame relay 168 clear to send 165 166 167 169 clearances Companion base station 204 CLID 4X16 module 74 CTM module 74 GATM description 17 clock battery installing 291 removing 290 coaxial cable 207 211 216 coin cell battery 3v Maxell CR2032 289 companding laws by region 24 297 Companion administration maintenance tools 192 base station 105 192 203 205 base station authorization software 80 base station positioning 203 C3050 CT2Plus 192 C3050 Etiquette 192 C3060 192 channel split limitations 136 192 coverage area maximum 192 diagnostic software 192 DS30 channels 136 equipment supported 122 Etiquette C3050 CT2 105
199. ere your telco demarcation point is located Use a qualified technical professional to ensure the cable wiring and your interior telephone wiring are correct e Trunk modules DECT base stations and FEM cables are connected using RJ type jacks These cables can be supplied by qualified technical personnel to ensure the correct pin out A Warning Use only qualified persons to service the system The installation and service of this unit must be performed by service personnel with the appropriate training and experience Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of working with telephony equipment and wiring They must have experience in techniques that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage Warning Leakage currents Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events on network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground via the power cord However if the ac power is unplugged prior to disconnecting the cables from the front of the base unit this hazard can occur System shutdown You must disconnect the media bay module cables network connections and MSC auxiliary equipment connections from the system before disconnecting the power cord from an earthed outlet System startup You must reconnect the power cords to an earthed outlet before reconnecting the cables to the media bay m
200. et them for single density refer to the following table To set them to double density refer to the table under DSM16 and DSM 32 double density switch settings upgraded system on page 37 Note that Companion sets can only be assigned on DS30 06 and 07 which have single density DSM modules Companion handsets have a different set of default DNs than the digital sets Also Companion can only be deployed on systems that remain at Part Double Density PDD the default condition of 3 0 systems Table 2 DSM 16 DSM 16 and DSM 32 DSM32 single density switch settings for 2 5 systems upgraded to 3 0 Select Enter these switch To assign DS30 settings these DNs To assign these DNs to DSM 32 or To assign these DNs b to DSM16 or DSM 32 to Companion ums 1 2 3 4 5 6 DSM 16 02 jon on on on on on 221 236 221 252 DS30 02 and 03 03 jon on on 237 252 237 268 DS30 03 and 04 N A 04 jon on on 253 268 253 284 DS30 04 and 05 05 jon on on 269 284 269 300 DS30 05 and 06 06 jon on on 285 300 285 316 DS30 06 and 07 3565 580 PDD only 207 Jon on on 301 316 N A 3581 596 PDD only Installation and Maintenance Guide P0607659 02 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 addendum 37 Table 2 DSM 16 DSM 16 and DSM 32 DSM32 single density switch settings for 2 5 systems upgraded to 3 0 1 The extensions listed are based ona three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your sy
201. external antenna 208 213 handset overview 104 indoor antenna 212 install base station 204 installation process overview 87 lightning surge arrestor 208 209 lightning surge arrestor install 215 minimum distance base station 203 portable telephone registration 206 powering up base station 206 register handset 206 RPI 193 software 80 192 supporting regions 25 299 UTAM approval 203 P0607659 01 Index 335 UTAM messages 206 Companion 3020 192 Companion Base Station see base station components hardware 70 RPI 196 telephony 74 computer requirements 109 configuration ATA2 223 null modem cable 169 connecting fan 263 hard disk 248 LAN card 164 modem card 165 network 163 WAN card 164 controlled shutdown 238 conventions text 60 cooling fan 261 copyright music source 6 cordless T7406 104 cordless handsets 149 188 cordless telephones Companion overview 104 DECT overview 104 NetVision IP telephones 104 country select GATM 18 coverplate removing 240 coverplate see front bezel CR2032 3v Maxell coin cell battery 289 CSU disable CTM 4X16 combination module 99 4X16 settings 145 auxiliary jack 177 DIP switch settings 139 143 DS30 channel requirements 117 DS30 requirements 34 network standards 5 overview 95 wiring chart 177 CTM switch settings 38 CTM description of module 74 CTM68 switch settings 38 CTM8 description of module 74 D Danger symbol 59 data applications 217 data car
202. f shock Read and follow installation instructions carefully Ensure the Business Communications Manager base unit and Business Communications Manager expansion unit are unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening the Business Communications Manager base unit or Business Communications Manager expansion unit If installation of additional hardware and or servicing is required disconnect all telephone cable connections prior to unplugging the Business Communications Manager Ensure the switch located on the back of the housing on the power supply is set to the correct input voltage 115 or 230 Ensure the Business Communications Manager base unit and Business Communications Manager expansion unit are plugged into the wall socket using a three prong power cable before any telephone cables are connected Caution Only qualified persons should service the system The installation and servicing of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Business Communications Manager system must be connected to an outlet with a th
203. feel any resistance as you slide the module into the housing carefully remove the module and check the wiring at the rear of the module again Refer to step 5 The wires that connect the media bay module daughter board to the module can become pinched between the module and the BCM1000 media bay if you insert the modules off the straight or with too much force This will cause a short in the equipment and could prevent the Business Communications Manager from restarting Refer to step 5 Note Some modules such as the DECT module do not have this wiring configuration However it is still important that you insert modules carefully and squarely into the housing to ensure that the power connector on the module correctly and securely connects to the backplane of the media bay 8 Refer to Reconnecting the equipment on page 155 to restore the system to operation Installation replacement troubleshooting The Business Communications Manager media bay modules are working when both the Ci Power and Status LEDs on the modules are on solid If the O Power LED does not light refer to Shutting down the system on page 152 After the BCM1000 is correctly shut down remove the module and check the connectors at the back of the module for dirt or loose connections After you reinstall the module if the LED still does not light install a different module into that bay to check for a possible fault in the backplate If the se
204. for Denmark Holland and Sweden are the same as the Global region except for the default to local languages and local tones and cadences e The Region for the Caribbean is the same as the North American region except that it supports the M7000 telephone e The Region for CALA is the same as the Caribbean region except NI ISDN is replaced by ETSI ISDN u law e The Region for Europe is the same as the United Kingdom region except there are no default dialing restrictions and ATA parameters are set to European values P0607659 01 Appendix A System region attributes 305 Table 61 Region defaults Functionality Attribute North American Global United Kingdom Direct Dial Access code 0 0 0 DTMF parameters Tone duration 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec Pause time 1 5 1 5 3 5 Interdigit time 80 msec 80 msec 100 msec Conference tone disabled disabled enabled Call Back Kill time 180 sec 180 sec 360 sec PCM Companding Law mu law a law EBI a law EBI Race Integration disabled disabled disabled OLI digits fixed 10 digits fixed 10 digits variable length a maximum of 8 Dial Tone Detection enabled enabled enabled Hunt Groups Show in second disabled disabled disabled Default delay 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec If busy busy tone busy tone busy tone Mode broadcast broadcast sequential Target line if busy setting prime prime
205. from ringing in response to an incoming call and may make placing calls difficult In most areas a total REN of 5 should permit normal phone operation To determine the total REN allowed on your telephone line consult your local telephone company Hearing Aids This phone is compatible with hearing aids equipped with an appropriate telecoil option Programming Emergency Numbers When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers 1 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for calling before hanging up Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early mornings or late evenings P0607659 02 EMI EMC FCC Part 15 Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one
206. g Companion DECT T7406 and Symbol NetVision handsets Companion and DECT have region based deployment Refer to Mobility services by region on page 299 For instructions about installing a Companion system refer to Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system on page 191 The DECT and T7406 systems have separate installation and maintenance guides The P Telephony Configuration Guide describes how to register the NetVision handsets to the Business Communications Manager Refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide to set up basic telephony and data configurations Refer to the separate application guides to set up optional applications such as CallPilot or VoIP functions Installation and Maintenance Guide 88 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager P0607659 02 89 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware The BCM1000 is a modular system You can increase the capacity of your Business Communications Manager by adding more telephony hardware components known as media bay modules The BCM1000 accommodates three media bay modules The BCM1000e accommodates an additional six modules The number of media bay modules that can be added to your system is determined by the number of media bays that are open combined with the number of DS30 channels each component occupies Each Business Communications Manager system has a maximum of six DS30 channels available to media bay modu
207. ge to load M Return to the Main Menu BCM Rls ID 2 5 RC 10 Version 7 1 8 Hardware Profile 2 CORE UPLOAD Notes Indicates the hardware profile detected on this system Indicates the hardware profile configured on this system PRESS a NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 6 M c The current MSC configuration is indicated with two asterisks Note the Image column If you want to change this select 6 Select an alternate MSC image to load The system checks to see if a core upload is required This takes about 45 minutes If you do not want to change the MSC load enter the number of the selection with the asterisks Note You can only change the profile once After the profile is changed the menu options for the profile no longer display 4 The system automatically reboots as part of the initialization process When the process is complete the telnet session disconnects 5 Do one of the following e Run the Quick Start Wizard to create the system parameters and defaults Then restore your system data from your backup disk e Restore system and data information from your backup disk Note The detailed processes for performing steps 4 and 5 are contained in the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide 6 Test your system for correct operations Installation and Maintenance Guide 252 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk Installing the mirrored disk controller If you up
208. ger units from possible electrical shocks i Warning Use only qualified persons to service the system The installation and service of this unit must be performed by service personnel with the appropriate training and experience Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of working with telephony equipment and wiring They must have experience in techniques that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage 3 Danger Electrical shock hazards Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunications network and ac mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the BCM1000 and BCM1000e if there is one must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground In addition all unused slots must have blank faceplates installed The covers on all units must be in place at the completion of any servicing Warning Leakage currents AN Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground via the power cord System shutdown You must disconnect the media bay module cables MSC and network cables from the front of the units before disconnecting the power cord from an earthed System startup You must reconnect the power cords to an earthed outlet before reconnecting the media bay MSC and network cables t
209. grade your system from a single disk system to a mirrored disk system you will need to install the RAID board as well as a second hard disk The RAID board is installed beside the media bay module housing in the BCM1000 Refer to Figure 112 You can upgrade both 2 5 and 2 0 hardware to have mirrored capability You do not require a redundant power supply and redundant fans to support this feature If you are upgrading either system you must be running 2 5 FP1 software or higher and have at least 256 RAM of memory installed If you need to install more memory refer to Replacing memory on page 287 Figure 112 Base unit with RAID board plus redundant power and fans RAID board Two hard disks P0607659 02 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk 253 Installing the RAID board The following steps describe how to install the RAID board The steps are the same for both the 2 0 and 2 5 versions of BCM1000 hardware except for the power connections which are described in Routing power for mirrored systems on page 256 1 Prepare the base unit for maintenance Refer to Shutting down the system software on page 238 and Shutting down the system hardware on page 239 if necessary Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Disconnect all power and ribbon cable connections from the hard disk and the media bay module back plane Remove the front co
210. h settings upgraded 2 5 system 35 ASM wiring chart 181 DSM switch settings 148 overview 97 rules for assigning 135 status mirrored hard disks 259 subnet mask default 163 168 supplies installation checklist 121 surge arrestor Companion U S 209 surge protector 211 proprietary extension cable 207 warning 207 wire gauge 210 surge protectors 207 Symbol NetVision system components 106 Symbols 59 system networking card combinations 163 required parameters 168 system capacity 114 system components 69 system defaults by region 304 system features 80 system management PC requirements 109 system required parameters 168 system restart 240 system setup choosing region and template 173 system shutdown 244 system startup choosing a region and template 173 system status monitor 233 hard disk mirroring 249 T T1 DTM module 94 network interface card 75 T7100 103 T7208 North America only 103 T7316 103 T7406 compatible handset 104 T7316E call icons 22 new for 3 5 21 T7406 system components 106 T7406 telephone overview 104 TAPI LAN CTE 82 Personal Call Manager application 83 Service Provider 82 Installation and Maintenance Guide 346 Index TCM connections base station 205 TCP IP protocol 172 technical requirements documents 6 telecommunication network voltage TNV 178 telecommunications company rights 6 telecommunications registration information 5 telephone wiring 175
211. hard disk 257 Power routing for 2 0 hardware Follow these steps to connect power to the hard disks the media bay module housing and to the RAID board Refer to Figure 117 Each step number in the following procedure corresponds to an item in the diagram 1 Select two power cables that have three Molex female connectors and route them under the power supply and media services card MSC along the bottom of the chassis Connect the end connector of the first cable to the secondary hard disk top disk Connect the next connector of the first cable to the Primary hard disk bottom disk Connect the last connector of the first cable to the RAID card a A WO N Connect the end connector of the second cable to the bottom of the media bay module back plane Do not attempt to connect any other component to the second and third connectors on this cable Figure 117 Connecting the power cables for mirrored disks 2 0 version of BCM1000 WZ unconnected Installation and Maintenance Guide 258 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk RAID board LEDs The front end of the board fits into the card slot that is closest to the media bay modules on the BCM1000 The front panel of the board contains a number of LEDs that indicate the status of the RAID board and the current connection with the hard drives Refer to Figure 118 and Table 44 Figure 118 RAID board LEDs NORTEL NETWORKS
212. he locking tab on the left of the module towards the handle of the module Pull the module straight forward and out of the housing Refer to Figure 137 Figure 137 Removing the power module Locking tab Module screw Ensure the switch on the replacement module is off Insert the replace module into the empty slot in the power supply housing You will hear a click when it is seated properly Secure with a screw in the tab located on the right side of the module Turn the module switch to the on position The LEDs on the power supply are on when the ac power is connected Installation and Maintenance Guide 278 Chapter 19 Replacing a power supply Replacing a power supply in an BCM1000e The power supply in the BCM1000e is exactly the same type of power supply as that in the BCM1000 The only difference is that 2 5 version BCM1000es come with either a standard power supply or redundant power supply In this case the standard power supply cannot be updated to a redundant power supply You must upgrade the entire unit Note Version 2 0 conversion If you still have a version 2 0 BCM1000e which is larger than the 2 5 versions you can upgrade to a redundant power supply To perform this upgrade follow the instructions for updating the BCM1000 power supply Upgrading to a redundant power supply on page 272 In this configuration the redundant fan would be installed as a piggy back unit The plug for the redundant f
213. hes you are using all the DS30 channels In this case the BCM1000 can support only the FEM module All other media bays must be empty Warning Do not attempt to turn on ports requiring a DS30 channel that is already in AN service to another media bay module located on the same BCM1000 Doing this results in unpredictable behavior with both modules P0607659 02 151 Chapter 8 Installing media bay modules After you set the switches on the media bay modules you can install them in the BCM1000 or the BCM1000e The BCM1000 accommodates a maximum of three media bay modules If your system requires more than three media bay modules you need to connect a BCM1000e to the BCM1000 Figure 52 provides an overview of the process for installing media bay modules Note The number of media bay modules you can add varies depending on the DS30 resources that are available Refer to Figure 39 on page 117 Danger The BCM1000 and BCM1000e must be correctly powered down before you A install or remove media bay modules Figure 52 Process map Installing a media bay module Set module DIP switches Disconnect cables Restore power to from the front of the BCM1000 and BCM1000e Disconnect power from both units Remove front bezel from the BCM1000 or BCM1000e Install new module Replace coverplate BCM1000 and BCM1000e Reconnect all cables Monitor LEDs for power and status Is this installatio
214. ial cable from the lightning surge protector to the appropriate base station connector Refer to Figure 80 on page 210 Tip Wiring information The recommended wire gauge is 6 AWG Connect the ground lead to the building ground Do not connect to a ground rod or series of ground rods If you cannot connect the ground lead to the building ground connect the ground lead to the metal frame of the building The connection must be no more than six to 10 ft You can connect the ground lead to the 120 V ac conduit which is connected to the building ground However using the ac conduit is not the preferred method of installation The connector between the antenna and the lightning surge protector and between the lightning surge protector and the base station is a proprietary BNC connector You must align the BNC connectors before you can make the connection Figure 80 Lightning surge protector and bracket USA P0607659 02 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 211 Installing antennas Canada There are three types of external antennas available in Canada e indoor directional antenna e indoor omnidirectional antenna e outdoor omnidirectional antenna Each type of installation requires a specific installation technique As well you must install a lightning surge protector for every outdoor antenna installed Outdoor requirements Before you install the antenna ensure that your plan meets the fol
215. ian EMI Requirements Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his or her own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference Telecommunication registration Business Communications Manager equipment meets all applicable requirements of both Industry Canada CS 03 and US Federal Commission FCC Part 68 and has been registered under files Industry Canada 332 5980 A and FCC AB6CAN 20705 KF E key system AB6CAN 20706 MF E hybrid system and AB6CAN 23740 PF E PBX system Connection of the Business Communications Manager telephone system to the nationwide telecommunications network is made through a standard network interface jack that you can order from your local telecommunications company This type of customer provided equipment cannot be used on party lines or coin lines Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfuncti
216. ications Manager ATA 2 does not function Follow these steps to troubleshoot the problem oo fF Q Na Make sure there is ac power connected to the ATA 2 unit Make sure that ATA 2 is in the Tones OFF mode For Data Applications only Correctly configure the ATA 2 telephone port for data communication Allow sufficient start up time Assign the prime line Assign a ringing line if required for example auto answer modems FAX Checking the wiring Check the following connections ATA 2 to the terminal The resistance must be 200 ohms or less for data applications and 1 300 ohms or less for voice applications Business Communications Manager hardware to ATA 2 The wiring must be equivalent to 800 m of 0 5 mm wire 2 600 ft of 24 AWG or less Do not use bridge taps and loading coils between the Business Communications Manager hardware and Business Communications Manager ATA 2 External line to the Business Communications Manager system Ensure the external line is correctly connected to the BCM1000 and make sure there is dial tone Installation and Maintenance Guide 236 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Checking for dial tone at the ATA 2 Check to ensure there is dial tone from the set and from the ATA 2 module 1 2 If there is no dial tone replace a single line telephone for the data communication device If there is no dial tone at the ATA 2 unit a Disconnect the line side of ATA 2 Connect an Business Co
217. ier 76 paging 76 external 228 external output jack description 76 input 228 page relay jack 229 relay jack description 76 parameters obtaining required values 168 required values 168 passive antenna 211 password hyperterminal 170 patch cable BCM1000 BCMe1000 connection 132 PC configuring 172 requirements 109 PCI devices 282 MSC description slots number 70 standard MSC card 74 PCI Device LED 282 peripherals ATA2 185 CAP 186 Personal Call Manager 83 phone number modem alternate 168 piggyback fan replacing 265 pin out telephone wiring 175 plug top power supply on base station 205 polarity TCM connections 204 portable handset DECT 106 portable handset NetVision 106 portable handset T7406 106 portable services supporting regions 299 portable services supporting regions 25 portable telephone Companion 192 Companion installation 206 DN range 206 Etiquette C3050 CT2 105 extension numbers 206 registration 206 ports BCM1000 ports 78 FEM fiber ports 150 positioning antenna 211 Companion base station 203 power P0607659 01 Index 343 checking voltage 160 Companion RPI cord warning 160 do not fasten cords 160 mirrored disks 256 reconnecting to system 155 removing 152 power bar approval 120 connecting 160 power down system 238 power draw limitation 227 power outage emergency phone jack 95 power supply cables 273 knockout plate 273 LED 272 module LED 275
218. ific The DECT radio based system allows you to configure up to 32 cordless handsets that communicate through radio base stations deployed around a site The handsets can be configured as stand alone sets or they can be twinned with stationary sets e IP Telephony Configuration Guide i2002 and i2004 IP telephones and the NetVision and NetVision Data telephones require a combination of data and telephony settings to work with the Business Communications Manager These telephones can make or receive calls through either VoIP or PBX lines Nortel Networks i2050 Software Phone turns your PC into a telephone interface which provides standard telephony operating features such as Voice Mail Caller ID and multiple telephone lines or line appearances This application requires Windows 2000 a full duplex sound card and a computer telephony headset This document describes what settings are required to use this application with the Business Communications Manager The i2050 Software Phone Installation Guide provides specific installation information VolP Gateway requires keycode converts the voice in a call into a packet format and sends the call using an intranet trunk With Business Communications Manager VoIP Gateway you can make calls over any intranet connected to the Business Communications Manager system e LAN CTE Configuration Guide LAN CTE introduced in 2 5 to replace TSP requires keycode provides an interface betw
219. in which order you want to assign the modules you determine the specific switch settings for each module 1 Use Table 14 on page 139 to determine a switch setting for all modules except the DECT and FEM modules Figure 50 shows an example of the table and how to do the following steps Step 1 On Table 14 circle the module names Step 2 Number the order in which you want to assign the modules Step 3 Determine the number of DS30 channels each module requires Step 4 Circle the DS30 channel and offset numbers Step 5 Follow the DS30 channel and offset number to the far right column where the switch settings are indicated Circle the setting for each module Note If you must assign specific line or extension numbers to a module refer to the individual switch tables in Line and extension numbers for specific modules on page 141 for line and DN listings Figure 50 How to use the configuration map 1 Indicate the modules you want to install nnn a 2 Note how many DS30 channels each module requires pi or y Media bay module positioning DIP switch setting DS30 ch Offset 1 234 5 6 DSM DSM 32 4x16 ASM DTM CTM CTM offset DS30 ch BRI 16 8 8 ef me et Lt alon on on on on on amp 3 Choose the DS30 channels 4 Assign an offset number to 5 Make a note of the DIP switch settings
220. information and the system continues to function This minimizes recovery time after disk failure Note Backup and restore data gt Remember to continue to do data backups that get stored off site as part of your recovery strategy Connecting RAID board ribbon cables The RAID board has three labelled ribbon connectors which connect to the following Host connects to the IDE 1 connector on the control board motherboard e Mirrored connects to the secondary mirroring hard disk e Primary connects to the primary hard disk Danger The RAID board connectors are NOT hot swappable Ensure that the system is powered down before you attempt to connect or disconnect any of the cables Figure 115 shows the location of these connectors on the RAID board Figure 115 RAID Board Mirrored disk cable connector Power connector Host Motherboard cable connector Primary disk cable connector i Warning Reconnecting Mirrored and Primary cables After maintenance the Mirrored and Primary cables must always be attached to the same hard disk positions from which they were removed This means that if the Primary disk fails the Primary cable gets connected to the new blank disk Mirroring then occurs from the Mirrored disk to the blank Primary disk Once mirroring has completed the Mirroring disk hands over control to the new Primary disk Installation and Maintenance Guide
221. ing 228 hard disk 247 in rack 123 129 internal wiring requirements 120 LAN card 283 leaving space 128 lightning surge protector 215 mounting brackets 125 on a wall 125 on table or shelf 128 132 optional equipment 121 redundant power supply 274 tools required 122 wall mounting bracket 131 installing IP telephones 188 media bay modules 153 remove power 152 the BCM1000 in a rack 124 Integrated QoS Routing 83 internal components BCM1000 71 72 internal wiring requirements 120 International components 103 104 internet network routing software 83 PC requirements 109 intranet telephony 82 IP address configuring the PC 172 connecting the hardware 163 default 168 required parameters 168 subnet mask 163 IP telephone 12050 soft phone 82 install chart 188 overview 82 103 VoIP Gateway application 82 ip telephone changing the channel split 114 IP telephones default DN range 188 NetVision cordless telephones 104 NetVision system components 106 ISDN BRI overview 74 line services by region 298 trunk module 96 J jack external paging 76 page relay 76 K Key Indicator Module KIM 21 keycode Attendant Console 80 Call Center 81 Call Center Agents 80 Call Center Reporting 81 DPNSS networking 80 entering 173 fax Fax Mail 81 LAN CTE MCDN 80 Message Networking 82 Multimedia Call Center 83 Professional Call Center 81 Q SIG Voice Messaging 80 software 80 VoIP Gateway 82 KIM call icons 2
222. ing with GATM 17 description of module 74 DIP switch settings 136 139 145 DS30 channel hierarchy 136 DS30 requirements 34 hardware description 99 station wiring chart 180 trunk wiring 177 wiring chart 177 4X16 switch settings 38 8 pair wiring for ASM 181 A ac outlet 152 155 160 access point NetVision system components 106 accessories ATA2 185 CAP 186 ACD Call Center 81 Professional Call Center 81 adding new extensions 113 address default IP address 168 default subnet mask 163 168 agents adding 80 alternate phone number 168 American Society of Composers Authors and Publishers Music on Hold licence 6 amphenol connector 98 99 100 179 analog GATM 16 analog communication devices 217 analog device measurement from CO 219 analog device measurement to CO 219 analog equipment ATA2 185 analog extensions 113 analog loop 120 analog loop resistance ATA2 224 analog port termination 219 analog station media bay module ASM8 100 analog station modules 97 analog telephone ASM and ASM 8 modules 100 CTM CTM8 module 95 Analog Terminal Adapter 2 see ATA2 analog transmission 218 analog trunk UK profile 16 analog trunk media bay module 95 antenna Canada installation 211 certification 207 Co axial cable maximum length 212 directional installation 212 external 208 213 external installation 207 indoor 212 indoor directional external antenna installation 212 indoor install
223. ion Guide This guide describes the installation of the T7406 base station which connects to a DSM on the Business Communications Manager The book also describes how to register the T7406 handsets to the base station and to the Business Communications Manager Data features The Business Communications Manager also offers the following data features These features are described and configured in the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide Integrated QoS Routing controls the router interface between the BCM1000 and the local area network wide area network and internet DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Business Communications Manager 2 5 provides DHCP service to branch office clients This service dynamically assigns IP addresses to branch office PCs so you do not manually assign an IP address to each PC The Business Communications Manager can also be set to use this application as a relay agent to an external DHCP server on the network DNS Domain Name System BCM1000 functions as a DNS proxy for your network The DNS service allows clients to enter a domain name such as www nortelnetworks com instead of an IP address when using web browsers IP Routing Business Communciations Manager software supports the following IP routing protocols static routing RIP Routing Information Protocol OSPF Open Shortest Path First Installation and Maintenance Guide 84 Chapter 1 I
224. ion and carrier profile Core Software Carrier s w ID T1 CT2 Plus T1 Etiquette E1 Euro E1 Global E1 CALA Region Brazil Caribbean Denmark Australia Australia Caribbean Hong Kong France CALA CALA Hong Kong North Germany Global Global North American Holland PRC PRC American Taiwan Italy Taiwan Norway Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom South American and Central American countries are assigned to regions in the following way e Caribbean includes Antigua Bahamas Barbados Bermuda Cayman Islands Dominican Republic Jamaica USVI Puerto Rico and Trinidad e CALA refers to all other Caribbean and Latin American countries with European based standards The following table lists the languages available for each telephony region and the order in which the languages are set as default Table 5 Telephony region Languages Region Language Region Language CALA NA English NA French NA Spanish France Euro French NA English Caribbean Germany German NA English ones kong Global NA English NA French NA Spanish North American Turkish PRC Holland Dutch Euro French NA English Taiwan Italy Italian NA English Norway Norwegian Swedish Danish NA English Australia UK English Spain Euro Spanish NA English Portuguese United Sweden Swedish Norwegian Danish NA English Kingdom Brazil Portuguese Switzerland German Euro French Italian NA English
225. ion in these chapters explains how to e set up the system hardware e start and initialize the system hardware e troubleshoot and maintain the hardware All core system operational configuration is described in the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide To use this guide you must e bea Nortel Networks installer with Business Communications Manager certification e know basic Nortel Networks terminology Symbols used in this guide This guide uses symbols to draw your attention to important information The following symbols appear in this guide Caution Caution Symbol Alerts you to conditions where you can damage the equipment Danger Electrical Shock Hazard Symbol AN Alerts you to conditions where you can get an electrical shock Warning Warning Symbol AN Alerts you to conditions where you can cause the system to work improperly or to fail Installation and Maintenance Guide 60 Preface B Note Note Symbol Alerts you to important information 4 Tip Tip Symbol Alerts you to additional information that can help you perform a task a Warning Grounding Symbol Alerts you to ground yourself with an antistatic grounding strap before performing the maintenance procedure QS Warning Disconnect Symbol Alerts you to remove the BCM1000 and Business Communications Manager expansion unit BCM1000e power cords from the AC outlet before
226. ir holes and mounting holes 3 Attach the fan to the BCM1000 using the four screws 2 0 hardware or plastic rivets 2 5 hardware Refer to Figure 124 on page 264 Installation and Maintenance Guide 266 Chapter 18 Adding or replacing a cooling fan 4 Connect the power supply cables for each fan to the SSM board Refer to Figure 122 on page 263 Note Piggy backed redundant fan Connect the redundant power supply cable to the power cable adapter Refer to Figure 126 Then connect the power cable adapter to an available power supply cable Figure 126 Connect the redundant fan cable to the adapter Redundant fan O Redundant fan adapter Spare power supply connector 5 Replace the cover 6 Restore the unit to operation For details refer to Restarting the system on page 240 The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the ac power cord This takes several minutes to complete Removing a fan from the BCM1000e The BCM1000e comes either with one fan or a redundant fan set The single fan unit is not upgradeable Follow these steps to remove a malfunctioning fan 1 Shut down the system following the directions in Removing a fan from the BCM1000 on page 262 2 Disconnect the fan power cable from the hub card Note If the unit has redundant fans each fan has a connector on the hub board 3 Locate the screws that fasten the fan casing to the unit
227. ird wire ground Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground via the power cord Therefore it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit Specifically operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections central office lines removed first Installation and Maintenance Guide 4 Enhanced 911 Configuration Caution Warning Local state and federal requirements for Emergency 911 services supported by Customer Premises Equipment vary Consult your telecommunication service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and regulations Note For information about 911 configuration refer to the Enhanced 911 E911 Configuration section in the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide Radio frequency Interference Warning Equipment generates RF energy This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If not installed and used in accordance with the installation manual it may cause interference to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with ICES 003 CLASS A Canad
228. ire connections for a DB25 adapter cable Chassis Ground Receive Data Clear to Send Signal Ground Common Return 11 13 Connect wiring to the modem card North American Systems only Modem card face 15 17 19 Transmit Clock Receive Clock 19 21 23 25 Warning Ensure the system is powered up before connecting this cable To connect the modem card insert a PSTN line into the Line jack on the modem card For information about the location of the modem card refer to Figure 58 on page 163 Note Not all systems are equipped with a modem card Installation and Maintenance Guide 166 Chapter 9 Starting the system Table 27 shows the wire connections for a RS 422 EIA 530 modem adapter cable Table 27 RS 422 ElA 530 adapter cable Protective Ground i i 5 Transmit Clock A 15 i 3 Receive Data A 3 7 Receive Clock A 17 i 5 Clear to Send A 5 9 Request To Send B 19 7 Signal Ground 7 21 _ 9 Receive Clock B 9 3 Data Terminal Ready B 23 N 11 External Clock B 11 N 5 25 13 Clear To Send B 13 Table 28 shows the wire connections for a V 35 adapter cable Table 28 V 35 Adapter Cable 1 Protective Ground A 15 Transmit Clock A Y 3 Receive Data A R 17 Receive Clock A V 5 Clear to Send D jo oweserneey eE _ 9 7 Signal Ground B 21 9 Receive Clock B X 23
229. irror ribbon cable from the RAID board to the disk you removed it from If you are upgrading from a single disk system to a mirrored system this will be the disk on top d Ensure that the third ribbon cable from the RAID board is connected to the IDE 1 connector on the controller mother board Figure 108 Cabling the RAID board to the hard disks RAID board A Rear of media bay fe module housing to mirrored disk J Mirrored hard disk to primary disk a N Z To IDE 1 on mother board wo For information about installing the RAID board refer to Installing the RAID board on page 2a P0607659 02 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk 249 Replace the cover on the BCM1000 Restore the units to operation Refer to Restarting the system on page 240 Perform the procedure appropriate for the type of hard disk system you have e Single disk Initialize the hard disk Refer to Initializing the hard disk single disk system on page 249 After the disk is initialized restore your data from your backups If you did not backup your keycodes re enter them e Mirrored disks The system automatically starts the mirroring process Monitor the progress of the mirroring task using the Mirroring diagnostics tool in the Unified Manager refer to Controlling and monitoring mirroring operations on page 259 or by using Telnet The LEDs on the front of the RAID board indicate the current status of the board
230. is not running N A Device is not and the driver is present active Installation and Maintenance Guide 162 Chapter 9 Starting the system Table 25 BCM1000 LED states Continued PCI Device Device is present driver is not running N A Device is not and the driver is present active Temperature Temperature is N A Temperature is N A below threshold in alarm status 1 If the Power LED does not light a Disconnect the power cords b Check all cables and power connections Ensure that the ac outlet has power c Reconnect the power cords Note You can monitor the state of the BCM1000 LEDs from your computer Refer to Using the System Status Monitor to monitor LEDs on page 232 2 When the system power is on and the system has successfully booted the power and status LEDs on the faceplates of the media bay modules are lit and remain constant Refer to the media bay module sections in Chapter 2 Telephony hardware on page 89 for a description of media bay module LED states 3 You are now ready to connect the hardware to the network P0607659 02 Chapter 9 Starting the system 163 Connecting the data networking hardware This section describes how to connect network cards to the BCM1000 A Warning Check with your network administrator before you connect the BCM1000 base unit to the network to ensure there are no IP address conflicts The default address for the B
231. ith your account representative for correct procedure before attempting to initialize your system Initializing the system sets such parameters as the hardware profile which must match your actual installed hardware configuration When you replace a hard drive in a single disk system you also will use the initialization menu to initialize the hard disk to your system Refer to Initializing the hard disk single disk system on page 249 P0607659 02 Chapter 9 Starting the system 171 Figure 60 Main Menu ake a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X A Platform Initialization Menu System Configuration Configuration Wizard Media Services Card System ID Diagnostics System Status Monitor Command line Reboot the system SEIE Koay MHHo fPwWYN oe sale woe a arate BCM Rls ID 2 5 Feature Pack 1 RC1 3 Version 2 Hardware Profile 1 CA 10e 9 What information you want to configure will determine your next steps If you only want to change the IP addressing enter 2 System Configuration and follow the prompts If you want to configure the system through the serial port enter 3 Configuration Wizard This wizard also allows you to change the IP addressing information This Wizard has the same information as the Quick Start Wizard that you access through the Unified Manager but in a slightly different format Refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide for a detailed description of
232. ize seamless hand off the difference in TCM wiring length between neighboring base stations must not exceed 300 m 1 000 ft Before you install or move wireless equipment in the United States check that you have approval from UTAM Inc The United States FCC has appointed UTAM Inc as the body responsible for coordinating and verifying the installation or relocation of unlicensed personal wireless communication devices To comply with UTAM Inc the system uses keys and credits to control user capacity and to ensure system location verification You require these software keys and credits to activate Companion services You purchase these credits at the time you place the order Positioning a Companion base station Avoid installing base stations on large concrete or marble columns because these columns affect radio coverage If possible place the base station a minimum of 1 m 40 in from these types of columns Do not install a base station with the antenna housings near metal objects Be careful not to damage existing wiring or panels Do not position base stations in ducts plenums or hollow spaces used to transport environmental air except where the duct plenum or hollow space is created by a suspended ceiling having lay in panels When you need more than one base station in a cell to meet traffic requirements position the base stations at the same cell center To place all base stations in the same cell center e forthe USA
233. kaeoas hbase Goastadenins E AE TET TE 80 Telephony features and options asaaaaaa naana anaa 80 Daa ea rran a a R a a 83 Business Communications Manager expansion unit a suasusu saaa aaaea 85 Installation process overview 2 0 0 cece teens 86 P0607659 02 Contents 45 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware 1445 ses diaddsdaaewineens en seesdneessasewine 89 Media bay module common features 0 000 cece eee eee 90 LEDS caei aeaa ees a A aE ONA ates 90 POWER CONMGCIONS oscect vedic a See bbe Ge dae de eene dees ed een doe EA 91 DIP SNOS Scart decree a ones de dada noes asp tose De tisha A ath hal alge waeasted 92 Tunk media bay Modulos nan chee 3ee4 6 605 05856054 6a SRSS 4 weHES4RTE BREE 93 Digital Trunk media bay module 0 0 cee eee ees 94 Caller ID Trunk media bay module 2 ccc e2c5 sce cee eeer ce edudeeeucad ns 95 Basic Rate Interface media bay module 0 0 eee 96 Slalion media bay MOduUlOS icy cal sca diweeidsaoeiey Bad eae oe eee wes 97 Digital Station media bay module 0 0 cee eee es 98 4X16 media bay MOQUE cccce0 2c eae eebaddekeaeiad dees ad one ome oem 99 Analog Station media bay module wie cde ee eee eee 100 Specialized media bay Modules viccadenadessieet cabtsouedeuds se pager ews 100 DECT Media Dayle ccicvedhovadds Wad bo dad oGRhe BAPE NRE eed 101 Fiber Expansion media bay module 0 eee eee eee ee 102 Telephones and adapters s cccccceeeareew ines t
234. kups 244 removing the hard disk 244 replacing telephones 293 system restart 240 Maxell CR2032 coin cell battery 289 maximum loss ATA2 218 MCDN networking 80 Q SIG voice networking 80 media bay modules 4X16 description 74 4X16 settings 145 ASM DIP switch settings 147 ASM DIP switch settings upgraded 2 5 system 35 ASM wiring 179 ASM68 overview availability by regions 25 299 BRI DIP switch settings 142 BRI overview 74 channel requirements 34 117 CTM description 74 CTM DIP switch settings 143 DECT 74 DECT settings 149 DIP switch settings 138 DS30 channel hierarchy 135 DSM DIP switch settings 148 DSM wiring 179 DSM 16 overview 74 DSM32 overview 74 DTM description 74 DTM DIP switch settings 141 FEM overview 74 FEM settings 150 FEM wiring 182 grounding strap 152 install overview 86 installation overview 86 installation process map 151 installation wiring warning 154 installing a new module 153 LED troubleshooting 157 limitation 151 offset configurations 139 power routing with mirrored disk system 256 RAID board clip 253 removing power from the system 152 replacement process map 156 replacing 156 selecting the modules 111 station module wiring 179 switch offsets 116 system capacity 114 troubleshooting 157 wiring 175 Media Services Card see MSC memory amount of 70 P0607659 01 Index 341 expansion capabilities 287 replacing 285 288 memory button CAP 186 CAPN 103
235. l antenna ensure you follow these guidelines e Locate the antenna on the external wall of the building Note You must install the antenna on a vertical surface gt e Keep the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna as close as possible to the base station The base station itself must always be located inside the building e The recommended installation height is 4 m 13 ft to 5 m 16 5 ft above ground level e Always install a surge protector between an outdoor omnidirectional external antenna and a base station Note The connector on the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna is a TNC female connector To connect the antenna you need an adapter to connect the TNC connector to the BNC coaxial cables or a coaxial cable with a TNC male connector on one end and BNC male connector on the other end Installation and Maintenance Guide 214 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system See Installing a lightning surge protector Canada on page 215 for more information Caution Fit lightning protection to the antenna if appropriate Important points to remember Do not install the external antenna or the lightning surge protector during an electrical storm Always turn off the base station power before connecting the coaxial cable of an outdoor antenna Always install the antenna at the cable entry point into the building Connect the lightning surge protector to ground before con
236. l line The total number of lines depends on the number and type of trunk media bay modules installed line pool Lines grouped in a common pool that assigned telephones can access to make external calls Assign a line to be part of a line pool under Trunk Line data in Lines programming Line Redirection A feature that allows you to redirect all calls on an incoming line to a destination outside the system You can set up the system to ring briefly when a call comes in on a redirected line under Capabilities in System DNs programming P0607659 01 Glossary 323 This feature is different from Call Forward in two ways Line redirection redirects only external calls and redirects calls to destinations outside the system Call forward redirects calls only to destinations within the system Link If the Business Communications Manager system is connected to a Private Branch Exchange PBX the Link signal is used to access special features The Link signal can be included as part of a longer stored sequence on an External Autodial button or in a Speed Dial code The Link symbol uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialing sequence Local Area Network LAN A network of interconnected computers such as the Business Communications Manager sharing the resources of a single processor or server within a relatively small geographic area mailbox A storage place for voice messages on Business Communications Manager Voice Messaging Meridian 1
237. lation Guide IP ielephony Configuration Guide 7 Programming Guid DECT DECT installation and Maintenance Guide Programming and Using Telephone Features gt Telephone Feature Programming Guide Installation and Maintenance Guide 66 Preface Call Management documentation K y m m Voice Mail and Call Management Applications a i Documentation CD I Hunt Groups Programming Operations Guide Hospitality Services l I CDR Call Detail Recording System Administration Guide l L CallPilot Fax CallPilot Fax Set Up and Operations Guide Call Center Set Up and Operation Guide i Professional Call Reporting Set Up and Center Operation Guide E E ee Multimedia Call Cent Multimedia Call Center Malita ca f Set Up and Operation Guide LAN CTE Configuration Guide D Call Center r a _ Reference i CallPilot Call Pilot Manager Set Up Guide Keycoded Applications and Operation Guide I Programming I Software Keycode z i Installation Guide CallPilot Message CallPilot Message Networking Networkin l User Guide etworking Set Up and Operation Guide User Guide L _ _ CallPilot Desktop CallPilot Unified Messaging User Guide Unified Messaging Installation and Maintenance User Guide _ Supervi
238. lation and Maintenance Guide 232 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Using the System Status Monitor to monitor LEDs The LEDs on the BCM1000 are part of the System Status Monitor SSM board Figure 95 shows what the board looks like from inside the BCM1000 When installing new equipment that connects to this board ensure that the connector for that LED is properly seated Figure 95 SSM board connections Mother board Redundant power supply Mother board J10 monitoring cable Board power LINN 000I MUMLU a TANANA SSM board a 00000 00000 jooooo0o00 00000 00000 0p000000 00000000 Redundant primary fans CPU fan Remote temperature sensor Note Chassis has all PCI cards removed for clarity Figure 96 shows what the LEDs look like on the outside of the BCM1000 The labels in the illustration indicate which part of the hardware each LED supports P0607659 02 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting 233 Figure 96 LED locations on the face of the BCM1000 O O Sere O O o000 3 3 fall ki o eol 1 O Operation LEDs TEETE AL E of 0O OOO Oo ness Lommunicktions Manager 7 0 000 X 000 ol 100 C CD C O 8 O fo
239. le 7 DTM LED functions LED label Function O Power On indicates that the DTM is receiving 5 volts Status On indicates there is data communication between the DTM and the MSC card In Service Flashing indicates that the T1 ETSI or PRI trunks are out of service because a loopback test is running or the DTM is initializing Loopback On indicates a continuity loopback test is running Receive Alarm On indicates a problem with the received digital transmission This half duplex link does not work Receive Error On indicates a small error as a result of degraded digital transmission Possible causes are an ohmic connection water ingress or too long a loop P0607659 02 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware 95 Table 7 DTM LED functions Continued LED label Function Transmit Alarm On indicates the DTM cannot transmit The DTM sends an Alarm indication signal AIS to the terminating switch This half duplex link does not work Transmit Error On indicates the DTM is sending a remote alarm indication RAI carrier failure alarm CFA to the terminating switch If the Transmit Alarm is not on this error indicates a far end or cable problem All LEDS flashing All LEDs flashing continuously indicates that the DTM is initializing TIP You can install a maximum of three DTMs in the BCM1000 system depending on the available channels These modules must be instal
240. le DIP switches on page 135 and review Figure 51 on page 140 to ensure the new module does not overrun any lines already assigned to other modules Figure 56 Process map Replacing a media bay module Module failure Disconnect cables Set DIP switches Monitor LEDs for from the front of on new module to power and status the BCM1000 and match old module BCM1000e Check the module Install new module Are settings in the Unified in media ba Remove power y Manager from both units Replace coverplate Remove front bezel from BCM1000 or BCM1000e Restore power to BCM1000 and Remove failed BEM Eade module Reconnect all cables j If a media bay module fails follow this procedure to properly replace the module 1 Follow the steps in Shutting down the system on page 152 to ensure the system shuts down correctly Remove the front bezel from the unit where the module resides Pull the latch beside the module to be replaced to release the module Refer to Figure 54 on page 153 Slide the module out of the bay where it is installed Record the switch settings from the old module P0607659 02 Chapter 8 Installing media bay modules 157 6 Set the DIP switches on the new module to match the settings you recorded in step 3 7 Install the module into the media bay Refer to Installing a media bay module on page 153 if you needed detailed instructions Warning If you
241. le warranties and are in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties or fitness for particular purpose and merchantability Warranty Repair Services Should the set fail during the warranty period In North America please call 1 800 574 1611 for further information Outside North America contact your sales representative for return instructions You will be responsible for shipping charges if any When you return this telephone for warranty service you must present proof of purchase After Warranty Service Nortel Networks offers ongoing repair and support for this product This service provides repair or replacement of your Nortel Networks product at Nortel Networks option for a fixed charge You are responsible for all shipping charges For further information and shipping instructions In North America contact our service information number 1 800 574 1611 Outside North America contact your sales representative Repairs to this product may be made only by the manufacturer and its authorized agents or by others who are legally authorized This restriction applies during and after the warranty period Unauthorized repair will void the warranty P0607659 02 NORTEL Business Communications Manager 3 5 NETWORKS changes affecting the BCM1000 BCM 3 5 program updates This document provides supplemental information for the BCM 3 5 software release for systems using BCM1000 hardware that has been
242. led in the BCM1000 If you already have three modules installed in the BCM1000 move one of those modules to the expansion unit to provide space for the DTM Caller ID Trunk media bay module North American systems only The CTM and CTM 8 have the same functions e The Caller ID Trunk media bay module CTM connects a maximum of four analog calling line ID CLID interfaces to the Business Communications Manager system via four RJ11 jacks on the module face These jacks are labeled Line 1 Auxiliary Line 2 Line 3 and Line 4 The auxiliary jack connects to Line 1 e The CTM8 provides eight analog CLID interfaces to the Business Communications Manager via eight RJ11 jacks on the module face Each jacks also supports disconnect supervision There are two auxiliary jacks on this module which connect to Line 1 and Line 5 Note that the top line of jacks is numbered in reverse order The auxiliary ports permit you to connect a V 90 modem FAX machine or single line analog telephone When the auxiliary device is active the Business Communications Manager system blocks the associated line Conversely when the line is active the auxiliary port line is blocked When you connect a single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port you can use it as an emergency telephone because this line remains active if a power outage occurs Figure 29 provides a view of the front of the CTM and CTM8 Installation and Maintenance Guide 96 Chapte
243. lephony e BI line DNs can default to unused DNs from 221 to 376 B2 line DNs can default to unused DNs from 377 to 472 NetVision DNs are assigned to the handsets through the H 323 section under IP Telephony on the Unified Manager Use the DNs within the ranges described above If no DN is specified in the record the system will automatically assign one when the handset connects to the system For details about configuring DN records for the IP telephones and the NetVision telephones refer to the IP Telephony Configuration Guide Installing radio based portable systems There are three radio based systems available for the Business Communications Manager system Availability depends on the geographical location of the system and is determined by the region you select for the system during system configuration Note The Symbol NetVision telephones are wireless telephones but to the Business Communications Manager they appear as IP telephones Companion portable system In North America you can provide cordless access throughout your site using the Companion cordless system This system allows you to provide portable units that are twinned with stationary sets This allows you to accommodate users who are mobile within the range of the system Companion handsets communication through base stations that are connected to DSMs on the BCM1000 You can install a maximum of 32 handsets per DSM since the handsets can use either of the
244. les If your system requires many IP lines or trunks you can reduce the number of DS30 channels that are assigned to modules and increase the number of channels available to IP telephones This is called a 3 5 DS30 channel split In this case you only have five DS30 channels available to media bay modules Refer to Understanding DS30 channel numbers on page 114 for more information i Warning Changing the DS30 channel split If you change the channel split from 2 6 default to 3 5 after the system is initialized any module set to DS30 channel 7 or requiring the use of channel 7 becomes inoperable If you change the channel split from a 3 5 split to a 2 6 split after the system is initialized all data is lost and all optional applications must be reinstalled and reconfigured Refer to Chapter 4 Selecting the media bay modules for your system on page 111 for details about determining how many media bay modules can be installed in a system As well this chapter describes the various types of telephone equipment that can be used with the Business Communications Manager system Figure 24 provides pointers to the sections that describe the modules and telephones that can be installed into the BCM1000 Figure 24 Telephony hardware components Trunk media bay modules z on page 93 000 o 90 Station media bay modules 000 00 00000000000 29 on page 97 To gt oE g Specialized media bay modules
245. llel with the sides of the bay 7 Gently push the media bay module straight back into the unit Warning If you feel any resistance as you slide the module into the housing carefully AN remove the module and check the wiring at the rear of the module again Refer to step 5 If you insert the modules off the straight or with too much force the wires that connect the media bay module daughter board to the module can become pinched between the module and the BCM1000 media bay This will cause a short in the equipment which would prevent the Business Communications Manager from restarting Note Some modules such as the DECT module do not have this wiring configuration However it is still important that you insert modules carefully and squarely into the housing to ensure that the power connector on the module correctly and securely connects to the backplane of the media bay You will hear a click when the module is firmly seated in the media bay The module sits slightly forward from the face of the BCM1000 When the front bezel is replaced the module face is flush with the surface of the unit 8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 for each media bay module you want to install 9 Replace the front bezel on the BCM1000 or BCM1000e P0607659 02 Chapter 8 Installing media bay modules 155 Reconnecting the equipment After you install the module correctly into the bay you must return the equipment to operation in an orderly way Foll
246. lowing requirements e Ifyou are installing an outdoor antenna on a metal surface greater than 18 cm 7 in in diameter position the antenna perpendicular to the surface e When running the coaxial cable inside or outside be careful not to damage the cable which affects its performance The minimum recommended bending radius is 20 mm 0 8 in e Always ensure that the antenna is clear of any adjacent obstruction or metal objects If you use more than one outdoor antenna at a cell center separate the antennas at by least 0 5 m 20 in to avoid radio interference problems e Use RG 58 U coaxial cables to connect the antennas to the base stations Caution Use only passive antennas to connect to the Companion base stations The coaxial cable you use to connect the external antenna to a Companion base station must have an impedance of 50 ohms Installation and Maintenance Guide 212 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system Installing an indoor directional antenna The indoor directional antenna has a backplate that allows for easy installation on a wall The antenna is installed half way between the floor and the ceiling For some applications for example a stairwell you can install the antenna on the ceiling 1 Use four screws to install the antenna Refer to Figure 81 Figure 81 Indoor directional external antenna Canada an 2 To prevent stress on the coaxial cable fasten the cable
247. ls FAX and modem transmission compatibility The ATA 2 is compatible with all commercial FAX and modem protocols When connected to an ATA 2 the Business Communications Manager system supports data transmission rates a maximum of and including 28 8 kbit s Note Nortel Networks cannot guarantee the maximum data transmission rate because the maximum rate is subject to the quality of the end to end channel P0607659 02 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters 225 Installing a data communication device Figure 90 shows the hardware configuration for connecting a data communication device through an ATA 2 to the Business Communications Manager Figure 90 Data communication device installation overview ATA 2 power cord er sae Data communication Business Communications devas Central Manager Office Business Communications Manager ATA2 Line loop resistance Terminal loop resistance 135 ohms maximum 200 ohms maximum The following steps explain how to install an ATA 2 to a data communication device 1 Connect a single line telephone to the ATA 2 2 Check that the ATA 2 is in the Tones OFF mode lift the handset and enter LINK 18 Note LINK appears as RECALL on some telephones If you are using a telephone gt without a LINK or RECALL button refer to the Business Communications Manager ATA2 User Guide for details 3 M
248. ltimedia Call Center requires a keycode 83 Multimedia Call Center requires keycode 83 music on hold connecting 230 copyright 6 music source permission 6 specifications 229 N NetVision access point 106 handset overview 104 installing 188 system components 106 NetVision Phone Administrator NVPA overview 106 network conflicts 163 equipment registration 4 initial parameters 168 interface 168 interface card 172 regulatory 6 routing 83 standards 5 networking Installation and Maintenance Guide 342 Index card combinations 163 conflicts 168 connecting LAN 164 connecting modem card 165 connecting WAN 164 DPNSS 80 Ethernet crossover cable 172 LAN card 75 MCDN requires keycode 80 modem card 75 subnet mask 163 WAN card 75 networking hardware 163 next hop 168 Norstar FEM wiring 182 Nortel Networks address Nashville Tennessee 8 Weston Ontario 7 North American components 97 100 103 104 NT1 BRI connections 178 null modem cable 163 168 169 numbers of extensions 113 O obstructing antennas 211 off premises extension 185 offset 116 offset configurations 139 omnidirectional antenna 212 213 one line display M7100N 104 M7208N 104 T7100 103 104 T7208 103 104 optional applications keycodes 173 optional equipment installation checklist 121 OPX 185 outdoor antennas 207 output jack 76 P page output MSC 228 page relay connecting 229 page external paging amplif
249. m If you require more extensive coverage such as more voice mail boxes or the call center application additional features are easily activated using software keycodes Business Communications Manager system components The Business Communications Manager system includes software and hardware components that provide data networking telephony service and voice messaging and service applications Figure 14 provides an overview of the core Business Communications Manager system The page locations where the information about each part can be found are also indicated Figure 14 Business Communications Manager core system components Internal sets Telephones and adapters on page 103 Business Communications Manager features System options on page 80 LAN WAN network Data networking components on page 75 ATOHO000 eTOOOO o 0 000A 0000 Bog E 2 ooooo External sets Business Communications BCM1000 base unit Manager expansion unit on Telephony components on page 74 page 85 Data networking components on page 75 Installation and Maintenance Guide 70 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager Note Some of the components described in this document are not available in all c
250. m configuration and press lt ENTER gt The System Configuration login prompt appears 10 Enter the default login UserID and password The System Configuration Start Page screen appears see Figure 5 Figure 5 System configuration start page Nortel Networks Business Communications Manager START MENU Business Communications Manager UM 111362 BCM3 RC2 2 Compiled Wed Nov 13 09 21 2662 Status Configuration NOT CHANGED Enter q Quick Start Page 1 m Main Menu a Apply Changes n Ignore Changes r Reboot x Logout Enter Command 11 Enter q Quick Start Page 1 and press lt ENTER gt The Quick Start Page screen appears Figure 6 BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide P0607659 02 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 1 addendum 31 Figure 6 Quick start page Nortel Networks Business Communications Manager Quick Configuration Page 1 System Name NEEDSNEWNAME LANI IP Address gt 16 16 16 1 LAN1 Subnet Mask z 255 255 255 0 LAN2 IP Address gt 16 16 11 1 LAN2 Subnet Mask gt 255 255 255 0 Default Next Hop Router 16 16 11 3 Status Configuration NOT CHANGED Enter s System Name a LANi Addr m LANiI Mask i LAN2 Addr j LAN2 Mask r iDef Next Hop p Apply g Ignore b Go Back Enter Command 12 Enter the correct information for LAN1 a LAN2 i Subnet masks m and j Default next hop router r and System name s as required Enter p after each change to apply it 13 Enter
251. mand For details refer to Shutting down the system software on page 238 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the BCM1000 for maintenance as described in Shutting down the system hardware on page 239 3 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface P0607659 02 Chapter 18 Adding or replacing a cooling fan 263 4 Remove the fan cable from wherever it is connected Refer to Figure 121 and Figure 122 Figure 121 Remove the fan cable from motherboard pre 2 5 chassis Fan cable Power supply cable SSM board i O SRS KSS SISAS RSS SSDs NSS SSSR lt A negcase oases esos SS SONS OY S Ko SY if C2 O 16 J 1 aA vo LA a v6 a aA 2 GA na RA 8 G 7 1G P UR 4 26 UR a a ze iG 0 x ng Z a a Or Fan connectors Installation and Maintenance Guide 264 Chapter 18 Adding or replacing a cooling fan Note Redundant fans If the fans are piggy backed the back fan connects directly to a power supply connector through a patch connector If the fans are side by side then both fans are connected on the SSM board Fan wires run under the power supply and are connected to J7 or J6 on the SSM board as shown in Figure 122
252. may be added to coordinate character transfer autodial button A memory button that provides one touch dialing out automatic daylight savings time A feature that switches the system to standard or daylight savings time at programmed times Assigns automatic daylight savings time under Daylight time in System programming automatic telephone relocation A feature that maintains personal and system programing for a telephone keep when the telephone gets moved to a different modular jack Enable Automatic Telephone Relocation under Set relocation in System programming auxiliary ringer An external telephone ringer or bell which rings when a line or a telephone rings Enables the auxiliary ringer under Capabilities under System DNs programming Program an auxiliary ringer in Services programming B channel bearer channel An ISDN standard transmission channel used for voice or data transmission Also known as a media channel Installation and Maintenance Guide 316 Glossary background music A feature that plays music from the speaker of your telephone Background Music is available when you attach a music source to the system and enable the feature under Feature settings in System programming base station This is the radio telephony unit that allows communication between wireless handsets such as Companion or DECT to the Business Communications Manager system basic rate interface BRI An ISDN interface th
253. mber and type of telephones and related equipment you have determines which station media bay modules you require Note If you are adding any extensions in the near future include them in your calculations 1 In Table 11 record the number of each type of extension you have 2 Use the number of extensions and the number of extensions per module to determine how many modules you need Table 11 Station media bay modules required Number of Number of Type of media bay extensions Number of Type of extension extensions module per module modules required Digital extensions DSM 16 16 DSM 16 Digital extensions DSM 32 32 DSM 32 Digital extensions 4X16 16 DSM 16 Analog extensions ASM 8 8 ASM 8 Digital extensions are digital or IP telephones For a list of the telephones that can be used with the Business Communications Manager system refer to Telephones and adapters on page 103 Analog extensions include single line telephones fax machines and modems Installation and Maintenance Guide 114 Chapter 4 Selecting the media bay modules for your system An example for North America e If you require 12 digital extensions you need one DSM 16 e If you require 24 digital extensions you need one DSM 32 Note If you require only a few analog extensions you can use a Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to connect these devices to your DSM 16 DSM 32 or the DSM connector on a 4X
254. media bay module to the portable handsets three handsets per base station e Portable handsets based on T7316 M7310 functionality including six line buttons and a two line display NetVision system components The NetVision and NetVision Data telephones provide an internet telephone connection to the Business Communications Manager These eMobility wireless telephones are based on an enhanced implementation of H 323 referred to as H 323 and IEEE 802 11 protocol for wireless LANs The NetVision system consists of the following components e Access point provides the radio link between the NetVision telephones and an internet connection This hardware is ordered separately and comes with complete installation instructions This component is not specific to Business Communications Manager e Portable handset communicates through the internet to the Business Communications Manager This handset is wireless However the access point through which it communications connects to the internet The handset appears as an IP telephone to the Business Communications Manager P0607659 02 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware 107 e Handset administration A Business Communications Manager running version 2 5 Feature Pack 1 or newer software provides a link to the NetVision Phone Administrator NVPA This application which is specific to the Business Communications Manager resides on your computer It provides a set of handset
255. media processing of the voice channels for the Business Communications Manager system including the VoIP trunks and IP based telephones This card also offers connections for auxiliary features including external customer supplied hardware for paging and music on hold Figure 19 shows the location of the MSC on the BCM1000 Figure 19 MSC optional equipment ports BCM1000 MSC faceplate details DS256 jack Cl Auxiliary ringer __ Page relay ___ Page output aaa Music on hold input Warning External equipment connected to the auxiliary ringer page relay page output AN and music on hold interfaces must use safety extra low voltage SELV All four interfaces are SELV and the external equipment connected to these interfaces must be SELV If these interfaces are not SELV you must use external line isolation units LIU The MSC faceplate offers the following optional connections e DS256 connector The BCM1000e connects to the BCM1000 base unit through the DS256 jack on the MSC faceplate The DS256 cable to make this connection is provided with the purchase of a Business Communications Manager e1000 e Auxiliary ringer jack The BCM1000 uses the auxiliary ringer jack to control the cadence of an auxiliary ringer customer su
256. mmunications Manager telephone to the ATA 2 port b Check that the connection from ATA 2 to the Business Communications Manager hardware is functioning correctly the telephone has dial tone Checking for trunk line dial tone to the ATA 2 Use the following steps to check for trunk line dial tone to the ATA 2 1 a A WO N Disconnect ATA 2 external line from the Business Communications Manager hardware and connect the data device directly to this external line Make a call If the problem continues the device or the external line is possibly at fault Plug the device into a different line If the problem continues the device is possibly at fault For more information about ATA 2 contact your customer service representative P0607659 02 237 Chapter 16 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades When you need to replace or update a piece of hardware on the Business Communications system you must ensure the system is safely disconnected from the trunk lines and all electrical connections are disconnected To replace interior components on these units you can remove the top to access the inside of the units Also if you are replacing any of the PCI cards base unit only or any of the media bay modules you may need to remove the front bezel of the unit Figure 99 provides an overview of the process for preparing the Business Communications Manager hardware for maintenance or upgrade procedures Figure 99 P
257. module The Fiber Expansion media bay module FEM connects a maximum of six Norstar expansion modules to the Business Communications Manager system These connections provide a quick way to upgrade a Norstar system to a Business Communications Manager system The front bezel of the FEM has six connectors These connections are made using fiber cables between the FEM module and the Norstar expansion modules Beside each connector an LED lights when the fiber port is enabled The module has port status LEDs beside each port as well as the usual power and status LEDs Figure 35 shows the front of the FEM module Each port that is turned on consumes one DS30 channel Figure 35 FEM LEDs Port 4 Power LED Status LED Port 1 Port 5 Port 2 Port 6 Port 3 P0607659 02 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware 103 Telephones and adapters The following telephones and devices can be used with the Business Communications Manager system Business Series Terminal T7100 one line display one memory button without indicator T7000 not shown International only four memory buttons without display or indicators Business Series Terminal T7316 two line display three display buttons 16 memory buttons with indicators eight memory buttons without indicators Norstar M7324 two line display with three display buttons 24 memory buttons with indicators Options two CAP mod
258. module on the system FEM connects a maximum of six Norstar expansion The switches on the FEM are used to turn Fiber Expansion media bay module modules fiber ports on and off The FEM does not work correctly if you set these switches using the rules used for other media bay modules DECT media bay module region specific application Like the 4X16 module the DECT module is both a trunk and station module The DECT media bay module has eight RJ45 jacks that connect to base stations deployed around the coverage area It also supports four ISDN lines which allow a maximum of eight simultaneous call paths This module has a wizard that sets up the module programming to match with the Business Communications Manager programming for the handsets Refer to the DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide for specific procedures to install the base stations to set up the DECT module firmware and to subscribe the handsets to the Business Communications Manager Figure 34 shows a front view of the module As well as a Power and Status LED the DECT module has LEDs that indicate the Run state and base station power state Figure 34 DECT faceplate with eight RJ45 connectors Each RJ45 jack can connect to one base station Status LED Base station power LED DECT media bay module Run LED Installation and Maintenance Guide 102 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware Fiber Expansion media bay
259. modules 274 redundant housing 274 replacing 269 replacing single source power 269 replacing the module 277 RPI 194 securing in the housing 271 switch 160 update to redundant 272 power up 240 PRI DTM description 74 DTM module 94 line types 302 process map hard disk replacement 243 installing a media bay modules 151 replace single source power 269 replacing memory 287 replacing modules 156 replacing the fan 261 Professional Call Center 81 programming moving telephones 190 programming the Companion 192 proprietary extension cable 207 protective ground 166 PSTN line 165 service provider 111 PSU RPI requirements 194 publications related 63 PuTTY 15 Q Q SIG Voice Networking requires keycode 80 QoS Routing modem card backup 75 software 83 quick configuration 170 R rack installing in 123 129 installing the BCM1000 124 mounting bracket installation 123 radio base station Companion 105 DECT 106 NetVision 106 T7406 106 radio reception 9 radio frequency interference 4 RAID board cable connections 255 clip 253 connections 248 upgrading to 252 RAM 70 receive 170 receive clock 165 166 167 receive data 165 166 167 reconnect power 155 red LED 161 262 redundant fan cable adapter 266 label 265 replacing 265 redundant fans replacing 261 redundant power supply installing 274 updating 272 region setting 173 regions caller ID 297 CallPilot 24 companding law 24 297 Installati
260. n part of a new system installation Continue with system initialization Use the Unified Manager to identify the module to the system Installation and Maintenance Guide 152 Chapter 8 Installing media bay modules Shutting down the system Before you perform any maintenance procedures read the following warnings to ensure you and your system are properly protected Warning If you are installing a new system or new BCM1000 or BCM1000e refer CP to Chapter 11 Installing telephones and peripherals on page 185 for instructions T about installing a new system before you connect the system to the ac power outlet Warning DO NOT continue with module installation until you ensure the BCM1000 and BCM1000e are set to the correct voltages version 2 0 systems with standard power supply Warning Failure to follow procedures to properly disconnect the BCM1000 and AN BCM1000e can result in module or system damage Warning Ensure you are properly grounded before handling modules or any components that are part of the Business Communications Manager hardware This section describes the recommended procedure for shutting down the Business Communications Manager system prior to installing new modules 1 Ifyou are adding or replacing a module in an active system follow these steps first Choose System Click the Logoff menu and then click Shutdown Click the Yes button Wait until the Status
261. n switched unobstructed outlet within 1 5 m 5 ft of the BCM1000 The supplied power must be a dedicated 110 V 120 V ac nominal or 220 V 230 V ac nominal 50 60 Hz 15 A minimum service with a third wire safety ground The third wire safety ground provides shock protection and avoids electromagnetic interference A Danger Risk of electric shock The safety of this product requires connection to an outlet with a third wire ground Use only with a three wire power cord and outlet Caution Check ground connections Ensure that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metal water pipe system if present are connected together If these ground connections are not connected together contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority Do not try to make the connections yourself The BCM1000 power cord is 1 5 m 5 ft long You can connect the server to a power bar with a maximum length of 2 m 6 5 ft including power bar You must use a power bar approved by an appropriate National Test Body with a third wire ground Do not use an extension cord between the server and the power bar or between the power bar and the electrical outlet The cable between the BCM1000e and the BCM1000 is supplied with the expansion unit Do not use any other cables or connectors Internal wiring requirements This section describes the requirements for a digital loop and an analog loop withi
262. n the system Digital loop The following parameters must be met for a digital loop one two or three twisted pair cable s per telephone dc loop resistance of less than 64 Q cable length 0 5 mm or 24 AWG less than 300 m 975 ft use of a station auxiliary power supply SAPS for loops 300 m 975 ft to 1200 m 3900 ft In North America the SAPS must be a CSA or UL approved Class 2 power source In Europe the SAPS must be a Class II power source and CE marked no bridge taps P0607659 02 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM1000 121 Analog loop The following parameters must be met for an analog loop maximum dc loop resistance of 208 Q maximum cable length 0 5 mm or 24 AWG of 1220 m 4000 ft System equipment and supplies Use the following checklists to ensure that you have all the required equipment Basic hardware The Business Communications Manager system consists of some combination of the following hardware BCM1000 BCM1000e media bay modules telephones and other communication devices such as fax machines cabling for connections between hardware units You can place a maximum of three media bay modules in the BCM1000 You must install an BCM1000e if you require more than three media bay modules Optional equipment The following equipment can be added to the system to support specific requirements beyond the base unit Station auxiliary power supply SAPS Central answering position CAP o
263. n using 0 5 mm wire 24 AWG select a location within 800 m 2 600 ft of the BCM1000 Allow 12 5 cm 5 in clearance for the line jack terminal jack and power supply connector Screw two 4 mm 8 screws into the wall 130 mm 5 1 4 in away from each other Leave 6 mm 1 4 in of the two screws showing 4 Align the slots at the back of the ATA 2 unit over the screws Push the unit against the wall The line jack terminal jack and power supply connector must be at the top of the ATA 2 Refer to Figure 89 Installation and Maintenance Guide 222 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters Figure 89 ATA 2 back view AR LA Mounting keyhole slots Determining the ATA 2 extension number You must determine the extension number for every ATA 2 before you can perform administration 1 Connect a single line telephone to the ATA 2 2 Lift the handset 3 If you do not hear dial tone press LINK 9 to access an intercom line Note LINK appears as RECALL on some telephones If you are using a telephone without a LINK or RECALL button refer to the ATA 2 User Guide for details Some phones have a Flash button which is the equivalent to LINK or RECALL 4 Dial the extension number of an Business Communications Manager telephone with a display If you hear a busy signal repeat steps 3 and 4 using a different extension number When the telephon
264. nance shutdowns ALWAYS follow this process a Shut down the software through the Unified Manager if possible b Remove all cable connects from the front of the BCM1000 and BCM1000e c Remove power from the BCM1000 and the BCM1000e d DO NOT RECONNECT the cables to the front of the units until the power connection has been restored Connecting wiring to the LAN card LAN card face RJ45 jack Warning Ensure the system is powered up before connecting this cable To connect the LAN card insert the local area network LAN cable into the RJ45 jack on the LAN card For information about the location of the LAN card refer to Figure 58 on page 163 Connect wiring to the WAN card WAN card face ool C RJ48c jack DB26 connector female Warning Ensure the system is powered up before connecting this cable To connect the WAN card using the RJ48C connector insert the wide area network WAN cable into the RJ48C jack on the WAN card For information about the location of the WAN card refer to Figure 58 on page 163 To connect the WAN card using the DB26 connector use an adapter cable to connect the wide area network WAN cable to the DB26 connector on the WAN card These adapter cables are available from your BCM1000 supplier Note Not all systems are equipped with a WAN card P0607659 02 Chapter 9 Starting the system 165 Table 26 DB25 adapter cable 11 13 Table 26 shows the w
265. ncluded in the chapters on setting up modules and DNs in the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide Installation and Maintenance Guide 182 Chapter 10 Wiring the modules 4 Set up any mobile system you are using Ensure the base stations are correctly installed and connected to the appropriate modules on the Business Communications Manager hardware In the case of the NetVision wireless system ensure that the access point is correctly set up to connect to the BCM1000 LAN or WAN Configure and register the handsets according to the instructions provided for each type of system Companion Programming Operations Guide DECT DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide T7406 T7406 Cordless Handset Installation Guide NetVision and NetVision data IP Telephony Configuration Guide FEM wiring A Fiber Expansion module FEM allows you to upgrade from a Norstar system to a Business Communications Manager system by reusing the Norstar expansion modules The expansion modules connect to the FEM module installed on a BCM1000 using the same fiber cable that connected them to the Norstar main housing AN Warning Handling optical fiber cables If the cable is too long ensure that it is coiled correctly Coil excess fiber carefully around the spool provided Do not bend the cable around any tight corners Bends in the fiber cable must not be less than 100 mm in diameter Place the fiber cable
266. necting the coaxial cable To install an outdoor omnidirectional external antenna follow these steps 1 Screw the antenna mounting plate vertically to the exterior wall of the building with lag bolts or other appropriate hardware Figure 83 shows how to fasten the mounting plate Figure 83 Install the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna Canada Mast Connector at the base of the mast a Shroud Plastic plug gt Set screw Exterior wall mounting plate Lag bolts or appropriate mounting hardware _ a YA XK Foel Cable ties A Co axial cable to surge protector on interior wall 2 Feed one end of the coaxial cable up through the bottom of the antenna cover and attach the BNC connector to the base of the mast P0607659 02 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 215 Slide the mast down into the cover until it fits Rotate the mast until the threaded hole in the base of the mast aligns with the set screw hole in the cover Tighten the set screw 5 Route the coaxial cable along the bottom edge of the plate between the cover and the wall plate Note The total length of the coaxial cables from the outdoor antenna to the base station must not exceed 10 m 33 ft 6 Tie the cable to the mounting plate 7 Insert the plastic plug into the base of the cover to keep moisture out 8 Feed the coaxial cable through the wall to the surge protector
267. nections required Figure 61 Ethernet crossover cable 3TD 3TD 6TD 6TD 1RD 1RD 2RD 2RD Configuring your computer You must configure your computer before you use it to connect to the Business Communications Manager system Note Your interface can differ depending on what version of system software you are using The task in this section is to specify IP and subnet addresses for the computer Click Start Settings Control Panel Double click the Network icon Select your TCP IP adapter and then click the Properties button Click the IP Address tab a WO N Click the Specify an IP address option P0607659 02 Chapter 9 Starting the system 173 In the IP Address field enter 10 10 10 2 In the Subnet Mask field enter 255 255 255 0 Click OK Click OK 0 Click Yes to restart the PC O NO Connecting the Ethernet crossover cable After you configure the computer connect the computer to the BCM1000 in the following manner Shut down the computer Attach one end of the Ethernet crossover cable to the LAN card on the BCM1000 Connect the other end of the cable to the network interface card on your computer Start the computer Log on to the Unified Manager using the default IP address ou Aa QO N Use the Quick Start Wizard to create the system configuration Refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide for details about using the wizard
268. ngle disk BCM1000 running BCM version 3 0 1 3 0 maintenance release you must re initialize the Business Communications Manager After you replace the hard disk and the system has booted up perform the initialization as follows 1 Ensure the Status LED on the Business Communications Manager is lit The Status LED indicates that all services have started and the Business Communications Manager is operating correctly 2 Attach a configuration computer to the base function tray serial port recommended method Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete Note When you replace a hard disk IP configuration data is lost The gt Business Communications Manager IP address defaults to 10 10 10 1 You can access the Business Communications Manager through your local area network using the IP address 10 10 10 1 However if another network terminal uses this IP address conflicts and network problems can arise 3 Access the Business Communications Manager from the configuration terminal using the terminal emulation program Use the Business Communications Manager default IP address 10 10 10 1 4 Enter the terminal emulation program as described in Finding the configuration menus on page 170 The Main Menu should display Figure 1 q r vja OQ N ie c9 V Q am 4 Kan Q 4 am O Q am LL 28 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 1 addendum Figure 1 Main Menu screen Main M
269. nications Manager system Enter the IP address of the Business Communications Manager system and the port number for Business Communications Manager Unified Manager 6800 For example http 10 10 10 1 6800 Click the Configure button Type your user name in the Login box The default user name is supervisor Type your password in the Password box The default password is visor Choose System Click the Logoff menu and then click Shutdown Click the Yes button Wait until the Status changes to Complete It is safe to turn off the system 10 Click the Done button 11 Quit the web browser P0607659 02 Chapter 16 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 239 Shutting down the system hardware After the system has gracefully exited from the software you can shut down the hardware Warning You must remove all of the connections to the Business Communications Manager hardware before you power the system down Failure to disconnect lines before power down can cause damage to the system Follow these steps to ensure a safe shutdown of the system Remove the cables from the front of the BCM1000 and BCM1000e if there is one This 1 includes the data connections on the media services card MSC Mark the cables so you can ensure they get reconnected correctly 2 Disconnect the base unit and expansion unit power cords from the ac outlet Warning You must disconnect power from the BCM1000 after you hav
270. nly with a CSA or UL certified CLASS 2 level C power supply as specified in the user guide Installation and Maintenance Guide Use When using your telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following 1 11 12 13 14 15 16 Read and understand all instructions Follow the instructions marked on the product Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for cleaning Do not use this product near water for example near a bath tub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do not place this product on an unstable cart stand or table The product may fall causing serious damage to the product This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register This product should not be placed in a built in installation unless proper ventilation is provided Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product but have it sent to a qualified service person when some service or rep
271. nna vertically For more information refer to Figure 78 on page 208 Use 8 12 mm to 50 mm in to 2 in screws to install the antenna bracket and lightning surge protector bracket to the wall Always ensure that the antenna is clear of any adjacent obstruction or metal objects If you use more than one external antenna at a cell center separate the antennas at by least 1 m 40 in to avoid radio interference problems When running the coaxial cable inside or outside be careful not to damage the cable Damage to the cable affects its performance The minimum recommended bending radius is 200 mm 8 in The coaxial cable length must not exceed 10 m 33 ft Use RG 58AU coaxial cables to connect the antennas to the base stations You can attach a proprietary extension cable between the lightning surge protector and the antenna or between the lightning surge protector and the base station Make sure you keep the total cable length as short as possible and use only the recommended extension cable when necessary You must install a lightning surge protector for each external antenna Warning FCC requirements In the United States the FCC requires that you connect only approved antennas to Companion base stations electrical storm Caution Do not install the outdoor antenna or the lightning surge protector during an Always turn off the base station power before connecting the coaxial cable of an outdoor antenna Always
272. ntains four PEC Is If you want to start using IP telephony resources you need to upgrade to PEC IIIs This chapter describes the processes for removing and replacing a PEC module Figure 144 provides an overview of the process for replacing the PEC Figure 144 Process Map PEC replacement Ensure you have a current data backup Do a software shutdown Set up unit for maintenance Install the PEC Remove the top cover Restore unit to operation Warning Incorrect handling of the PEC during installation could result in loss of telephony programming Do not touch the MSC housing at any point with the PEC module when you are inserting it into the card slot If required remove PEC module from MSC Test system Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Caution Use only a Nortel Networks approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts P0607659 02 Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 285 Removing PECs The following steps describe the process for removing PECs from a BCM1000 MSC 1 Ensure you have a current data backup of your system 2 Shut down the system using the Shutdown command
273. nting bracket to the BCM1000 1 ne fs OOO00d0d080 dl Installation and Maintenance Guide 124 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM1000 Installing the BCM1000 into the rack After the brackets are installed perform the following steps to install the BCM1000 in the equipment rack Determine the location in the rack you want to install the base unit Position the base unit in the rack Align the holes in the rack mounting bracket with the holes in the equipment rack rails A Q N Fasten the rack mounting brackets to the rack using four screws not supplied Refer to Figure 41 Figure 41 Fasten the BCM1000 to the equipment rack o o o o o p Q A o a o ITEY 4 om o k 0 O Q00 OY P0607659 02 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM1000 125 Installing the BCM1000 on the wall To mount the BCM1000 on the wall you need e two rack mounting brackets or a wall mount bracket kit e four 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screws e a plywood backboard 2 cm 3 4 in thick Caution Refer to Environment checklist on page 119 for acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM1000 Follow these steps to install the bracket Note You may use the two rack mounting brackets to do a wall installation Or you can order a wall mount kit which contains a bracket that runs the entire length of
274. ntroducing the Business Communications Manager e IPX Routing Business Communications Manager 2 5 supports the following IPX Routing protocols in a NetWare environment static routing RIP Routing Information Protocol SAP Service Advertising Protocol e NAT Network Address Translation Business Communications Manager 2 5 supports both static and dynamic NAT for a number of packet types and protocols NAT is a network security feature that translates the IP addresses used within your private network to different IP addresses known to internet users outside your private network e Policy Management Business Communications Manager 2 5 allows you to implement classes of service and assign priority levels to different types of traffic using the DiffServ network architecture You can configure policies that monitor the characteristics of traffic for example its source destination and protocol and perform a controlling action on the traffic when certain user defined characteristics are matched e VPN Virtual Private Networks Business Communications Manager 2 5 uses the PPTP point to point tunneling protocol and IPSec IP security tunneling protocols to create secure extranets These secure extranets provide safe transport of data to and from the Business Communications Manager using the public data network PDN P0607659 02 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 85 Business Comm
275. o ooo 2000000 ooo0oo0o 3 Hang the RPI on the two screws and tighten the screws 4 Install the remaining two screws Installation and Maintenance Guide 196 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 5 Feed the power cord through the bottom of the RPI and route it through the clip and around the strain relief support Figure 72 shows how to route the power cord Figure 72 RPI components Jumper lead to PSU 2 LL Gotten cx plates PSU 2 if equipped The RPI 8 has grounding straps and plates fitted to allow an upgrade to an RPI 16 Grounding strap Ferrite rings TCM power Up to 16 outputs Strain relief support Power cord Power supply cabling Connection board Clip Route the power cord to the input power socket just to the left of PSU 1 Connect the plug to the socket Follow the appropriate wiring instructions in the wiring charts in the next section Wiring the and connecting the RPT Caution Do not apply power to the RPI until its installation and wiring are complete 9 After the cable is wired correctly connect the RPI power cord to the ac outlet 10 Label each RPI P0607659 02 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 197 Wiring the and connecting the RPI The maximum two way DC loop resistance for power pairs including interconnections fo
276. o determine how many base stations and how many PSUs you need for the number of base stations use the following table Table 35 RPI Requirements Base stations RPI 16 and RPI 8 required PSUs required 1 8 1 RPI 8 1 PSU 9 16 1 RPI 16 2 PSUs 17 24 1 RPI 16 and 1 RPI 8 3 PSUs 25 32 2 RPI 16 4 PSUs Mounting the RPI unit When you mount the RPI unit ensure you follow these guidelines e To provide acceptable ventilation and to prevent overheating leave a clearance of a minimum of 125 mm 5 in around the RPI e If you are installing two RPIs one above the other leave a clearance of a minimum of 300 mm 12 in between them to provide acceptable ventilation and to prevent overheating e Install RPIs a minimum of 300 mm 12 in from the ceiling P0607659 02 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 195 This procedure explains how to mount the RPI unit 1 Partially screw in two 10 50 mm 2 in screws using the dimensions shown in Figure 70 Figure 70 RPI mounting holes 25 mm 325 mm l in eee 13 in k t gt A O 50 mm 2 in Pare eee 300 mm 12 in Y 2 Open the cover with a screwdriver a Use the screwdriver to push in and then down to release the latch on the right side b Remove the cover by lifting it up Refer to Figure 71 Figure 71 Opening the RPI cover LEZ AAA ooo ooo
277. o request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or an electrician as appropriate Notice The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5 This Class A device complies with Part 68 amp Part 15 of the FCC Rules and ICES 003 Class A Canadian EMI requirements Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Do not attempt to repair this equipment If you experience trouble write for warranty and repair information Nortel Networks 30 Norelco Drive Weston Ontario M9L 2X6 Canada US Regulations please read carefully Federal Communications Commission FCC Notice FCC registra
278. o the front of the unit Installation and Maintenance Guide 160 Chapter 9 Starting the system Checking power and wiring The Business Communications Manager system is a global product Therefore you must ensure that the power supply is correct for your location e 2 0 BCM1000 hardware has a standard power supply which requires manual adjustment for the voltage by setting a switch located on the face of the power supply e 2 5 BCM1000 hardware has a standard power supplies and redundant power supplies which adjust automatically to the required voltage Follow this procedure to check the voltage and wiring and power up the system 1 Check all wiring before connecting power to the BCM1000 units i Warning Connecting power Always connect power to the BCM1000 and BCM1000e if there is one before you reconnect the cabling to the front of the units 2 Connect the BCM1000 power cord to an electrical outlet that is a non switchable third wire ground ac outlet If you use a power bar plug the power cords into the power bar and connect the power bar to the ac outlet 3 Connect the BCM1000e power cord to an electrical outlet that is a non switchable third wire ground ac outlet Danger Do not fasten power supply cords Do not fasten the BCM1000 or BCM1000e power supply cords to any building surface P0607659 02 Chapter 9 Starting the system 161 Checking system power and status After you connect p
279. odules The existing ASM8 modules can also utilize FDD Note Devices that share a DS30 channel must be identical Use two DSM 16 modules in full double density mode on a single DS30 channel Likewise use two DSM 32 modules in full double density mode on a single DS30 channel a 4 sj tjm O c9 O am 4 Kan Q 4 amm O p Q am LL 34 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 addendum Full double density means that instead of a DSM16 module occupying a full DS30 bus the DSM16 can be set to double density so that it occupies only half the bus allowing you to install a second DSM16 set to double density with offset 1 This doubles the available telephone lines from 16 to 32 Similarly where the DSM 32 required two DS30s if the DSM32 is set to double density the module only requires one DS30 bus to support all 32 lines The ASM8 requires no special settings to take advantage of double density You can simply install four modules on one DS30 bus with the dip switches set to the four offsets The exception is for DS30 06 and 07 if they are set to PDD In that instance you can still only install two ASMB8s per bus Figure 12 shows how much of a DS30 bus each station module requires Figure 12 Space requirements for station media bay modules on a per DS30 configuration offset set to O 1 DSM 32 q Single density mode 2 DS30 buses 1 DS30 bus offset set to O per 2 DS30s 1 DSM 16
280. odules network cards or MSC card Danger Electrical shock hazards Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunications network and ac mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the BCM1000 and the BCM1000e if there is one must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground In addition all unused slots must have blank faceplates installed The covers on all units must be in place at the completion of any servicing Figure 62 provides an overview of the process for connecting trunk and station wiring to the Business Communications Manager media bay modules Installation and Maintenance Guide 176 Chapter 10 Wiring the modules Figure 62 Process map Trunk and station wiring process map Media bay modules installed Wire cables to telco demarcation block Connect cables to appropriate trunk modules Wire internal 25 pair cables to station set distribution BIX block for your building Connect amphenol cable to F appropriate station modules Continue with setup procedures Module wiring warnings i Warning Electrical shock warning The Business Communications Manager media bay modules have been Safety approved for installation into BCM1000 and BCM1000e It is the responsibility of the installer and user to ensure that installation of the Business Communications Manager hardware does not compromise existing Safety approvals BEFORE YOU OPEN the BCM1000
281. of another computer system or process For example a workstation requesting the contents of a file from a file server is a client of the file server cold start A cold start occurs when you lose all system programming such as after a power failure or if the system was down for maintenance and you want to start it up again Companion portable telephone Hand held wireless telephones that allow complete mobility within the reach of Companion base stations or an external antenna Portable telephones provide many but not all standard system features They also share some of the same programming as desk telephones Installation and Maintenance Guide 318 Glossary Companion Wireless The name for the communication systems which use radio technology to transmit and receive signals between its components and the Business Communications Manager Conference A feature that allows the user to establish a three way call D channel Data channel An ISDN standard transmission channel which is packet switched The channel is used for call setup signaling and data transmission data link connection indentifier DLCI The DLCT is used to identify a PVC in frame relay networks DECT cordless telephone system Hand held wireless telephones that allow complete mobility within the reach of DECT base stations Portable telephones provide many but not all standard system features They also share some of the same programming as desk t
282. of eight analog public switched telephone lines to the Business Communications Manager system Only available for North American systems See also 4X16 media bay module on page 99 BRI Basic Rate Interface media bay module on page 96 Connects a maximum of four ISDN BRI interfaces Note The DECT module contains the equivalent of a BRI module and does not require a separate module for trunk line functions GATM Global Analog Trunk Module Connects either four GATM4 or eight GATM8 analog public switched telephone lines to the Business Communications Manager system Only North America Taiwan UK and Australia are supported Modules installed in BCM 3 5 systems can be set to automatically download firmware from the Business Communications Manager This allows for firmware updates as required The Global Analog Trunk Module GATM provides an interface to the telephone company analog lines for the Business Communication Manager The module supports both pulse and tone dialing Caller ID and Supervision Disconnect in various markets UK profile configuration note The GATM does not support Earth Calling even though the option appears in the Unified Manager Lines record Only a FEM connected to a Norstar analog trunk module supports this feature BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide P0607659 02 BCM1000 BCM 3 5 addendum 17 The figure below shows the front of the GATM module Not
283. om Not all systems can support all cards Figure 142 BCM1000 LAN card LEDs N RTEL NETWORKS oooo 8 9 feo I o of a 000 Jeng PCI Device s Table 48 BCM1000 PCI LED states LED Nae Label Description Green LED On Green LED Flash Green LED Off 1 PCI Device Device is present Driver is active Driver is not running Device is not present WAN Port 1 2 PCI Device Device is present Driver is active Driver is not running Device is not present WAN Port 2 3 PCI Device Device is present Driver is active Driver is not running Device is not present 4 PCI Device Device is present Driver is active Driver is not running Device is not present 5 PCI Device Device is present Driver is active Driver is not running Device is not present Note The MSC is not field replaceable P0607659 02 Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 283 Follow these steps to remove the LAN WAN or modem cards 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shutting down the system software on page 238 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Set up the BCM1000 for maintenance as described in Shutting down the system hardware on pag
284. ompanion DECT Primary Rate Interface PRI An ISDN interface that uses 23 B channels and a D channel 23B D Prime line The line the system selects for your telephone when you lift the receiver press the Handsfree Mute button or use an external dialing feature Assign a Prime Line to a telephone under Line access in System DNs programming Priority Call If you get a busy signal when you call a person in your office you can interrupt that person for an urgent call Enable this feature for a telephone under Capabilities in System DNs programming Private branch exchange PBX A PBX is a telephone system within an enterprise that switches calls between enterprise users on local lines while allowing all users to share a certain number of external telephone lines The main purpose of a PBX is to save the cost of requiring a line for each user to the telephone company central office since the PBX is owned and operated by the enterprise rather than the telephone company Installation and Maintenance Guide 326 Glossary protocol A set of rules and procedures for exchanging data between computers or Business Communications Managers on a network or through the Internet Proxy A server that acts on behalf of another pulse tone dialing Pulse is the traditional method of dialing used by rotary dial or push button single line telephones Tone dialing allows telephones to communicate with other devices such as answering ma
285. on With the addition of Door Opening Controller DOC hardware the user can also open the door using a telephone display key or release digit on the telephone dial pad Refer to the BST Doorphone Installation and Configuration Guide for details about configuring the system and installing the hardware e This release of firmware also introduces support for a Universal Power Supply UPS This third party hardware provides short term power backup in case of a main power failure on your Business Communications Manager The UPS has separate installation and configuration documentation specific to Business Communications applications Also the unit comes with manufacturer instructions T7316E Business Series Terminal and KIMs The T7316E BST telephone has a two line display three display keys 16 memory keys with indicators eight memory buttons without indicators This telephone has handsfree ability accessed from a button located under the dial pad Also under the dial pad are a mute button that mutes for all features and a headset button which allows the user to attach a headset and direct the call to the headset or the handset without needing to disconnect the headset In programming the handsfree feature must be set to Auto for these features to work correctly T7316E Handsfree Headset On this telephone model the current incoming call on this telephone defaults to the voice path last used For example if you answered the
286. on and Maintenance Guide 142 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches Table 17 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the resulting line assignments Table 17 DTM switch settings E1 and UK PRI Enter these switch settings To Enter these switch settings To Select asion Select asian D520 A D529 hers channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 i channel 1 2 3 4 5j 6j gt lines lines on jon lon fon on jon on on on on 2 211 240 5 Jott for 11 fon Jon jon jon jon on jon lon on on on jon fon on on on on on on 4 for 151 180 e7 fot lott 61 90 If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available BRI switch settings You can install a maximum of three BRI modules per DS30 channel on the offsets indicated below Table 18 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the resulting line assignments Table 18 BRIM S T switch settings Enter these switch To Enter these switch z Saci Select settings assign Salas Select settings TO ees DS30 9 g DS30 g these h offset these h offset li on 1 2 3 41 5 6 lines cu 1 2 3 4 5 6 nes on on on on on on on on on on 0 211 218 0 oft off 121 128 on on on on on on on on 2 1 off 219 226 5 1 off off off 129 136 gt on on on on on 507 04 gt on on on 197 144 on on on on on on on on on on 0 off 181 188 0 off
287. on and Maintenance Guide 344 Index ISDN line services support 298 languages 23 296 line protocol 26 301 mobility services 25 299 modules 25 299 system defaults 304 registration information for telephone company 5 registration number tag 7 relay jack external paging 76 228 Remote Power Interconnect see RPI remove cables 152 cables before shutdown 239 hard disk 244 LAN card 282 power 152 repair authorization 4 authorized supplier 6 returning hard disk 246 replace fan 261 hard disk 243 hard disks 244 media bay modules 156 memory DIMM 287 power supply 269 telephone different types 294 telephones 293 telephones same type 293 tools 237 request to send 165 166 167 169 requirements electrical 120 electrical ground 120 environment 119 installation tools 122 restart hardware 240 software 241 restrictions antenna installation 211 return loss 218 returning hard disk for repair 246 RF interference 4 RG 58 U coaxial cable 211 RG 58A U coaxial cables 207 ring 227 228 229 230 ring indicator 169 ringer equivalence number 7 217 Ringer Equivalence Number REN 8 ringer auxiliary 227 ringing signal 217 RJ11 jacks 95 99 177 205 RJ45 jack 164 165 177 RJ48C jack 75 96 177 router 168 router interface QoS Routing 83 routing network 83 RPI backup power requirements 193 cabling distance 197 clearance 194 Companion base station components 196 connecting 197 input conn
288. on modules Module type What it does Availability DSM 16 Digital Station media bay module DSM 32 Digital Station media bay module Connects a maximum of 16 digital telephones Connects a maximum of 32 digital telephones to the Business Communications Manager system 4X16 Combination 4 line CTM and DSM16 4x16 Media Bay Module 4X16 media bay module Connects a maximum of four CLID lines for a maximum of 16 digital telephones Only available for North American systems This module can be combined with CTMs on the same DS30 channel Also refer to Caller ID Trunk media bay module on page 95 ASM8 Analog Station media bay module Connects a maximum of eight analog devices to the Business Communications Manager system Only available for North American systems You can add a maximum of two ASMs to your system Installation and Maintenance Guide 98 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware Digital Station media bay module Three types of media bay modules support digital telephones on the Business Communications Manager Each module has a minimum of one amphenol connector on the faceplate This section describes the two DSM modules Refer to Figure 31 e Digital Station media bay modules DSM 16 support 16 digital telephones e Digital Station media bay modules DSM 32 support 32 digital telephones through two amphenol connectors e 4X16 supports 16
289. ons may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas P0607659 02 Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or an electrician Network Connection Canada and US Table 1 Interface harmonized standards Interface Harmonized Standard Description CTM Industry Canada CS03 FCC Part 68 Analog terminal device DTM Industry Canada CS03 FCC Part 68 T1 and Primary Rate ISDN BRI Industry Canada CS03 FCC Part 68 Basic Rate ISDN WAN Industry Canada CS03 FCC Part 68 T1 Hearing Aid Compatibility Business Communications Manager telephones are hearing aid compatible as defined in Section 68 316 of Part 68 FCC Rules Electromagnetic Compatibility Business Communications Manager equipment meets all FCC Part 15 Class A radiated and conducted emissions requirements Business Communications Manager does not exceed the Class A limits for radiated and conducted emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of Industry Canada Telephone Company Registration It is u
290. ons Guide e Figure 64 shows the wiring pinout for a CTM a CTM8 or the CTM jacks on a 4X16 module to connect to the service provider All the modules have an auxiliary jack the CTM8 has two Do not attempt to plug digital equipment into this jack Figure 64 CTM RJ11 wiring array CTM connector Auxiliary jack Pin connection d L L 3 Ring RJ11 sockets 4 Tip The CTM 8 has eight RJ11 jacks including two auxiliary jacks The 4X16 media bay module has four RJ11 jacks Installation and Maintenance Guide 178 Chapter 10 Wiring the modules e Figure 65 shows the wiring pin out for a BRI to the service provider BRI loop set to T Warning The BRI must only be connected to an NT1 provided by the service provider The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV to Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV barrier This diagram also applies to an S Loop BRI allowing connection to such S Loop devices as video phones terminal adapters and Grp 3 Fax machines Figure 65 BRI RJ45 wiring array BRI connector Pin connection System side 1 not used 2 not used 3 RX TX TL RJA5 sockets 4 1X RX 5 TX RX 87654321 6 RX TX 7 not used 8 not used Insert the connector into the jack on the module You can now use the Unified Manager to
291. ons Manager to be part of a LAN or WAN network Refer to the next section for specifics e Attendant Console Setup and Operation Guide and Attendant Console User Guide Attendant Console requires keycode provides centralized call management and call activity reporting to a business The three components of this application create a system that communicates with the Business Communications Manager provides call management options and reports how incoming calls are handled within a business This application is run on a separate computer from the one you use to manage the Business Communications Manager system e Call Center Agent Guide and Call Center Supervisor Guide Nortel Networks Call Center Agents requires keycode allows the addition of a specific number of call center agents to your system Comes in versions for one four eight 16 32 and 64 seat authorization codes P0607659 02 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 81 Call Center Set Up and Operation Guide Nortel Networks Call Center requires keycode this Automatic Call Distribution ACD system provides tools for handling incoming calls to an agent network The application also provides administration supervision and reporting tools Nortel Networks Professional Call Center upgrade requires keycode this is an expanded version of the basic Call Center application Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide Nortel Net
292. ons company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of the system If this happens the telecommunications company will give you advance notice in order for you to make any necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service Repairs In the event of equipment malfunction all repairs to certified equipment will be performed by an authorized supplier Canadian Regulations please read carefully Notice The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the P0607659 02 7 telecommunications company cause t
293. options where you specify the features and settings for each handset This file is then uploaded by the handset through a serial cable from your computer The Business Communications IP Telephony Configuration Guide describes how to integrate this telephone into the Business Communications Manager system Symbol provides a user manual that describes the handset based features and how they work The NetVision Telephone Feature Card provided on your Business Communications Manager CD describes how to use the Business Communications Manager features that can be accessed by the handset Note The NetVision handsets can be configured to act as a stand alone telephone either providing a point for target line calls or with full call and receive capability although some of the features are not available It can also be twinned with stationary telephones to provide mobile coverage of one or more stationary telephones This handset has no memory buttons Instead a pre programmed display menu provides access to Business Communications Manager features Installation and Maintenance Guide 108 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware P0607659 02 109 Chapter 3 Auxiliary requirements You require a personal computer to run the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager application You use Unified Manager to configure and manage the Business Communications Manager system through an internet link between your computer and the Busines
294. or 2 over one DS30 Bus using two DS30 buses GATM8s max of 2 GATM4s 1 GATM8 offset 0 2 offsets _ offset 0 and 1 offset 2 is empty 4 per DS30 1 GATM8 channel offset 2 14X16 module offset 3 on the 4 GATMs a maximum of first DS30 bus per DS30 two GATM8s per bus channel P0607659 02 BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide 18 BCM1000 BCM 3 5 addendum GATM switch settings There are two sets of DIP switches located on the rear of the GATM module The left set allows you to determine the DS30 bus and offset for the module The right set of switches allows you to manually configure a country profile operation which is required for earlier versions of software However BCM 3 5 software supports downloadable firmware for the module for the North America Taiwan UK and Australia telephone profiles To allow the GATM to download the parameters for these countries and to allow for firmware upgrades set all the country DIP switches to 0 zero off factory default The MSC telephony profile you choose must support the appropriate country setting to ensure that the correct firmware installs Rear of GATM For BCM 3 5 software ensure all switches are off 12345678 Country select Mode select The table below lists the possible DIP switch settings for the Mode and Country DIP switches Table 2 Global Analog Tr
295. or BCM1000e ensure that the cables are unplugged from the front of the unit and the unit is disconnected from the ac power source Station modules The ports on these modules are meant to be connected only to approved digital telephones and peripherals with the proper cables on a protected internal system Do not connect any telephones to wiring that runs outside of the building Read and follow the installation instructions carefully P0607659 02 Chapter 10 Wiring the modules 177 Connecting media bay modules to Service Providers To connect DTM CTM CTM8 4X16 or BRI media bay modules to the network follow these steps 1 On the front of the module locate the RJ48C socket DTM RJ45 sockets BRI or the RJ11 sockets CTM and 4X16 modules 2 Wire one end of the cable to the telco demarcation blocks of the building e Figure 63 shows the wiring pinouts for a DTM to connect to a service provider Figure 63 DTM RJ48C wiring array DTM connector O O OO 12345678 a Transmit to network 4 Tring To network To plug Receive from 1 Rring network 2 Rtip RJ48C jack 3 Rshield 5 Ttip 6 Tshield Warning If you are using a service provider channel service unit CSU you must disable the Business Communications Manager system internal CSU using Business Communications Manager Unified Manager For more information refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operati
296. or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Important Safety Instructions The following safety instructions cover the installation and use of the Product Read carefully and retain for future reference Installation Warning To avoid electrical shock hazard to personnel or equipment damage observe A the following precautions when installing telephone equipment 1 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm 2 Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations 3 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface 4 Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product This symbol on the product is used to identify the following important information Use o
297. ord BCM1000 ro Single line telephone ATA 2 Line loop resistance Terminal loop resistance 135 ohms maximum 1300 ohms maximum Figure 87 shows the pinouts for the connection cables Figure 87 ATA 2 pin outs Line Jack Terminal Jack TCM Ring B Lead we Jas a The TCM input is not polarity sensitive P0607659 02 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters 221 Follow these steps to connect the cable 1 Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 Terminal jack Refer to Figure 88 Figure 88 ATA 2 top view Ee Lire jack Telephone jack Power supply connector receptacle Connect the other end to your telephone modem or FAX Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 Line jack Connect the other end to an available station port on the BCM1000 or BCM1000e a A Q N For a 120 V or 230 V system plug the DIN connector of the power supply cord into the power supply connector receptacle Plug the adapter into a standard ac outlet Caution In North America the ATA 2 must be powered from a Class 2 power source that is UL and CSA approved In Europe the ATA 2 must be powered from a Class II power source that is CE marked Mounting the ATA 2 After the ATA 2 is correctly connected you can mount the unit on a wall as described in this section 1 Whe
298. ountries Ask your Business Communications Manager sales agent for information about availability Computer components The BCM1000 computing functions are supported by the following hardware e memory 256 MB SDRAM 128 MB SDRAM added for 2 0 upgrades e hard disk 20 GB hard disk 2 5 hardware 8 4 GB hard disk 2 0 hardware e four PCI slots containing one MSC and four possible combinations of WAN LAN and or modem cards e four PEC slots on the MSC each of which can contain one Processor expansion card PEC I or PEC III 2 5 basic 2 5 systems are delivered with two PEC III cards Hardware components The main component of the Business Communications Manager system is the BCM1000 This hardware controls all data and telephony tasks such as call processing voice messaging and data routing Figure 15 shows the functional hardware as seen from the front of the BCM1000 Figure 15 External functional hardware BCM1000 O O NRT HORS O O o oooo 8 8 E lbo Media bay modules O OO hod oO 220000000000 qe gl ooo G Oo Oe123451 80 O i icati o 000 A _ 000 Business Communications Manager O 1 ol 000 C CD C pI eo O l O O O RAID board Mirrored disk systems WAN card Modem card MSC LAN card This is an example of one of fou
299. outlined and shaded square represents one module Switch setting 2 DS30 4x16s channel Offset 3 4 CTMs Offset 0 1 and 2 1 CTM8 Offset 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 CTM settings CTM settings CTM settings Switch settings for 4X1 6 CTM settings Switch settings for 4X16 Installation and Maintenance Guide 310 Appendix B Media bay module combinations Fully loaded setup This section describes a system containing one DSM 32 one DSM 16 two ASM 8s and two DTMs This configuration uses all the DS30 channels with the exception of two offsets Table 63 demonstrates this combination including the switch settings for each module Table 63 DSM combined with 2 DTMs and 2 ASMs Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one module Switch setting DS30 2 channel ASM 8s DTMs Offset 0 and 1 Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 DSM 32 settings on on on on on on DSM 16 settings on on on on off_on ASM8 settings on on on on ASM8B settings on P0607659 01 Appendix B Media bay module combinations 311 DECT combinations This section describes a system containing a DECT module three BRI modules and two DSM 32s This configuration uses all the DS30 channels with the exception of one offset Note DECT systems are not available for all profiles
300. ow these steps carefully to ensure that you return your system to operation without endangering the equipment or yourself 1 Plug the power cords for the BCM1000 and the BCM1000e if there is one back into the ac outlets Note The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the ac power cord System startup takes several minutes to complete 2 Connect the cables to the proper outlets on the media bay modules and the MSC on the server Caution DECT modules If you have a DECT module on your system Plug the base station RJ45 cables into the DECT module one at a time Ensure each base station begins the startup sequence before plugging in the next module 3 Check that the LEDs on the modules are on and static Refer to Checking system power and status on page 161 for a detailed description of the LED states Test existing functions to confirm their operation Configure the module Refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide for details Installation and Maintenance Guide 156 Chapter 8 Installing media bay modules Replacing media bay modules When media bay modules require replacement follow the steps in this section Warning This section describes replacing a module with the same type of module If you A want to replace a module with a different type of module you must treat it as a new installation Refer to Chapter 7 Setting media bay modu
301. ower to the BCM1000 the Power LED on the front of the base unit and expansion unit lights Refer to Figure 57 Once the system services have reactivated the Status LED turns solid green Figure 57 LEDs confirm that BCM1000 is active o00000 o 1 ol 2 3 TEE power status These two LEDs are solid green Note During system initialization the system performs diagnostics on the hardware configuration size and installation If the power fails system data remains in memory Table 25 describes the possible operating states of the LEDs on the front of the BCM1000 The BCM1000e has both a power and a status LED which provide the same indicators as for the base unit Table 25 BCM1000 LED states Indicates state of OK N A a minimum of 1 N A system power PS needs attention Indicates access to indicates heavy N A N A N A the system disk drive activity to the disk drive Indicates condition of all monitored in startup N A not all services are system status services are shutodown mode working functioning 1 PCI Device Device is present driver is not running N A Device is not WAN Port 1 and the driver is present active 2 PCI Device Device is present driver is not running N A Device is not WAN Port 2 and the driver is present active 3 PCI Device Device is present driver
302. own must have the network connections exchange lines removed first P0607659 02 Additional Safety Information The following interfaces are classified as Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV circuits and may be connected to exposed plant e DTM interface e WAN interface e TCM Isolator The following interfaces are classified as Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV circuits and shall not be connected to exposed plant e BRIM Interface e TCM extensions e external music sources MSCX e auxiliary ringer AUX e paging system relay PAGE e serial port e LAN interface The following interfaces are classified as Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV circuits and shall NOT be connected to exposed plant e ATATI Limited Warranty Nortel Networks warrants this product against defects and malfunctions during a one 1 year period from the date of original purchase If there is a defect or malfunction Nortel Networks shall at its option and as the exclusive remedy either repair or replace the telephone set at no charge if returned within the warranty period If replacement parts are used in making repairs these parts may be refurbished or may contain refurbished materials If it is necessary to replace the telephone set it may be replaced with a refurbished telephone of the same design and color If it should become necessary to repair or replace a defective or malfunctioning telephone set under this warranty
303. port There are two types of RPIs RPI 8 that supports a maximum of eight base stations and RPI 16 that supports a maximum of 16 base stations Installation and Maintenance Guide 106 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware DECT system components The DECT system allows the user to access calls and call features while away from their stationary telephone The following components combine with the DECT media bay module to provide this service e Radio base station provides the radio link between the Business Communications Manager through the DECT module to the portable handsets e Portable handsets communicate through radio base stations connected to the DECT module Note gt The DECT cordless handset can be configured to act as a separate set either providing a point for target line calls or with full call and receive capability although some of the features are not available The handset can also be twinned with desk sets to provide mobile coverage of one or more stationary sets DECT system installation and configuration information is contained in the Business Communications Manager 2 5 DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide T7406 system components The T7406 wireless system allows the user to access calls and call features while away from their desk The following components provide this service e Radio base station provides the radio link between the Business Communications Manager through a station
304. pplied You must use this output in a low current low voltage application only Do not use this output for switching the auxiliary ringer directly e Page relay jack When you use the page signal output jack to connect an external paging amplifier you also use the page relay jack The page relay jack connects a floating relay contact pair The BCM1000 uses this jack to control the external paging amplifier e Page output jack The BCM1000 uses the page output to connect an internally generated voice paging signal to an external paging amplifier customer supplied P0607659 02 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 77 Music on hold jack The BCM1000 uses the Music on hold input to connect an external music source that supplies a signal to held lines music on hold or telephone speakers background music The input source can be any available radio or music source approved for connection to the network For directions on setting up these features refer to Chapter 14 Installing optional telephony equipment on page 227 For regulatory information about hooking up an external music source refer to Use of a Music Source on page 6 MSC IP call processing hardware If your system requires a high volume of IP telephones and or more VoIP trunks you can adjust your system to accommodate them You have the option to switch DS30 channel 7 on the MSC By switching the channel from servicing a media ba
305. pported by region Region BRIT side BRIS side PRI T1 Australia ISDN ETSI 300 403 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 DPNSS MCDN ISDN ETSI 300 403 ETSI QSIG 300 239 Brazil ISDN ETSI 300 403 ISDN ETSI 300 102 ETSI QSIG 300 239 CALA ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 403 MCDN Caribbean NI 2 NI 2 NI 2 Loop North American 4ESS E amp M DMS100 DID DMS250 Ground MCDN Fixed trunk types Hong Kong ITU T ITU T ITU T Loop Taiwan E amp M DID Ground Fixed trunk types Denmark ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 France ISDN ETSI 300 403 DPNSS Germany MCDN Global ETSI QSIG 300 239 Holland ISDN ETSI 300 403 Norway PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Installation and Maintenance Guide 302 Appendix A System region attributes Table 58 PRI line protocol supported by region Continued Region BRI T side BRI S side PRI T1 Italy ISDN ETSI 300 102 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 ETSI QSIG 300 239 DPNSS MCDN ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 102 United Kingdom ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 ISDN ETSI 300 403 DPNSS MCDN ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 403 BRI and PRI line types Table 59 provides a description of the types of lines that BRI and PRI trunks can provide These are set under Resources Media Bay Modules Bus XX Module X on the Unified Manager Note that some of these line types are only available when specific regions are chosen Table 59 BRI and PRI line
306. r 2 Telephony hardware Figure 29 CTM and CTM8 LEDs and jacks Line 1 Aux Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Power LED Status LED Line 5 Basic Rate Interface media bay module The Basic Rate Interface media bay module BRI module connects a maximum of four BRI ISDN lines to the Business Communications Manager system European systems use an S interface North American based systems use a T interface with an external NTI line Each BRI ISDN line you connect adds two telephone lines to the Business Communications Manager system Therefore each BRI adds a maximum of eight telephone lines to the Business Communications Manager system via the four RJ48C jacks on the faceplate You can also use this module for dial backup or dial on demand services for WAN connections Figure 30 shows a front view of the BRI The LEDs beside each RJ 48C jack are on when the ISDN line is active Figure 30 BRI LEDs and jacks Front view Power LED Status LED Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 P0607659 02 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware 97 Station media bay modules You install the station media bay modules in the BCM1000 or the BCM1000e Station media bay modules connect telephones and analog telecommunication devices to the Business Communications Manager system Table 8 provides a list of the station modules that can be used on the Business Communications Manager system Table 8 Stati
307. r 6 Installing the BCM1000e expansion unit 3 Fasten the bracket to the BCM1000e using the four supplied screws Caution Use only the screws that came with the bracket Using other screws can damage the equipment 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 on the other side with the second bracket Note Rack mount bracket The BCM1000e rack mount bracket has an additional set of holes that allows you to install the brackets so that the unit sits flush with the BCM1000 in an equipment rack where space is limited Attaching the BCM1000e to the rack The mounting brackets you attached to the BCM1000e correspond with mounting holes located on the equipment rack Note You must supply your own screws to attach the BCM1000e to the rack gt Determine the location in the rack you want to install the BCM1000e Position the unit in the rack Refer to Figure 45 Align the holes in the rack mounting bracket with the holes in the rails A OO N a Fasten the rack mounting brackets to the equipment rack using four screws Figure 45 Fasten the BCM1000e to the equipment rack L222 ooo0oo0oo0oo0od is Oaaoaaoaoaaoo0o0o0 0 Ly o o poocoogoooooo0oo0o0o0o00 J woo oo oC P0607659 02 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM1000e expansion unit 131 Installing the BCM1000e on the wall The BCM1000e must be installed close enough to the BC
308. r CAPN module to as many as five M7324 M7324N telephones in the system Business Communications Manager Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA 2 if connecting analog equipment to a digital media bay station module Uninterruptable power supply UPS as a standalone device Analog emergency telephone Installation and Maintenance Guide 122 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM1000 Companion equipment If you are installing a Companion system check that you have the following hardware C3050 CT2 Plus Canada C3050 Etiquette USA e base station kit e base station kit e handsets C3050 e handsets C3050 e battery packs NiCad 600 mAh e battery packs NiCad 600 mAh e high capacity battery charger e high capacity battery charger e UTAM software keycode for base station activation Optional Companion equipment clip holster leather glove rugged protector headset earbud battery not included headset over the head battery not included Other cordless systems The DECT cordless system T7406 cordless handset and Symbol NetVision wireless IP handsets all have installation documentation specific to the installation of base stations and registration of the handsets to the Business Communications Manager Equipment for Installing the BCM1000 For the installation you need the following equipment mounting hardware rack mounting bracket included rubber feet for table mounting or wall mounting brackets separately orderable
309. r each base station is 75 ohms You need one or two power pairs between the RPI and the base station The number of power pairs depends on the wire size of the power pair and the distance between the base station and the RPI Caution Do not run unprotected power cables outdoors The maximum cable distances allowed between the RPI and the base station depend on the size of wire you use Refer to Table 36 Table 36 Cable distances Wire size Single pair Double pair 0 6 mm 22 AWG 800 m 2 500 ft 1200 m 4 000 ft 0 5 mm 24 AWG 500 m 1 500 ft 1000 m 3 000 ft Caution When you use two power pairs connect both pairs with the same polarity Connecting the RPI Connect the power pairs to the correct connectors Figure 73 shows the location of the input and output connectors on the RPI connector printed circuit board Figure 73 RPI connector printed circuit board 0B1X1 0B1X2 0B1X3 0B1X4 0B1X9 0B1X10 OB1X11 0B1X12 E l E en ri Emi I Ll L T l T f Coy Co 0B1X6 0B1X7 0B1X8 0B1X9 0B1X13 0B1X14 0B1X15 Mm m m m m m ES Installation and Maintenance Guide 198 Chapter 12 Inst
310. r more information about registering and programming Companion portables see the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide Restarting the system If you added a base station that requires a software update the system begins downloading the software to the base station The display shows BS 1 Dload Start 1 Press CLEAR to clear the message When the base station software finishes downloading the BS 1 Dload Done appears 2 Press CLEAR to clear the message Some base stations do not power up at the same time and this message repeats at the beginning of each download In the United States the display shows one of the messages listed in Table 42 after restarting Table 42 UTAM messages If display shows See UTAM code req d System logical identifier LID information UTAM test failed See alarm codes in the Windows NT event log Warning A loss of unlicensed transition and management for microwave UTAM AN information occurs when upgrading US Business Communications Manager systems You need UTAM Recovery Codes P0607659 02 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 207 Installing external antennas and lightning surge protection You can use external antennas to provide a broad range for your Companion system Ensure that any external installations comply with local regulations and include lightning surge protection Read before you install equipment You must install the ante
311. r possible profiles P0607659 02 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 71 Table 4 provides a table of weights and measurements of the base unit Table 4 Basic BCM1000 base unit specifications Size e depth 18 28 inches with bezel in place e width 17 51 inches e height 7 05 inches Weight e no PCI cards or modules approx 23 Ibs e loaded system approx 31 Ibs varies depending on power supply Figure 16 shows the location of the hardware components in the BCM1000 2 0 versions Nortel Networks recommends that you know the location of the different components before working with the system Figure 17 on page 72 and Figure 18 on page 72 show two possible configurations of the BCM1000 hardware Figure 16 BCM1000 interior components for standard system pre 2 5 Power supply Fan Hard disk lt _ qa Clock calendar N Ci i zen O m DIMM slots an L Media bay module cabinet S000 k E PCI card slots Installation
312. rd disk s from the base unit Remove the damaged hard disk from the brackets Install new hard disk Reconnect hard disk cable to controller Mirrored Disk System Install new hard disk in the brackets ensuring that the primary disk is on the bottom Connect power and ribbon cables WARNING Ensure all cables are connected to correct devices Restore unit to operation Perform disk initialization and Monitor mirroring process restore data gt _ gt Test all functions Installation and Maintenance Guide 244 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk AN Warning Maintain a current backup of your system When you replace the hard disk in a single disk system you must restore the Business Communications Manager system programming from the backup Warning Mirrored disk systems do not replace the need to have current BRU backups that you store in a secure remote location Caution Use only a Nortel Networks approved upgrade or replacement kits Remember to take suitable precautions when working inside the Business Communications Manager base unit Maintain a clean and static safe site A Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the telephone and network cables and then the power cord before opening the base unit Read and follow all instructions carefully
313. reen LED 161 262 ground 152 169 228 229 230 Ground symbol 59 grounding strap 237 239 H hand off Companion base station 203 handset standards and specifications 11 hard disk backup warning 244 brackets 247 initialization single disk 249 installing drive 247 mirrored install 247 power routing for mirrored disks 256 RAID connections 248 removing 244 replacement 243 replacement notice 244 returning for repair 246 screw locations 245 size 70 upgrading to RAID system 252 wiring locations 245 hard disk status mirrored disks 259 hardware grounding strap 152 hard disk replacement notice 244 MSC 74 ports 78 remove power to install 152 removing the hard disk 244 replacing modules 156 restart 240 tools 237 tools warning 244 hardware components 70 hearing aid compatible 5 8 hotels LAN CTE application humidity requirements 119 i2002 installing 188 12004 installing 188 12050 installing 188 12050 soft phone overview 82 illustration 215 Industry Canada registration 4 regulations 6 initial parameters 168 initialization process overview 87 initializing the system 168 input impedance 218 229 input wiring 199 insertion loss 218 219 insertion loss measurement 219 install ATA2 185 auxiliary ringer 227 base station 204 CAP 186 Companion 191 data networking hardware 163 emergency telephone 187 P0607659 01 Index 339 equipment and supplies 121 external music source 229 external pag
314. rier detect 165 166 169 data communication devices 217 225 data networking hardware installing 163 installation process overview 87 modem card 75 data parameters 168 data set ready 165 166 169 data telephones NetVision Data telephone 104 data terminal ready 165 166 169 data transmission requirements ATA2 224 DB25 cable 166 DB25 connector 164 DECT 3 5 changes 15 base stations 101 channel requirements 117 description 74 DIP switch settings 149 DS30 channel hierarchy 136 DS30 requirements 34 handset overview 104 supporting regions 25 299 system components 106 dedicated cable 105 default IP address 163 168 172 new telephone 294 subnet mask 168 dial up 168 digital device compliance 9 digital extensions 113 digital ISDN trunk module 96 digital lines 4X16 97 digital loop 120 digital station media bay module 97 digital station module 4X16 combination module 98 DSM16 overview 74 DSM32 overview 74 Installation and Maintenance Guide 336 Index digital telephone 4X16 module 98 99 BRIM S T module 96 DSM 16 and DSM 32 modules 98 DSM16 module overview 74 DSM32 overview 74 DTM module 94 digital trunk module DTM 94 DTM description 74 digitizing analog equipment ATA2 185 DIMM replacing 285 288 see also memory DIP switch GATM 18 dip switch CTM CTM8 4X16 38 DIP switch settings ASM 35 147 BRI 142 CTM 143 DECT settings 149 determining the settings 138 DSM 148 DTM 141 FEM settings 150 offset 116
315. rocess Map Preparing the units for maintenance Use Unified Manager to shut down software Disconnect cables Remove the top Restore power from the front of from the unit to the units the BCM1000 and BCM1000e Perform Reconnect Remove ac power maintenance cables to the plugs from both upgrade front of the units units procedure Test system Remove from rack functions or wall Place on static free surface Special tools Before you replace the components ensure you have the following equipment e Phillips screwdriver 2 with a blade 3 5 in long e 3 16 inch slot screwdriver e antistatic grounding strap Caution You must wear an antistatic grounding strap at all times when handling electronic components Failure to do so can result in damage to the equipment Installation and Maintenance Guide 238 Chapter 16 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades Shutting down the system software The Business Communications Manager system requires a controlled shutdown to guarantee the integrity of the file system Sometimes this may not be possible for instance if a hard drive fails However as long as you have access to the Unified Manager perform the following procedures before removing power from the system 1 OO N OO oO FB WwW 9 Start a web browser on a computer with a LAN connection to the Business Commu
316. rrored disk is updated 7 Replace all the connectors to the front of the units The reboot can take up to 10 minutes Software restart If you did not shut the system power down restart the software 1 Refer to Shutting down the system software until you get to step 7 2 Atthis point select Reboot on the Logoff menu The system reboots Warning When you restart the system all IP clients voice mail and VoIP ports are not AN available until the system services restart If you have a mirrored disk system once the services have been restarted the system will automatically ensure the mirrored disk is updated Installation and Maintenance Guide 242 Chapter 16 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades P0607659 02 243 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk The BCM1000 for the 2 5 system includes either one or two factory installed hard disks You also can install a second hard disk to a single disk base unit This chapter explains how to change a hard disk and how to upgrade a single disk system to a mirrored system by adding a RAID board and a second hard disk Figure 102 provides an overview of the hard disk replacement process Figure 102 Process map Hard disk replacement Single Disk System Upgrading to mirrored disk C If possible do a software shutdown Set up unit for maintenance Note positioning of power and ribbon cables Remove the bracketed ha
317. rt 613 Port 713 39 Black Brown DN DN DN DN DN DN 14 Brown Black Port 214 Port 314 Port 414 Port 514 Port 614 Port 714 40 Black Slate DN DN DN DN DN DN 15 Slate Black Port 215 Port 315 Port 415 Port 515 Port 615 Port 715 41 Yellow Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 16 Blue Yellow Port 216 Port 316 Port 416 Port 516 Port 616 Port 716 Installation and Maintenance Guide 314 Appendix B Media bay module combinations P0607659 01 315 Glossary access code A unique digit or digits entered by the user to access some telephony features such as Line pools Call park external lines Direct Dial telephone and Auto DN address A unique identifier assigned to networks and stations that allows each device to receive and reply to messages Analog terminal adapter ATA A device that connects analog telecommunication devices such as fax machines answering machines and single line telephones to the Business Communications Manager system through a Digital station module Application program interface API An application program uses this interface to make requests of the operating system or another application The API is an interface to an operating system or a program asynchronous A method of transmission where the time intervals between characters are not required to be equal and signals are sourced from independent clocks with different frequencies and phase relationships Start and stop bits
318. s Although DTMs have more than 16 lines they occupy only one DS30 channel per DTM Table 15 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the resulting line assignments Table 15 DTM switch settings T1 Select Enter these switch settings Select Enter these switch settings DS30 He pee DS30 3 are bannel 1 2 3 J4 5 6 these lines Tanel 1 12 3 l4 5 6 these lines 2 on jon Jon on on Jon 914 294 5 on jon jon on aaa on jon on jon on on fon on on on 3 loft 181 204 6 for 91 114 4 on jon jon Jon on 151174 087 on on Jon on ee If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available Table 16 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the resulting line assignments Table 16 DTM switch settings North American PRI Select Enter these switch settings Toassign Select Enter these switch settings To assign DS30 these DS30 these channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 lines channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 lines on jon fon Jon Jon jon on jon jon jon 2 211 233 5 loft Jort 121 143 on jon Jon jon on on fon fon on on 3 oft 181 203 6 fot 91 113 on jon fon jon on on fon fon on 4 for 151 173 iira fort fott 61 83 If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available Installati
319. s Communications Manager To work with the Unified Manager you require an internet connection with the correct browser setup This chapter describes the computer and internet specifications Computer specifications These are the minimum computer specifications you need to run the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager e 133 MHz Pentium CPU or compatible e 64MB RAM e 10 MB disk space available e screen resolution of 1024 x 768 e monitor large enough to support the screen resolution suggested size 17 inches e operating system minimum Windows 95 98 or NT 2000 or the Millennium version Note The ideal display setting for a monitor using Unified Manager is 1280 x 1024 gt Unified Manager is a web based application that runs off the BCM1000 computer Therefore you take up minimal space on your computer and you can run multiple applications on your computer We recommend that you use Windows NT or 2000 to ensure optimal performance with the Unified Manager Browser requirements To use Business Communications Manager Unified Manager you must have e Java Virtual Machine JVM 5 0 build 5 0 0 3188 or greater one of the following web browsers Netscape Communicator 4 5 or greater Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 or greater If you are using Netscape Communicator set the following parameters e Enable Java On e Cached document comparison Every time Installation and Maintenance Guide
320. s Tab Field Functions Description Settings Version Read only field Shows the current version of mirroring firmware Operation Mode Primary Master Mirror mode is disabled The Primary disk is the operating disk Mirror Master Mirror mode is disabled The Mirrored disk is now the operating disk Mirror Mode The system is in Mirror mode Ultra UDMA Auto The interface speed to the hard disk is set automatically This is the default Mode 0_16 Mode 1_24 etc The interface speed to the hard disk is set toa specific timing Note Changing the speed from auto could significantly affect system performance Beep Timing Disable The failure tone is disabled Continuous The an audible tone will beep continuously if a failure occurs XX seconds minutes The audible tone will beep for the period chosen if Default BEEP_30Seconds a failure occurs Status Dup Win DII version lt current version number gt Shows the version or N A if no version is found N A Primary Master Good Bad or N A Indicates the current status of the primary hard Status disk Mirror Master Status Good Bad or N A Indicates the current status of the secondary hard disk Initialization Status Started Finished Failed Indicates current status of the initialization Shutdown or N A process Configuration menu item Set Buzzer ON Set Buzzer OFF If turned ON you can control the module buzzer remotely If turned OFF the module buzzer can only be controlled from th
321. s 228 F faceplate see coverplate facility interface code FIC 5 fan cable adapter 266 cables 263 label 265 LEDs 262 positioning blades 265 process map 261 removing 262 removing connectors 263 fax ASM station module 100 auxiliary jack 95 compatibility 224 connecting an ATA2 220 Fax Mail 81 Fax Messaging 81 Fax On Demand 81 Fax Overflow 81 FCC certification antennas 207 compliant cord and plug 7 device compliance 7 electromagnetic compatibility 5 EMI and EMC 9 hearing aid compatible 5 network standards 5 Public Switched Telephone Network 7 registration 4 registration number 5 registration number location 7 REN on label 8 RF interference 4 telecommunications company rights 6 features system 80 Federal Communications Commission see FCC FEM connecting to an existing system 114 description 74 DIP switch settings 150 DS30 channel requirements 117 Installation and Maintenance Guide 338 Index earth calling 16 fiber ports 150 wiring 182 fiber cable coiling 182 Fiber Expansion media bay module see FEM fiber ports FEM module 150 FIC code 217 fixed set 106 flashing LED 161 frame relay 168 front bezel latch 153 removing 153 front cover see coverplate front cover see front bezel future expansion 113 G GATM 16 auxiliary port constraints 20 DIP switch settings 18 dip switches 18 earth calling 16 module description 17 wiring 19 Global Analog Trunk Module see GATM 16 g
322. s Manager system can no longer identify the old telephone After you plug a moved set into a new jack the Business Communications Manager system can take 45 seconds to identify the telephone Programming relocation takes three minutes to complete Wait for this to occur before you change any settings for the telephone in the system Warning If you disconnect a relocated telephone before the relocation programming is AN complete the telephone can lose the programmed settings Note Automatic telephone relocation is disabled by default gt For IP telephones to retain DN specific features the Keep DN Alive setting for the telephone programming must be set to Yes P0607659 02 191 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system This chapter describes the process for installing a Companion wireless system This chapter assumes the following has been done e A site survey has been completed and you have determined the exact locations of the base stations around your site e You have determined how many handsets you want To determine this you need to know whether your system has a DS30 channel 2 6 or 3 5 split Refer to Understanding DS30 channel numbers on page 114 The Companion requires a DSM module for every 32 handsets You can install a maximum of two DSMs for Companion sets per system providing your system is configured with a DS30 channel 2 6 split You can assign a maximum of 32 Companion handsets
323. s product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Hereby Nortel Networks declares that Enterprise Edge Business Communications Manager Model No NT7B10xxxx is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 S EC Information is subject to change without notice Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the European Safety requirements EN 60950 and EMC requirements EN 55022 Class A and EN 55024 These EMC limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial and light industrial environment WARNING This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures The above warning is inserted for regulatory reasons If any customer believes that they have an interference problem either because their Nortel Networks product seems to cause interference or suffers from interference they should contact their distributor immediately The distributor will assist with a remedy for any problems and if necessary will have full support from Nortel Networks Safety WARNING Only qualified service personnel may install this eq
324. ses one voice line Since each DS30 channel has four lines per offset you require two offsets for each module You can assign a maximum of two CTM8s to a DS30 channel by making the offset switch settings different for each module You can also combine a CTM8 with a 4X16 module on the same DS30 channel When you choose an offset number for the CTM8 the system automatically adds the next offset number You cannot assign offset 3 to the CTM8 module because this does not allow the module to assign the second set of lines Table 19 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the resulting line assignments for CTMs and CTM8s Table 19 CTM and CTM8 switch settings DS30 channels 2 5 Select Select Enter these switch settings To assign To assign these lines DS30 offset these lines CTM8 cu 1 2 13 lals5le6 CTM Lower Upper Lines 1 4 lines 5 8 211 214 219 222 0 on on on on on on 0411 214 9 219 222 227 2 1 on on on on on 219 222 9 30 227 230 235 238 5 on on on on on SOT DSO z on on on on Not supported Not supported S on a ii i Installation and Maintenance Guide 144 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches Table 19 CTM and CTM8 switch settings DS30 channels 2 5 Continued Select Select Enter these switch settings To assign To assign these lines DS30 offse
325. signed to provide efficient high speed frame or packet transmission with minimum delay Frame relay uses minimal error detection and relies on higher level protocols for error control gateway A system that links two different types of networks and enables them to communicate with each other The Business Communications Manager can provide the gateway to an intranet or internet ground start trunk Ground start trunks provide the same features as loop start trunks Use this type of trunk when the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks By configuring lines as ground start the system can identify when a caller hangs up the telephone at the far end Ground start trunks are available only on a Digital Trunk Interface DTD P0607659 01 Glossary 321 Handsfree A feature used to make calls without using the telephone receiver Activate Full Handsfree under Capabilities in System DNs programming When activated the Business Communications Manager assigns a Handsfree Mute button to the telephone Handsfree HF Answerback This feature automatically turns on the microphone at a telephone that receives a Voice Call so that the person receiving the call can respond without lifting the receiver Activate Handsfree Answerback under Capabilities in System DNs programming Held Line Reminder A telephone rings and displays the message On hold LINENAM when you place an external
326. sor and Agent Guides Multimedia Call Center Web Developer Guide i _ LAN CTE _ Personal Call Manager a Persona Call Manager User Guide gt I Attendant Console Attendant Console Set Up and Operations Guide P0607659 02 Preface 67 Unified Manager and hardware maintenance documentation lt Hardware Installation J a OTR Documentation CD lt q Operations o O Voice Mail and Call Management System Management and Maintenance User Administration Programming Operations Guide Backup and Restore j A I Maintenance and Troubleshooting Installation and f Maintenance Guide How to get help USA and Canada Authorized Distributors ITAS Technical Support Telephone 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 If you already have a PIN Code you can enter Express Routing Code ERC 196 If you do not yet have a PIN Code or for general questions and first line support you can enter ERC 338 Website http www nortelnetworks com support Presales Support CSAN Telephone 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 Use Express Routing Code ERC 1063 Installation and Maintenance Guide 68 Preface EMEA Europe Middle East Africa Technical Support CTAS Telephone 00800 800 89009 Fax 44 191 555 7980 email emeahelp nortelnetworks com CALA Caribbean amp Latin America Technical Support CTAS Telephone
327. spool into a slot at the back of the cable trough Note If you enable all six jacks of the FEM module the FEM module is the only module you can install on the BCM1000 because each port requires one DS30 channel Refer to FEM switch settings on page 150 P0607659 02 Chapter 10 Wiring the modules 183 Connecting the fiber cables Follow these steps to connect your Norstar expansion modules to a FEM module installed into a BCM1000 1 Ensure the BCM1000 is properly powered and rebooted 2 Connect the fiber cables from the Norstar expansion modules to the jacks on the FEM module Note Which DIP switch settings you chose will determine which FEM ports are available Refer to FEM switch settings on page 150 Connect the Norstar Line Modules to the FEM beginning at fiber port 1 Connect Norstar Extension Modules to the FEM beginning at fiber port 6 3 Change the DN records in the Unified Manager or change the set wiring as required to match your system A Warning When you connect a Norstar station module to an FEM the extension numbers of the telephones connected to the station module change To keep the same extension numbers change the DNs of the telephones or change the telephone wiring to correspond with the required DNs Note If you connect a Norstar station module amphenol cable directly to a DSM you do not have to change any settings to maintain the DN assignments Ta
328. stem has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column 2 If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 split you cannot use DS30 07 for the DSM 16 module You cannot configure the DSM32 module for DS30 06 because the second set of DNs cannot be accessed Sif you need more DNs for Companion sets use the range that starts at 597 ISDN or DECT and change the DN type to NA Portable 4 if you system is set to Full Double Density FDD Companion telephones are not supported DSM16 and DSM 32 double density switch settings upgraded system The following table shows the switch settings for DSM plus modules deployed as double density on a system that has been upgraded from 2 5 to 3 0 Note DSM modules deployed with 2 5 systems are all single density and cannot be set to double density The DSM 16 and DSM32 modules can be set to either density Table 3 DSM 16 and DSM32 double density switch settings for 2 5 systems upgraded to 3 0 PE Enter these switch settings To assign a Ne te DEM To assign these DNs to DSM 32 bus A DSM1 B DSM2 connectors A top B bottom A 221 236 A 377 392 B 377 392 B 221 236 A 237 252 A 393 408 B 393 408 B 237 252 on A 253 268 A 409 424 B 409 424 B 253 268 on A 269 284 A 425 440 B 425 440 B 269 284 on on A 285 300 A 441 456 B 441 456 B 285 300 A 301 316 A 457 472 B 457 472 B 301 316 The e
329. stem is running as long as one of the modules remains active Note When you upgrade to a redundant power supply you must also put in a redundant fan Refer to Adding or replacing a cooling fan on page 261 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shutting down the system software on page 238 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the BCM1000 for maintenance as described in Shutting down the system hardware on page 239 Disconnect the power supply from the internal connections Cut the cable ties that hold the power cables to the base unit Remove the standard power supply and set aside Refer to Removing the standard power supply on page 270 6 Remove the knockout plate from the back of the BCM1000 Refer to Figure 133 Figure 133 Remove the knockout Remove this bracket to accommodate redundant power supply OR ORS OS asana ORORO ROR QBORO ORQRO BBORERORGORORSRO BRORSRORSRO Installation and Maintenance Guide 274 Chapter 19 Replacing a power supply Installing the redundant power supply After you have prepared the BCM1000 to accommodate the redundant power supply follow these steps to insert the redundant power supply housing 1 Remove the power supply modules from the redundant power supply housing a Check the rocker switch on the left side of the mod
330. sually not necessary to call the telecommunications company with information on the equipment before connecting the Business Communications Manager system to the telephone network If the telecommunications company requires this information provide the following e telephone number s to which the system will be connected e FCC registration number on label affixed to Business Communications Manager e universal service order code USOC e service order code SOC e facility interface code FIC Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Use of a Music Source In accordance with U S Copyright Law a license may be required from the American Society of Composers Authors and Publishers or similar organization if Radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold or Background Music features of this telecommunication system Nortel Networks hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license Rights of the Telecommunications Company If the Business Communications Manager system is causing harm to the telephone network the telecommunications company may discontinue service temporarily If possible the telecommunications company will notify you in advance If advance notice is not practical the user will be notified as soon as possible The user will be given the opportunity to correct the situation and will be informed of the right to file a complaint to the FCC The telecommunicati
331. t 5 Sleeve Ground Warning The auxiliary ringer must not be connected to exposed plant The ringer must not draw more than 50 mA from a 40 V DC source Auxiliary ringer programming You can activate the auxiliary ringer by setting auxiliary ring for specific external lines and Business Communications Manager telephones Refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide for programming details Installation and Maintenance Guide 228 Chapter 14 Installing optional telephony equipment External paging system customer supplied You can connect an external paging system to provide paging over external loudspeakers Ensure the paging system follows these guidelines e The paging output from the MSC is 100 mV rms across an input impedance of 600 Q e The output level is 0 dBm with reference to 600 Q for a PCM encoded signal at 0 dBm There is no de voltage across the page output terminals e The page output uses the tip and ring terminals of the jack The sleeve terminal of the jack connects to ground You must use a stereo plug to connect the page signal output When you use the page signal output jack to connect an external paging amplifier you also use the page relay jack which contains a floating relay contact pair The system uses this jack to control the external paging amplifier e The contact pair has a switch capacity of 50 mA non inductive at 40 V maximum You must remove
332. t Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available Installation and Maintenance Guide 150 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches FEM switch settings The DIP switches on the underside of the FEM module are used to turn the six ports on the front of the module on or off You need to turn a port on for each Norstar expansion module you want to connect to the BCM1000 Each port also occupies one full DS30 channel Therefore if you have a fully configured six module Norstar system to convert you need to turn on all six ports on the FEM and therefore no other module can be installed in the BCM1000 Note The FEM module only supports connections to the Norstar trunk and station expansion modules To turn on a fiber port set the DIP switch for the corresponding DS30 channel as shown in Table 24 For example if you want to use fiber port 2 turn on DIP switch 2 DS30 channel 3 After the module is installed an LED lights beside each active fiber port Table 24 shows the switch for each fiber port Table 24 FEM switch settings Set this switch to turn on the port This DS30 channel gets assigned Choose a port to turn on If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available Note If you turn on all six switc
333. t be no more than 2 m 6 5 ft to 3 m 10 ft long You can connect the ground lead to the 120 V ac conduit which is connected to the building ground However Nortel Networks does not recommend using the 120 V ac conduit Route and connect the coaxial cable from the outdoor antenna to the surge protector Route and connect the coaxial cable from the surge protector to the appropriate base station BNC connector Note The total length of the coaxial cables from the outdoor antenna to the base station must not exceed 10 m 33 ft P0607659 02 217 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters This chapter provides installation instructions for the Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA 2 The ATA 2 connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to the Business Communications Manager system Examples of analog voice devices are single line telephones or answering machines Examples of data communication devices are modems and fax machines The ATA 2 provides on premise service only unexposed plant only Before installation Before you attempt to install an ATA 2 device ensure that your system and environment meet the requirements listed in this section Environmental requirements Check the following environment requirements for the ATA 2 Line voltage 120 V 102 132 Vac Line voltage 230 V 207 253 V ac Temperature 0 50 C 32 122 F Relative humidity 5 95 non con
334. t channel on the DIP switches The system assigns the next DS30 channel Note in Table 22 how the DSM32 module spans two DS30 channels and that there are only five possible DS30 channel settings for the DIP switches Table 22 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the dialing numbers DNs assigned to each DS30 channel Note that Companion sets can only be assigned on DS30 channel 6 and 7 and the handsets have a different set of default DNs than the digital sets Table 22 DSM 16 and DSM 32 switch settings Select DS30 2 3 4 5 6 RK Enter these switch settings To assign these DNs To assign these DNs on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on 221 236 237 252 253 268 269 284 285 300 of 285 316 221 252 CCE eee eee 237 268 a 853 284 ea RK Companion DNs N A eT 269 300 oe PR ATG 565 596 _ off _off DSM32 The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split you cannot e use DS30 channel 7 for the DSM 16 module e configure the DSM32 module for DS30 channel 6 because the second set of DNs cannot be accessed If you need more DNs for Companion sets use the range that starts at 597 ISDN or DECT and change the
335. t these lines CTM8 i Tefe siete iron teats 0 on on on on on ry 181 184 181 184 189 192 on on on on 189 192 197 200 2 i on E on on E a 197 200 205 208 2 ott oti 197 200 3 on on on 205 208 Not supported Not supported E E O g o 0n on on me On 451 154 151 154 159 162 _ o EE oi Em n 459 162 159 162 167 170 gt o EN ce A On 467 170 167 170 175 178 3 g a 175 178 Not supported Not supported ae ee eT _ 0n on on ou 121 124 129 132 1 ee off off off 129 132 129 132 137 140 a Eg a om 137 140 145 148 3 a vi 145 148 Not supported Not supported ee re aa _ 0 o EN A 91 94 91 94 99 102 1 ee oe 99 102 99 102 107 110 E i z E ii a wo 107 110 115 118 3 an Sn cen 115 118 Not supported Not supported Eu ae O g o a o ae a aT 61 64 69 72 _ i 69 72 69 72 77 80 7 E gt hi BE i BE a m 77 80 85 88 3 a ott 85 88 Not supported Not supported C If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available P0607659 02 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches 145 4X16 switch settings The 4X16 module combines a CTM and a DSM 16 The CTM only requires four lines on the DS30 channel Therefore it can be assigned any of the four offsets in a DS30 channel The DSM module then automatically assigns the next DS30 channel number and all the assigned DNs This module can be combined with three other CTMs or one CTM8 on the same DS30 ch
336. tary extension cable P0607659 02 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 209 Installing an outdoor antenna USA To install an outdoor antenna follow these steps 1 Make a hole for the coaxial cable Install conduit for the antenna cable according to local building and wiring codes Screw the antenna bracket to the wall so that the antenna is vertical on the exterior wall of the building Loosen the nut on the antenna Slide the antenna into the slot of the bracket and tighten the nut Refer to Figure 79 Feed the coaxial cable through the wall to the lightning surge protector on the interior wall Figure 79 Antenna with antenna bracket USA Installing a lightning surge protector USA Install the lightning surge protector to protect the Companion components from electrical surges To install a lightning surge protector follow these steps 1 Install the lightning surge protector on the interior wall as close as possible to the entry point of the coaxial cable from the outdoor antenna Before you connect the ground lead to the lightning surge protector attach the ground lead to an approved ground Refer to the Wiring information tips box on the next page Route and connect the coaxial cable from the outdoor antenna to the lightning surge protector Installation and Maintenance Guide 210 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 3 Route and connect the coax
337. telephones adding wireless units 191 adjust background music volume 230 ATA2 185 audio conference unit ACU 104 CAP 186 CAP M7324 103 CAP M7324N 103 Companion 188 Companion overview 104 controlling from the PC 83 DECT 188 DECT overview 104 emergency 187 Etiquette C3050 CT2 portable 105 12050 soft phone 82 IP telephone 82 103 188 M7000 103 M7100 104 M7100N 104 M7208 104 M7208N 104 M7310N 104 M7316 104 M7324 103 M7324N 103 moving 190 replacing 293 replacing with different type 294 replacing with same type 293 supported 121 supported list 75 Symbol NetVision overview 104 T7100 103 T7208 103 T7316 103 T7316E 21 T7406 104 Telephony Application Program Interface 82 telephony components 74 description 74 installation overview 87 television reception 9 telnet BCM 3 5 15 temperature 119 template choosing 173 termination analog port 219 text conventions 60 time zones by country 304 tip 59 227 228 229 230 tools for repairs 237 installation 122 shock warning 244 transmission rates ATA2 224 transmit 170 transmit clock 165 166 transmit data 165 166 167 troubleshooting antistatic grounding strap 237 emergency telephone 234 hardware tools 237 media bay backplane warning 154 media bay modules 157 RAID board LEDs 258 removing the cover 239 removing the hard disk 244 replacing telephones with same type 293 system restart 240 trunk modules 4X16 description 74 BRIM S T 96 CTM des
338. telephones cordless telephones FAX machines answering machines or modems The maximum speed for a modem connection is 28 8 kbit s Figure 33 shows a diagram of the ASM 8 The ASM 8 has one amphenol connector on the faceplate For details about wiring the ASM 8 refer to Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters on page 217 Figure 33 ASM 8 front view Power LED Status LED Amphenol connecto Specialized media bay modules This section describes the modules that perform a specific job outside of the trunk and station description Refer to Table 9 The DECT Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications module allows you to add radio based cordless communication devices to your Business Communications Manager in areas where the DECT technology is available The Fiber Expansion module FEM provides a fast way of upgrading from an existing Norstar system simply by plugging in Norstar expansion modules to the FEM box P0607659 02 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware 101 Table 9 Specialized modules Module type What it does Special notes DECT connects a maximum of eight radio base stations Only available for some profiles Refer to DECT media bay which receives transmissions from registered Mobility services by region on page 299 module cordless handsets a maximum of 32 The DECT module contains the equivalent of one BRI module therefore it does not require a separate trunk
339. tem Status Monitor board to allow the cables from the redundant equipment to be connected The diagram below notes the location of the connectors for the redundant power supply and for the redundant fan Figure 7 System Status Monitor internal connectors 1M 1M iil MLLI g cable iit LIT ii oo000 00000 o0000 00000 0000000 00 000 00000000 00 000 o Mother board Redundant power supply Mother board J10 monitorin Board power Redundant primary fans CPU fan Remote temperature sensor Note Chassis has all PCI cards removed for clarity P0607659 02 Installation and Maintenance Guide 40 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 addendum Initializing the hard disk single disk system The BCM1000 is normally initialized at the factory However if you have to replace the hard drive in a single disk BCM1000 you must re initialize the Business Communications Manager After you replace the hard disk and the system has booted up perform the initialization as follows 1 Enter the terminal emulation program as described in Finding the configuration menus on page 170 The Platform Initialization Menu appears Refer to Figure 8 Figure 8 Platform Initialization Menu screen Platform Initialization Menu
340. ter you perform your system data restore Refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide for a description of performing a data restore from your BRU backup disks P0607659 02 129 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM1000e expansion unit This chapter describes how to install the BCM1000e The BCM1000e must be installed close enough to the BCM1000 that the 5 m 16 ft cable between the two units can be connected to the BCM1000 without stress on the cable The BCM1000e has the same environmental and electrical requirements as the BCM1000 For more information about these requirements refer to Preparation checklist on page 119 Installing the BCM1000e into a rack The BCM1000e fits into a standard 19 inch equipment rack You must install the unit in the same rack as the BCM1000 Caution When installing the BCM1000e in a rack do not stack units directly on top of one another Fasten each unit to the rack with the separate mounting brackets Attaching the mounting brackets You must install two rack brackets on the BCM1000e to allow you to install the unit into the equipment rack These brackets are supplied with the unit 1 Place the BCM1000e on a table 2 Align the screw holes between the unit and the right rack mounting bracket Refer to Figure 44 Figure 44 Attach the rack mounting bracket to the BCM1000e ly Installation and Maintenance Guide 130 Chapte
341. the PEC does not slide in easily check the alignment 4 Replace the cover 5 Restore the unit to operation Refer to Restarting the system on page 240 P0607659 02 Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 287 Replacing memory The version 2 5 BCM1000 comes equipped with 256 MB of Random Access Memory RAM The previous version 2 0 release of the hardware contains 128 MB of RAM In both cases the memory resides on a Dual In line Memory Module DIMM in center of the main printed circuit board motherboard This board contains space to add a second DIMM or you can upgrade the existing DIMM Figure 146 provides an overview of the process for replacing or adding memory chips Figure 146 Process Map Memory replacement Do a software shutdown Set up unit for Install a new maintenance DIMM Remove the top m 1 cover p Test system Pull DIMM off i motherboard Danger Risk of shock Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Caution Use only a Nortel Networks approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Installation and Maintenance Guide 288 Chapter 20 Replacing data cards and processing hardware Replacing memory DIMM chips You replac
342. the RPI Caution The RPI unit must have the DC backup power supplied by a UL listed universal power supply UPS The UPS must have an output voltage rating of 44 to 52 V DC with a maximum fault current limit of 6 A to protect the RPI output wiring If these requirements are not met it is necessary to use class 1 wiring Warning You must install the RPI units inside a building AN The AC outlet powering the RPI must be installed near the equipment and must be easily accessible The length of the RPI cord from the outside surface of the unit to the plug must be a minimum of 1 3 m 4 5 ft and a maximum of 4 6 m 15 ft Figure 69 RPI unit Installation and Maintenance Guide 194 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system There are two versions of the RPI unit e The RPI 8 BIX UL supports a maximum of eight base stations e The RPI 16 BIX UL supports a maximum of 16 base stations Each RPI has a connection printed circuit board and either one RPI 8 BIX UL or two RPI 16 BIX UL power supply units PSUs The maximum input power consumption of an RPI is 240 W If you use a UPS 48 V dc backup source the maximum input power requirement of the RPI is 140 W You can upgrade an RPI 8 BIX UL to an RPI 16 BIX UL by installing a second PSU to the RPI 8 BIX UL If you distribute the RPIs around the site the number and type of RPIs depend on where you place them and how you power the base stations T
343. the dialing numbers DNs assigned to each DS30 channel Table 21 ASM 8 switch settings Select 2 3 4 5 6 Tiai Select Enter these switch settings 0 on on on on on on on on on 0 on on on on on on on on on on on on on on 0 eg on on on on on on on on on 0 C on on on on on on 0 on on on on on on on on 0 on on on 1 on on on To assign 221 228 237 244 253 260 269 276 285 292 301 308 309 316 ER offset 4 2 3 4 5 6 these DNs Custom DNrange 1 of 229 236 1 of _off 245 252 1 of _off_ 261 268 1 _off_ _off_off 277 284 1 oM oR 293 300 The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available Installation and Maintenance Guide 148 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches DSM switch settings There are two types of DSMs e DSM 16s have 16 lines These modules require a full DS30 channel each The offset is always set to 0 Warning Ensure that switches 1 2 and 3 are always set to On otherwise your module will not function e DSM32s have 32 lines These modules require two full consecutive DS30 channel numbers You set the firs
344. the provisions of this warranty shall apply to the repaired or replaced telephone set until the expiration of ninety 90 days from the date of pick up or the date of shipment to you of the repaired or replacement set or until the end of the original warranty period whichever is later Proof of the original purchase date is to be provided with all telephone sets returned for warranty repairs Exclusions Nortel Networks does not warrant its telephone sets to be compatible with the equipment of any particular telephone company This warranty does not extend to damage to products resulting from improper installation or operation alteration accident neglect abuse misuse fire or natural causes such as storms or floods after the telephone is in your possession Installation and Maintenance Guide Nortel Networks shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages including but not limited to loss damage or expense directly or indirectly arising from the customers use of or inability to use this telephone either separately or in combination with other equipment This paragraph however shall not apply to consequential damages for injury to the person in the case of telephones used or bought for use primarily for personal family or household purposes This warranty sets forth the entire liability and obligations of Nortel Networks with respect to breach of warranty and the warranties set forth or limited herein are the so
345. the system For a description of the telephones that can be used on the Business Communications Manager system refer to Telephones and adapters on page 103 For information on installing and replacing i2002 and i2004 telephones refer to the IP Telephone Configuration Guide Determining the status of a telephone To discover the system status of a telephone you must know the DN of the set and which port on the Business Communications Manager the set is connected to If the tables in Chapter 14 Installing optional telephony equipment on page 227 were filled out when the telephone were installed refer to them to determine the port each set is attached to To find out the status of a set Open the Unified Manager Click on the keys beside Resources Media Bay Modules Click on the bus number DS30 channel assigned to the media bay modules supporting the telephone line Note IP telephones are listed under DS30 channel 1 Ports for IP telephones are automatically assigned as the telephones are registered to the system Refer to the IP Telephony Configuration Guide for more information 4 Click Port Port is the port connected to the telephone Click Channels Click on B1 or B2 to view the appropriate DN number State indicates the state the set is in Installation and Maintenance Guide 294 Chapter 21 Replacing telephones Replacing telephones with different models If you disconnect a digital or
346. tings for each module These settings are then set on the module DIP switches This chapter describes the latter process of positioning your modules in the DS30 hierarchy and determining and setting the DIP switch settings on the module Rules for assigning DS30 channels Media bay modules are assigned to DS30 channels in a specific hierarchical manner This section describes the preferred order of positioning for each type of module Notes about assigning modules The following are some general notes about assigning modules e If you chose a 3 5 channel split for your system DS30 channel 7 cannot be used by any module For modules that require two channels this means that you cannot set the DIP switches to channel 6 for those modules because the second level of lines would fall into channel 7 and would not be accessible Refer to Figure 49 on page 137 Refer to Understanding DS30 channel numbers on page 114 for more information about 2 6 and 3 5 DS30 channel splits e DSM 32 modules require two DS30 channel numbers When you assign the first DS30 channel number to an DSM 32 the module automatically adds the next DS30 channel number For example if you assign DS30 channel number 2 to an DSM 32 it uses DS30 channel Installation and Maintenance Guide 136 Chapter 7 Setting media bay module DIP switches numbers 2 and 3 However you cannot choose DS30 channel 7 for the DSM32 module because the second level of DSM lines
347. tion 6 Do not select any load to by pass the core upload and continue with the initialization process Figure 4 MSC Initialization Menu screen 1 Select Etiquette MSC load 2 Select CT2Plus MSC load 3 Select E1 MSC load 4 Select E1 Global WSC load 5 Select E1 CALA load 6 Do not select any load 7 Platform Initialization Menu M Return to Main Henu MMMM MMMM MMM MMM MMMM MMM MMMM MMMM Product Version BCM1000 Release 3 0 Version RC 2 2 Issue 4 feo nn MMMM MMMM Initialization InProgress Configuration Valid Service startup Manual Hea MMMM MMMM MMMM MMMM MMMM MM MMMM MMMM MMMM Motherboard SH815 PCI Cards MSC WAN Empty LAN LAN MSCUersion 36CKC66 sleet stati eee l ole ee elise ieee eaten ieee ienientententententententententententententententententententententententententententententententententententent Hake a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M 7j P0607659 02 BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide 30 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 1 addendum Note The initialization process is automatic and takes approximately 40 minutes The system automatically reboots a number of times as part of the initialization process When the first reboot occurs the telnet session disconnects 8 When the initialization process is complete restart a telnet session with the Business Communications Manager 9 Atthe main menu select 2 Syste
348. tion number This telephone equipment complies with Part 68 Rules and Regulations of the FCC for direct connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network The FCC registration number appears on a sticker affixed to the bottom of the telephone Your connection to the telephone line must comply with these FCC rules e An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant See installation instructions for details e Use only an FCC Part 68 compliant Universal Service Order Code USOC network interface jack as specified in the installation instructions to connect this telephone to the telephone line To connect the phone press the small plastic tab on the plug at the end of the phone s line cord Insert into a wall or baseboard jack until it clicks To disconnect press the tab and pull out See installation instructions for details Installation and Maintenance Guide If the terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of the product may be required But if advance notice isn t practical the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary If a network interfac
349. to Telephones and adapters on page 103 for a description of these telephones Analog telephones are supported either through analog modules ASMs or by connecting to a digital module through an Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA2 Documentation describing installation and set features is supplied with each piece of equipment Caution Do not use telephones as off premises extensions OPX Digital and analog telephones must not be installed on any connections not protected by building equipment Analog terminal adapter The Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA 2 connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to a digital line connector on a media bay module on the BCM1000 Refer to Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters on page 217 for the requirements and procedure for installing the device Installation and Maintenance Guide 186 Chapter 11 Installing telephones and peripherals Central Answering Position CAP The Central Answering Position CAP module connects to an M7324 telephone The module provides 48 additional memory buttons For installation procedures for the CAP refer to the installation documents that came with the CAP Telephone port and DN cross reference The media bay module that analog and digital telephones are connected to dictates DNs and port numbers Use Table 34 to identify which port your telephones are connected to For future reference put a checkmark besid
350. to Business Communications Manager your station amphenol connectors can be connected into the media bay modules without adjustment Trunk connectors must be converted to RJ11 CTM or RJ45 BRI connectors However if you use the FEM module to connect your Norstar modules to the Business Communications Manager hardware the station wiring needs to be adjusted Refer to FEM wiring on page 182 System setup Use the following table to make a note of your basic system setup Post this page near the BCM1000 for future reference DS30 channel 2 DS30 channel 3 DS30 channel 4 Media bay module DIP switch setting Line set type Line Loop DN range DS30 channel 5 DS30 channel 6 DS30 channel 7 Media bay module DIP switch setting Line set type Line Loop DN range P0607659 01 Appendix B Media bay module combinations 313 Set DNs and port numbers The media bay module based on the switch settings of the module defines which DNs and port numbers can be populated with telephones If you have changed the default start DN for your system use Table 65 to identify the DNs and ports for your sets If you are using the default start DN 211 a completed chart is provided in Table 34 on page 186 Table 65 Cross referencing ports and DNs
351. troducing the Business Communications Manager 87 Installation overview continued Connect data networking equipment Initialize the system Connect the telephony components Install optional mobile equipment configurations The data networking components of the BCM1000 provide network connection to your local area network LAN and or your wide area network WAN For instructions about how to install the data networking components refer to Connecting the data networking hardware on page 163 Systems are shipped with a default IP and subnet mask You must change these settings to suit your system Refer to Setting initial system configurations on page 168 which also describes how to set up your computer to access the Quick Start Wizard which you use to perform system configuration Refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide for details about the Quick Start Wizard The telephony components of the Business Communications Manager system provide call processing and connection to the public telephone system For instructions about how to install telephones and components refer to Chapter 10 Wiring the modules on page 175 Chapter 11 Installing telephones and peripherals on page 185 and Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters on page 217 The Business Communications Manager supports a number of cordless handset systems includin
352. types DTM and BRI modules Digital trunk types Description T1 digital line that carries data on 24 channels at 1 544 Mbps North American 30 channels at 2 048 Mbps Europe Loop E amp M DID and ground start lines are also versions of T1 lines You can program auto answer T1 loop start T1 E amp M trunks T1 DID T1 ground start trunks PRI and IP trunks to map to target lines to provide for attendant bypass calling directly to a department or individual and line concentration one trunk can map onto several target lines DID This is a type of T1 trunk line that allows an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Loop This is a type of T1 line This type of line is used on systems where the service provider supports disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks These trunks provide remote access to the Business Communications Manager from the public network This trunk must have disconnect supervision to allow the trunk to be set to auto answer which provides the remote access portal Ground T1 groundstart trunk These lines offer the same features as loop start trunks but are used when the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for digital loop start trunks Ground start trunks work with T1 only By configuring lines as ground start the system will be able to recognize when a call is released at the far end E amp
353. uct NetBIOS provides a standard interface to the lower networking layers The protocol provides higher level programs with access to the network network Two or more computers linked electronically to share programs and exchange data network device A network device is a hardware entity characterized by its use as a communications component within a network network DN A number supplied by the ISDN network service provider for ISDN terminal equipment network interface card NIC This card is installed inside a computer so the computer can be physically connected to a network device such as the Business Communications Manager server On hold A setting that controls what external callers hear music tones or silence when you place the call on hold Program On hold under Feature settings in System programming overflow A setting in Routing Service that allows users to decide which path an outgoing call takes if all the lines used in a selected route are in use packet A packet is a unit of data that is routed between an origin and a destination Each packet is separately numbered and includes the Internet address of the destination Packet and datagram are similar in meaning A protocol similar to TCP the User Datagram Protocol UDP uses the term datagram page A feature you can use to make announcements over the Business Communications Manager system using the telephone speakers and or external speakers Page
354. uctions Refer also to Chapter 14 Installing optional telephony equipment on page 227 Note You can configure most types of telephones before they are installed Refer to the Programming Operations Guide for specific instructions about telephone settings and using the New Users Wizard to set up telephones c To connect analog equipment to a digit line refer to Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters on page 217 Installation and Maintenance Guide 180 Chapter 10 Wiring the modules Table 31 and Figure 66 provide the wiring scheme for the DSM 16 4X16 and DSM 32 modules The Sets heading indicates the position of the set on the BIX block Set DNs are allocated by the Business Communications Manager based on the DS30 channel setting on the station module Table 31 DSM wiring chart Sets Sets Pin Wire color Port 1st 2nd Figure 66 Wiring for DSM 16 4X16 and DSM 32 26 White Blue X01 1 17 1 Blue White X01 1 17 Zopar connector 27 White Orange x02 l2 18 T Tip 1R 26T 2 Orange White X02 2 18 oan 28 White Green xos 3 19 3 Green White X03 3 19 29 White Brown X04 4 20 EE 4 Brown White X04 4 20 30 White Slate X05 5 21 5 Slate White X05 5 21 31 Red Blue X06 6 22 6 Blue Red X06 6 22 32 Red Orange X07 7 23 7 Orange Red X07 7 23 33 Red Green X08 8 24 8 Green Red X08 8 24 DSM 32 34 Red Brown X09 9 25 The second 25 pair connector is 9 Brown Red X09 9 25 wir
355. uipment The instructions in this manual are intended for use by qualified service personnel only Risk of shock Ensure the Business Communications Manager base unit is unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening the Business Communications Manager base unit Read and follow installation instructions carefully Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Only qualified persons should service the system The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Business Communications Manager system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire Earth Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth via the power cord Therefore it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit Specifically operations requiring the unit to be powered d
356. uld include equipment such as a radio with a high impedance earphone jack as a music source Music on hold specifications Ensure that the music source follows these guidelines Nominal input impedance is 3 3 kilohms Nominal sensitivity of this interface returned to digital encoded PCM is 22 dBm0 for a 0 25 V rms input signal The input is limited so that the encoded analog content at the digital interface to the network does not exceed 12 dBm when averaged over any three second interval The maximum non clipped input level is 1 V rms The interface is protected against ringing cross Installation and Maintenance Guide 230 Chapter 14 Installing optional telephony equipment Connecting the external music source Follow these steps to connect the external music source to the BCM1000 jack 1 Connect the miniature jack of the music source output to the music on hold input on the MSC Refer to Figure 94 Figure 94 Music on hold jack Music jack MSC faceplate Ring C Sleeve O Tip Music signal Ring Noconnection Fp Music on hold Sleeve Ground input 2 Adjust the volume of the music source to a comfortable level by activating Background Music and adjusting the volume at the music source TIP You can adjust the Background Music volume at every telephone External music source programming You must enable Music for callers on Hold and for Background Music through programming Refer to
357. ule and ensure that it is in the off position b Grasp the handle and pull the tab beside the rocker switch towards the handle c Pull the module out of the housing Position the redundant power supply housing in the BCM1000 Align the screw holes in the redundant power supply with the screw holes in the base unit Attach the redundant power supply housing to the base unit using the four screws inserted into the top and bottom holes Refer to Figure 134 Figure 134 Attach the redundant power supply housing Power supply housing screws P0607659 02 Chapter 19 Replacing a power supply 275 5 Insert the power supply bracket and secure it with a screw Refer to Figure 135 Figure 135 Securing the power supply bracket Power supply bracket screw ESSN NNN SNY SNY WAN So 6 Ifyou have not already done so install a redundant fan into the unit Refer to Adding or replacing a cooling fan on page 261 Inside the cabinet reconnect the power supply and fan cables Reconnect the power supply and fan cables 9 Replace the cover 10 Ensure that you position the power modules correctly before inserting them into the power supply housing a The green LED sits at the top of the unit b Check the rocker switch on the left side of the module and ensure that it is in the OFF position Installation and Maintenance Guide 276 Chapter 19 Replacing a power supply 1
358. ules Norstar M7324N UK and Australia only same features Note There is no Business Series Terminal equivalent to this telephone Business Series Terminal T7208 one line display eight memory buttons with indicators i2004 IP telephone connects through an internet link to the Business Communications Manager Multi line display six memory keys with indicators It can be used to call through VoIP or PBX lines Not shown i2002 IP telephone and i2050 Software Phone interface Central answering position CAP North American systems only connects to an M7324 telephone and provides 48 additional memory buttons You need one Station Auxiliary Power Supply SAPS for every M7324 telephone that has CAP modules e Central answering position CAPN UK and Australia only same features connects to M7324N telephones Installation and Maintenance Guide 104 Chapter 2 Telephony hardware Norstar M7100 one line display one memory button without indicator Norstar M7100N UK and Australia only same features Norstar M7310 two line display with three display buttons 10 memory buttons with indicators 12 dual memory buttons without indicators Norstar M7310N UK Australia only same features Mobility options Companion region specific provides twinning capability between a stationary set and a wireless mobile set These handsets communi
359. umentation for the other three systems is provided in separate documentation for each system Refer to Telephones and adapters on page 103 for information about the handsets and the hardware they use to connect to the system Data networking components The data networking components connect the Business Communications Manager system to the local area network LAN and or the wide area network WAN These components are installed at the factory Modem card North American systems only a V 90 modem that sends and receives data using the public telephone system This connection can be used to manage the Business Communications Manager system from a different location provide dialup backup fora WAN card LAN interface card a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet network interface card that connects the Business Communications Manager system to the local area network WAN interface card a network interface card with a T1 interface and sync port that connects the Business Communications Manager system to the wide area network WAN The WAN card connects to a T1 PSTN line with an integrated T1 DSU CSUs North American The WAN card can also connect to a T1 PSTN line with an X 21 or V 35 interface Europe Middle East Africa EMEA Installation and Maintenance Guide 76 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager Media Services Card The Media Services Card MSC a PCI card performs call processing and
360. unications Manager DSM providing a radio interface for three cordless handsets The cordless handsets register to the base station which transfers the call over the telephone lines connected to the system The handsets are configured to emulate the T7316 M7310 telephone features This system is most suited to small to medium office environments set up in an open fashion T7406 cordless telephones use the DNs for the ports on the station module that the base station is connected to They are digital sets and use M7310 T7316 as an operational model The T7406 Cordless Telephone Installation Guide provides e deployment parameters e a description of the handset features e instructions for installing the base station e instructions on how to correctly charge the handset battery e general operational directions including describing special operational features of the handset Moving telephones You can move an Business Communications Manager digital telephone to a new location within the system without losing its programmed settings if the telephone has been enabled with Set relocation When you enable Set relocation automatic telephone relocation the internal numbers autodial settings and personal speed dial codes remain with the telephone when you disconnect the telephone If you connect a different telephone to the jack before you reconnect the moved telephone the new telephone takes the programmed settings The Business Communication
361. unications Manager expansion unit The BCM1000e houses a maximum of six additional media bay modules The cable that comes with the expansion unit connects into a DS256 port on the MSC of the BCM1000 and into a DS256 port on the center panel of the BCM1000e Refer to Figure 22 This cable called a Category 5 DS256 or RJ45 cable must be 5 m 16 ft long Note The number of modules that actually can be installed is determined by the number of DS30 channels required by the modules and the number of channels available Refer to Chapter 5 Installing the BCM1000 on page 119 Figure 22 DS256 connector on a BCM1000 and a BCM1000e BCM1000 base unit cooo 3 3 EAR 00 O 00 000 000 no 000 of O O fe O O OOOO S O O O DS256 port BCM1000e DS256 port Power LED Status LED Installation and Maintenance Guide 86 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager Installation process overview Figure 23 provides an overview of the installation process described in this book Figure 23 Installation and initialization overview P0607659 02 Chapter 1 In
362. unk Module DIP switch settings Mode select DIP switch settings Country select DIP switch settings 4 5 6 DS30 ion on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on ion on on on ion on on on on BE 3 3 e e e fo O e ee 3 5 5 O AE 3 5 Be BEBE 2 D on on on on BE 3 5 fe e 3 35 5 O E g ojo jo o 5 3 3 3 3 12 3 4567 8 Switch Function Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Country 3 Country 2 Country 1 Setting for automatic downloads all countries Download based on profile Manual settings pre BCM 3 5 systems North America 600 ohms Taiwan Australia United Kingdom North America 900 ohms BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide P0607659 02 BCM1000 BCM 3 5 addendum 19 Table 2 Global Analog Trunk Module DIP switch settings Wiring the GATM The other trunk media bay modules are connected using RJ type jacks The GATM however uses an amphenol connector These cables can be supplied by qualified technical personnel to ensure the correct pin out i Warning Use only qualified persons to service the system The installation and service of this unit must be performed by servic
363. unks and IP telephony functions This configuration is called a 2 6 channel split You can change the DS30 channel allocation to a 3 5 split to accommodate increased IP telephony or VoIP trunk requirements You do this by assigning DS30 Channel 7 to the voice data sector This choice should be made at system startup but a default system can be changed through the Unified Manager to a 3 5 split after startup if IP requirements increase At startup you indicate the split you want when you run the Quick Start Wizard Refer to the Programming Operations Guide for details P0607659 02 Chapter 4 Selecting the media bay modules for yoursystem 115 Figure 37 shows a model of how the DS30 channels are a subgroup of the DS256 channel on the MSC The diagram also shows offsets which are a subgroup of the DS30 channels Warning If you change the channel split from 3 5 to 2 6 after your system is configured you will lose all the data and optional application connections Figure 37 DS30 channel model Four offsets per channel DS30 channel 2 l DS30 channel 3 l DS30 channels l DS30 channels available to modules DS30 channel 4 available to modules in a 2 6 split in a 3 5 split DS30 channel 5 DS30 channel 6 DS30 channel 7 DS30 channel numbers are set using the number 4 5 and 6 DIP switches on the back or underside of the media bay modules The exception is the
364. uration Guide Multimedia Call Center Setup and Operation Guide and Multimedia Call Center Web Developers Guide Personal Call Manager User Guide T7406 Cordless Telephone Installation Guide System documentation map The following four pages provide a map of the Business Communications Manager documentation CD The map shows the overall task process of the system and indicates which documentation deals with each section All the documents describes are included on the documentation CD that came with your system Installation and Maintenance Guide 64 Preface Installation documentation Voice Mail and Remove your Business Communications Manager components from the box Call Management Documentation CD Applications BCM1000 and BCM1000e hardware installation Operations Installation and A Maintenance Guide Setting up media bay modules Installation manuals come with telephones Analog telephones ATA 2 installation Companion Portable handsets Region specific per DECT Deployment Tool DEI and Provisioning Guide T7406 T7406 Cordless Telephone Installation Guide a Nortel Networks IP telephones IP Telephones Symbol NetVision wireless IP telephones Bo te eens Installing lines Bix Block Wiring Guide Nortel Networks digit
365. ure 21 BCM1000 operational LEDs SNS E E E E E E o a e g O 10000000009 i A PCI devices Ss k E Res mm O Operational LEDs jg 22929 29 i O A Business C mmutications Makager O J R Ie mst O A E SS ee o Power Disk Status PCI Devices Temperature Fan These LEDs monitor power e disk drive F e system status e five PCI power indicators Note These LEDs correspond to the cards not to the PCI slots For example a WAN card uses only one PCI slot but has the capacity for two connections In this case both LEDs stay lit as long as a WAN card is present temperature J e fans amp The LED states are described in Table 25 on page 161 The Unified Manager contains a monitoring tool that allows you to determine the current condition of the LEDs from your computer Refer to Using the System Status Monitor to monitor LEDs on page 232 Installation and Maintenance Guide 80 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager System options The Business Communications Manager system provides a number of software applications that enhance basic functionality Some of these applications work immediately after you install the BCM1000 this is considered core software Other applications are enabled when you enter software keycodes which you generate when
366. ver Remove the blank slot cover Insert the RAID board into the slot in the housing so that the end with the LEDs fits through the open card slot Ensure that you insert the board so that the bottom tab fits into the open slit at the bottom of the card slot Clip the back end of the RAID board to the middle shelf of the media bay module housing Refer to Figure 113 Figure 113 Clip the RAID board onto the media bay module housing Media bay module housing RAID board Note This clip holds the board to the media bay module housing If the clip is not gt engaged you risk breaking the RAID board The spacer tab located above the clip must rest against the outside of the media bay module housing to provide support for the board Installation and Maintenance Guide 254 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk 8 When the board is seated correctly return to the board face inserted in the slot in the front of the unit With the screw you removed from the blank cover secure the header plate of the RAID board in place in the slot Refer to Figure 114 Figure 114 RAID board LEDs on face of base unit N RTEL Front of RAID board 9 Replace the front bezel 10 Refer to the next section to complete the mirrored disk upgrade Connecting the RAID board After you inst
367. work interface e primary and optional secondary DNS servers e default next hop router e fractional T1 channel numbers if you are using fractional TI e system name e WAN link protocol e frame relay DLCI CIR if applicable e V 90 modem settings North America only Note The initialization chapter of the Programming Operations Guide describes the information required by the Quick Start Wizard which includes this information Default IP settings All BCM1000s are shipped with this default address e JP 10 10 10 1 e Subnet 255 255 255 0 administrator If this address conflicts with the LAN settings you can cause network damage if you connect the network without changing the IP address A Warning Before using this address on your network check with your system If you can use the default IP address you can connect the BCM1000 to the LAN as described in Connecting wiring to the LAN card on page 164 This allows you to configure to the BCM1000 system from your PC through the Unified Manager P0607659 02 Chapter 9 Starting the system 169 Connecting when there is an IP address conflict If you cannot use the default IP address you must change the IP address of the BCM1000 through one of these connections e a terminal and a null modem cable Refer to Using a null modem serial cable on page 169 e acomputer and an Ethernet crossover cable Refer to Using an Ethernet crossover cabl
368. works Call Center Reporting requires keycode monitors the statistics of a call center This application is also compatible with IP wallboards from Itel and SYMON Call Detail Recording System Administration Guide Call Detail Recording no keycode required records and reports call activity from the Business Communications Manager You can create reports from this information to help you manage system usage effectively CallPilot Reference Guide CallPilot is a core Business Communications Manager application It works with the telephone system to provide automated receptionist service by answering incoming calls and routing them to telephones or mailboxes on the system This guide explains how to use the CallPilot application CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide and CallPilot Programming Record CallPilot Manager is the web based application that you use to set up and administer CallPilot Automated Attendant is the CallPilot answering service that answers incoming calls witha Company Greeting plays a list of options to a caller and performs call routing functions in response to caller selections CallPilot requires keycodes for additional voice mailboxes provides a voice mail application as part of the core Business Communications Manager programming CallPilot provides voice messaging Automated Attendant and Custom Call Routing features for Business Communications Manager telephony services Voice Mailbox
369. would not be accessible The same applies to channel 6 if your system is set to a 3 5 split Refer to DSM switch settings on page 148 e The DIP switches on the 4X16 module are used to set the DS30 channel and offset for the CTM part of the module The module automatically assigns an additional DS30 channel for the 16 DSM lines However you cannot choose DS30 channel 7 for the 4X16 module because the DSM lines would not be accessible The same applies to channel 6 if your system is set to a 3 5 split Refer to 4X16 switch settings on page 145 e Companion configure the DSM or DSMs handling Business Communications Manager Companion to DS30 channel 6 or 7 You must change the module number of any trunk media bay modules configured to module 6 or 7 to an unassigned module number to prevent conflicts with Companion Note Companion DS30 split restrictions gt If you choose a 3 5 channel split for your system the second module cannot be assigned Therefore you can add a maximum of 16 Companion base stations which support a maximum of 30 handsets This means you can only use a DSM on channel 6 You cannot assign a DSM 32 e The CTM8 module uses two offsets on a DS30 channel You assign the first offset to the module and the second offset is automatically selected This means that you can choose offset pairs 0 1 1 2 or 2 3 Because the module requires two offsets on the same DS30 channel you cannot select offset 3 Refer to CTM switch
370. xtensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 split you cannot use DS30 07 for the DSM 16 module Available only on systems set to FDD Modules cannot be set to double density on systems set to PDD Refer to the previous chart for the switch settings for single density and PDD Available only on systems set to FDD with a 2 6 DS30 split Modules cannot be set to double density on systems set to PDD Refer to the previous chart for the switch settings for single density and PDD P0607659 02 Installation and Maintenance Guide 38 BCM1000 BCM 3 0 addendum CTM CTM8 and 4X16 CTM DSM switch settings Select Select Enter these switch To assign To assign these To assign And this DS30 bus offset settings these lines these channel and lines toa toa CTM8 lines toa DNs CTM 4X16 1 2 3 4 5 J6 Lower Lines 1 4 CTM DSM portion Upper lines 5 8 portion 2 0 on on on on on on 211 214 211 214 219 222 211 214 1 on on on on on 219 222 219 222 227 230 219 222 cule 2 on ff on on on on 227 280 227 230 235 238 227 230 P
371. y Companion portable telephones feature a three line 16 character alphanumeric display Administration and maintenance tools Programming of the Companion system is easily and quickly done through the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager You can assign portable telephones to the system check base station parameters and enable and disable registration through programming Companion Diagnostics software allows you to run diagnostics on the wireless system You run the diagnostics using a personal computer located at the customer site or in a remote location For more information about programming Companion and running diagnostics see the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide P0607659 02 Chapter 12 Installing the Companion system 193 Installing the Companion hardware The Companion hardware must be in place and configured before you can use the handsets to connect to the Business Communications Manager This section describes the installation of the various pieces of hardware The base station has the option of using internal or external antennas For most installations the internal antenna will be used If you need to install external antennas refer to Installing external antennas and lightning surge protection on page 207 Installing a RPI for the base stations The remote power interconnect unit RPI provides remote power for base station support Figure 69 shows a diagram of
372. y module the default the system provides the increased digital processing service to support your IP requirements DS30 channels are internal communication paths controlled by the MSC Each DS30 channel provides a possible 32 signaling channels and 32 media channels Two DS30 channels are exclusively dedicated to MSC resources Five paths within these channels have hard coded applications The other paths can be assigned to various applications such as voice mail dialup ISDN WAN VoIP trunks or IP telephony Five DS30 channels are exclusively reserved for the media bay modules The sixth DS30 channel can be switched to accommodate media bay modules or more channels for IP telephones or VoIP trunks You control the use of the channel by your choice of using either a 2 6 or 3 5 DS30 channel split This is set when you run the Quick Start Wizard at the initial startup of the system For more details about deciding which DS30 channel configuration you want for your system refer to Determining module channel requirements on page 117 and to the chapter on configuring MSC Resources in the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide PEC IIs The BCM1000 uses PEC IIIs to deliver increased capacity for digital signal processing for voice mail call center FAX VoIP trunks IP telephony and dialup ISDN WAN The basic system comes with two PEC IIIs Two more can be added to accommodate increased requirements for
373. ystem The Programming Operations Guide describes how to program the Business Communications Manager equipment Telephone Features Programming Guide provides feature descriptions and programming for the numerous telephone features available to users through the buttons on the digital telephones supported by the Business Communications Manager If you are not an experienced telephone installer the BIX Box Wiring Guide provides illustrations for correctly wiring internal cable connections to telephones All optional Business Communications Manager applications have installation and user guides specific to that application For an overview of what these guides contain refer to Telephony features and options on page 80 Attendant Console Setup and Operation Guide and Attendant Console User Guide Call Center Agent Guide and Call Center Supervisor Guide Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide Call Center Set Up and Operation Guide Call Detail Recording System Administration Guide CallPilot Unified Messaging Installation and Maintenance Guide and CallPilot Desktop Unified Messaging Quick Reference Guide CallPilot Fax Set up amp Operation Guide and CallPilot Fax User Guide CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide and CallPilot Programming Record CallPilot Message Networking Setup and Operation Guide and CallPilot Message Networking User Guide CallPilot Reference Guide IP Telephony Configuration Guide LAN CTE Config
374. ystem by adding a second hard drive you can skip step 6 However if you are replacing a primary hard drive in a mirrored disk system you may find it easier to remove both drives from the brackets Figure 105 Remove the brackets from the hard disk Single disk bracket Note If you are returning the hard disk to a Nortel Networks repair facility package it carefully in the replacement hard disk box If you do not have the original box package the drive in another box with shock absorbing material P0607659 02 Chapter 17 Replacing the hard disk 247 Installing a new hard disk This section describes what you need to do to install a new hard disk into the BCM1000 Follow these steps to replace hard disks into the brackets and then back into the base unit housing 1 Ensure you have followed the directions in Removing the hard disk on page 244 2 Attach the new hard disk to the brackets positioning the hard drive so the exposed electronic components face down Refer to Figure 106 Figure 106 Connect the brackets to the hard disk single disk system Note Mirrored disk note In a mirrored disk system the Primary system disk is always installed in the bottom level of the brackets If you are upgrading to a mirrored disk system position the new hard disk Mirror Primary over the existing hard disk between the tall brackets There will be a space between the hard disks Refer to Figur
375. zing the hard disk single disk system 0c e eee eee eee 249 Installation and Maintenance Guide 50 Contents Installing the mirrored disk controller 0 c eee eee eee ees 252 Installing the RAID board acs ccsee cee ctiee cen iad sek ieee a Bee ene 253 Connecting the RAID board ace ceee eid ec tee de iray dee 254 Connecting RAID board ribbon cables 00000 2 eee eee 255 Routing power for mirrored systemS 20 000 eee eee 256 Power routing for 2 5 hardware on ac cs dna we dea eae ak kA ea 256 Power routing for 2 0 hardware 2006cecesccenceenweeeeeeenene enn 257 PAD Doard LEDS 1 ces ae rcce adhe deagnedeadiavreySeus banenere bees 258 Controlling and monitoring mirroring operations 00002 259 Chapter 18 Adding or replacing a cooling fan 2 000 ce eee 261 Troubleshooting fan OPSIGIION stnidvativenin sd eeive teas heey eee 262 Removing a fan from the BCM1000 2 cee ees 262 Replacing ie COGING TAN 2dcsch6c 0ene ei stu cameo ee tEn EEES E EEEE 265 Removing a fan from the BOM10006 cock eke eee eee 266 Replacing a fan into the BCM1000e 00 02 e eee 268 Chapter 19 Replacing a POWEr SUPDIY lt cc siis cca deen bede sidant ede cane 269 Replacing a standard power supply 020 00 eee eee 269 Removing the standard power supply 0200 eee eee eee 270 Installing a standard power supply 0 000 cece eee eee
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
Pump Boss I manual - Electronic Technical Enterprises Samsung AR10HSSSDWKNHC دليل المستخدم Eurex Exchange`s T7 MANUAL dE SERVICIO TÉCNICO American Dynamics ADV096HD User's Manual 3Com WX1200 Switch User Manual ASUS Desktop PC Samsung NP700Z3CH User Manual (Windows 8) Rose Translator Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file